3D Modeling using SketchUp Pro 2022

1. Introduction: Welcome to the SketchUp course. My name is Alexander and I will be the instructor of the course. Sketchup set already mentioned our modelling software used in many parts of the war by architects and engineers to its qualities for modeling simple and complex models. These models can be using contractions, point genuine the same. Therefore, this course is focused on knowing how to use the qualities of a SketchUp. Now, one of the most important qualities that a SketchUp has, cases precision, and this is because it's actually based on the coordinates that you can find on the Cartesian plane. Which means the software perfect for geometric drawing and also pretty useful when designing mechanical and industrial parts. And this one has a large number of tools that can be used to create models. And despite holidays, It's actually very easy to use because of the simplicity of the tools and the interface. However, despite the fact that it's easy to learn, it is quite powerful in terms of its tools without losing the simplicity that the schedule is known for as well, the SketchUp users have greater extensions that allow the functionality of the software to be extended beyond what you have by default with SketchUp. So there's software hopefully allows the integration of extensions because of the language that is being used without changing the functionality of the software. Now if you wanted to create these extensions or if you want to know more about the extensions, you can actually learn how other language studies using SketchUp. Also, SketchUp currently is quite useful to, to the fact that eating pores in CAD formats, like the one that receives in aggregate, fair also currently is not only related to the other softwares, rather type of files you can import and export because there are supports that can recognize these SketchUp files directly, such as aluminium. And the newer versions are private. So there's no longer need these extensions at the same time, a sketch or can be integrated with programs like lumen to wherever model while rendering as well, this course will focus on important aspects. The use of the software, such as the basic understanding of the user interface, how to draw and edit shapes in a SketchUp. Part of the groups and components we options available when gradient the components, the materials, the animations, that basic understanding of the structures that you can create by using SketchUp petals that you have in a retrograde arrays, landscapes and environments in general. They use the sophisticate chip on the interior of the sign updates and the new version. So this ketchup, the extensions among others. But as one going to cover how you can create a style that can be used in order to present your models based on this top builder. So we pull this and mine at home. They enjoy the course. 2. The Welcome Window: Now once you open a SketchUp, where there is for the first time, or every time you open a SketchUp, you are going to see the welcome to a SketchUp window, or in another words, this welcome window. Now this welcome window, you will be able to open a new file based on that template. So you can see on this section. But also you can open a file that you already greater and as well, you're going to be able to see the recent files that you have created. Or in another words, they files theory say Nashville, you will be able to find the files that you have recently opened. And at the same time, you're going to be able to change how you display these files under wealth and Windham. Now with this in mind, you're also going to see on this window that you have a section very Score, learn. Now when you use this, you will be able to open SketchUp website specifically on the sections that you can see. Or in another words, they are SketchUp forum, this ketchup campus, and this ketchup periods. Now in order to get the most out of SketchUp, you will need to sign in myasthenia SketchUp user, which is also important under licensing limit SketchUp. Or in another words, your license has to do with your account. Now before opening a model, you will need to select the template that you want to use if you are using that welcome window, which means that you can even disable the welcome window on this ketchup preferences, as we're going to see throughout these lessons. And Amanda templates, you can see templates for imperial units such as the architectural. Another one that is also called architecture, even though he's using metric units. So below the name of the template, you are going to see the units that the templates using. Now once they open a file by using a template, you can also open a new file by using another template. And you will be able to do this by using the sketch menu in order to celebrate says nephron template. So when you use new from template, you will be able to see all the templates that have been created and also the ones that you have created in order to create your models. So you are going to be able to create your models based on the templates are throughout this course, you're going to be able to see how you can create your own templates. Specifically, they change it so you can do before saving the template. 3. User Interface: Now continuing on, once the already opened a sketch or you're going to be able to see the user interface. The user interface, you will be able to see the name of the file as well as the version of risk ketchup that you're using. But also you will be able to see this ketchup menu. And the SketchUp menu is located by default on top of the user interface. Regardless if you're using a Mac or PC that is running on Windows. And this menu will have most of the same tools where you can find out the toolbars as well as many of the options that are also available on other parts of the user interface. But there are few things where you can only two ways and there's many. Now what this means said, you will be able to also use the mouse or my specifically the menu that you can open by using a mouse in order to do the same thing that you can do with the icons and the main window. Or in another words, you can minimize, restore or even closer SketchUp. Now another part of the user interface or the toolbars, you will be able to enable or disable leftovers that you want to use by clicking where it says tubers. And when you click where it says toolbars, you will be able to enable or disable the toolbars pace and the boxes on the left of the name of every tuple. So it's very easy to enable or disable any tuber myosin, this window. Now if you use a Mac, it will look like this. But also you will be able to select the options for the toolbars, such as large buttons in case that you have on a small screen, or in case you have a hard time looking at the icons as well, you're able to enable, what did we say about the tooltips, which is sending their recommend you using mainly so you don't have to use the option that is called large icons. Wherever you have a small screen or something else. And the tool tips will appear after a delay. Once you hover on the tools that you can find out the toolbars. And also, he will be able to enable or disable these options at any point while working in your model. Now even if you close one other toolbars by accident, you can actually enable the toolbar once again by just simply checking once again, the box on the left or the name of the tumor. Now this will be pretty useful because we can place all these toolbars based on the area of the interface. But awesome, because you can place the toolbars, have cited the main part of the user interface, or in another words, on top of the morning area. Now it's a quick sign. You can press and drag that toolbars from a user interface, which means that you can also change the location of the toolbars within the user interface. Now so quick sign-on, unimodal area, you will have the modelling origin, which is the intersection of the lines that you can see right next to the silhouette on the screen. Now what this means. You can also see when you have a toolbar already enabled by default as part of the user interface. And this one is called the measurements. So you can enable this toolbar. You will be able to see that the measurements are no longer on the user interface. However, you will be able to place this toolbar anywhere that you want. But also, you will be able to see that this user interface is actually pretty basic because you will also have the area in which you create the model, as well as the area in which by default you have the measurements, as well as the trace. The next lessons I'm going to show you how they're used, but also how you can customize them in additive models. Because once you close this toolbar, you will see the measurements once again on the user interface. So with this in mind, you're going to see the basic user interface. They have any SketchUp. 4. Customizing The Toolbars: Now if you want to customize the user interface, you can actually do this by their use and the toolbars window, or by using the mouse in order for you to select the toolbars they went to enable or disable, or just simply open once again that Ober's window. Now as well. You're also able to gray here on tubers, which means that if you don't want to use leftovers as such, you can create your own toolbar in order to have access to the tools that you really want to use. And in order to use this just needs to track their tools or commands to the toolbar, the graded. However, you are not able to do this. If the toolbar window is not open, you will need to make sure they have the toolbar window actually open before dragging that those arguments are the toolbars. Additionally, you can use on the keyboard or the Option key on a Mac. Hey, not every move one of these tools to another toolbar, encase the already great Any toolbar. And you're the one I use this window in order to enter the toolbars. Now with this being said, since you are able to move them into a new toolbar, you're also able to move the toes recommends that the original tubers, however, they're also able to recite at all, but we are selecting by using this window. Additionally, we are able to reset all the toolbars at the same time. So you will be able to reset all the tools back to the original Dover. And also you will be able to delete any toolbar, a gradient. Now so quick sign-up are going to notice that by default, you actually have to recommend that actually has a drop-down. And this one is the one that lets you know if you are using the select to recommend or lasso two argument. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see where you actually have two tools instead of one. Which also means that you can reset the toolbar. And while doing this, you're also going to reset that to recommend as such. Or in another words, you will be able to see now you have the drop-down enabled. Once again, this is kinda worker in order to enable the stroke them once again. Nasa quick center, the select and the lasso are different tools that are used for the selection of elements for entities on the model. Now if you just want to remove a toolbar, remember, they just need to drag the toolbar or why friendly interface, so you can close it. Nasa quick sino lead to argument you're using will be highlighted on the user interface. So while you're using it to recommend going to see a light blue on the icon of the two arguments here using on the user interface. Overall, this window is very useful for managing the toolbars that you need to use in order to work on your model. And also if you want to, you can always create a new toolbar for the tools that you really want to use NSK chip. Because as we're going to see throughout the course, many of these tools have shortcuts, but also many of these tools can also be found on this sketch or menu. And as well, besides the option of receptor toolbars, you will have the option of renaming our toolbar you created. So with this in mind, it will be able to grade you on toolbars, but also you will be able to rename the toe, but the Ukrainian, which once again means that you will be able to delete a toolbar. You chose the gray. However, they're going to see that the default tubers cannot be deleted. So with all this in mind, you will be able to modify the user interface, or more specifically the toolbars, basin and needs that you have might work in your models. 5. Customizing The Trays: Now besides the toolbars, you can also customize the trace they have by default, but also they will allow you to work in your model when it comes to other components, materials, and so on. So with this in mind, they're going to have the entity Info Panel, which will provide you information about the elements that you place where the new model. Now the entity Info is not like the properties pallet or properties panel in another software such as surrogate or even revenue, however, is going to have a few options that you might want to use. And also you have the Components panel. They will allow you to place the components. Also the components 1.5 properties are parameters that you can see once you select the component. Additionally, there are other panels that will help you with different aspects of the design, such as, for example, the material spinal, nasa quick center. You are able to expand and collapse these panels are using the second, if you're using a Mac, it will look similar to this. Now what this means said, you're also going to have an instructor and will allow you to see the basic functionality of many of the tool circumvents using SketchUp. However, there is a few things where you can only see on this part. So with this in mind, when you use some other tools or commands, you will be able to see a few options of the two argument that you're using within this textbox. And also the instructor will change based on the tools that you are using while creating your model. So you can get an idea of what you can do with most of the tools in SketchUp values. And then Madison, on the same part of the user interface, you're going to find the geo localization, the credits, and the measurements. Now this might be confusing at first until yesterday using all these options and tools circumstance in order to create your models. Now the first thing that you can see, the trace is that you can hide them or hide them, or more specifically, you can use that are high in order to hide this panel until you actually want to use them. Besides the option of how high you can also select where you can place a lot of talk that trace by pressing and dragging the trace to any of the other directions on the user interface. And these directions are the ones that you can see on top of the modeling window when you're dragging the trace nasa quick center, you are going to see that you can use the controls at the center, but also the controls at the ends of the modeling window. Now since we are able to see the Default tray, you will have options in order to customize the tray and the panels. Certainly SketchUp menu, you will be able to do more than just hide in the tray. Because in here, you will be able to even change the name of the trace that you're using. You can select any name that you want, but I will keep the same name throughout the course in order to avoid confusions. But also you will be able to enable or disable the Palestine haven't the trace. So if by any chance you close any of these panels, you will be able to use this ketchup menu in order to enable the panel once again and also as well. The reason why I'm mentioning trace and sterile tray is because you can create more than one. Which means that if you click where it says Manage trace, you will be able to select from selling the panels that you want to use for any of the trace, as well as the options that you have on the right. Which means that you will be able to rename that trait that you are selecting. But also you will be able to create a new tray, which will allow you to select the name and the panels that you want to use on their tray. But also by using this window, you are going to be able to see that you can assign the panels even after grade and the trace nasa quick center. When you send this window, you can select all the panels by just simply clicking Select All. So this means that when you're creating a new tree, My going to be able to write down the name as well as selecting the panels that you want to use. And if you want to use other panels, you'll need to click select all before clicking where it says Add. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see that once the upgrade any tree, you are going to be able to switch between one and the other and laptops on the bottom. Now the reason why you have the option in order to create new traits is because of SketchUp has many panels. So in some cases, you might want to use these panels without collapsing the panel. So it's easier just have two tabs based on the uses of each of the panels. So with this in mind, since we are able to create a trace, also going to say that now you're able to manage the trace, the Great Basin, the sketch of menu, which means that you can add more panels, but also they are able to delete the panel, which is something that you can also do, a center manage Trace window. So with this in mind, you can delete a tray and as well, you can create new trees or use another part of the sketch of many hours, pretty much the same thing As you said, the managed Trace window mass. Well, you're going to see they are able to organize these panels within the trace by just simply pressing and dragging the mouse until you move the panel. So the position of your choosing, or in another words, until you have the order that you want to use. 6. Customizing The Preferences: Now as well, there are a few other changes that you can do to the user interface if you want to. So if you open the preference window, you will be able to say there is a few changes. So you can do on the user interface such as, for example, the colors, which means that you will be able to change the colors for the axis, as well as for the other colors that are used while working in SketchUp. If you're using a Mac, this window will look like this. So with this, you can change the color of the axis by essentially choose Color window. Furthermore, you can use reset, pull in a little reset any change done to the colors. And also as you can see on the preferences, you will be able to sell like Ron selling if you want to use large icons for the BI tool circumvents, which is the same option that you have under toolbars window. 7. SketchUp on a Mac: Now as well, but user interface will change a little bit based on the computer that you're using. Or in another words, it's going to change a little bit based on if you're working on Windows or Mac. So in this lesson, I'm going to show you as much as possible the basic interface that you've having Mac, however standing for you to notice, is that there is now going to be that much of a difference because you can still see the name of the file as well as the person with SketchUp. And also you will have the toolpaths that you can use with any SketchUp. So this means that the user interface, this is still going to be based on toolbars. While at the same time, you will be able to decide which tools do you want to use from the toolbar by pressing and dragging these tools to one of the toolbars. But also you will be able to see where you have the panels. Are you going to use some of the fault trace? How are some of these panels are going to look a little bit different. Now their parents has to do with instructions or the instruction sets that you have a Mac. So because of this, some panels can actually see in a little bit different, even though the word function pretty much the same way. So Mac and Windows will keep the same functionality even though the panels will look different. And in the case of some panels, you are going to see that you will have a few options, may even have a Windows. How are these options are going to be minimal because we are going to see that you're still able to do the same thing, but in different ways and as well, something for you to know is that the changes sweeping Mac and Windows are going to be some minimum that throughout the course, I'm going to be able to show you the differences within one or the other. So just for example, that the Option key on Mac control on Windows, while at the same time the command key is pretty much the L key that you have in Windows. So what this means throughout the course and go into it. I know in case there is a difference between how you do something on Windows comparative to Mac. While at the same time, I'm going to provide you a reference from my specifically an image that you can use in order to see how they interface shoot up your Mac. 8. Navigation in SketchUp: Now when you start working in a sketchbook hormone specifically before grading anything, the one thing that will be useful for you to know is how reuse most of the options are to circumvents that you have the camera toolbar and starting first with the orbit. The orbit pretty much allows you to orbit around the center of the model. Also, there are other tools or commands that are actually used, the origin of the coordinate system, whether it's the origin on the modal space or the origin of the groups and the components. But also since many of the elements that you can grade within this ketchup, you are going to say that the orbit also rotate based on the origin of those elements. Now, the next two argument is called pen. The pen will allow you to move horizontally or vertically based on the current position of the camera. So this means that the camera, while they still have the same position, however, we're going to move the position of the camera on the X and the Y axis of the camera, which means that it will move horizontally or vertically. Now the next one is called Zoom. The Zoom to argument that you can find out the toolbar will allow you to zoom in and out by using the mouse. Additionally, you use this tool based on the center of the camera, or in another words, based on where the camera is looking at. Now as well, you have the window soon, which will allow you select what you want to see. So you will create a window, and this window will determine the Zoom window. Now, right next to it, you have this some extent. Now the zoom extense pretty much sums in a way in which will allow you to see everything that you have within this area. So with this in mind, you can use to some extent, because you are too close to the phases. Or in some cases, you might be within the model as well. You're going to have another two or command that allows you to change the camera. And this one is called Previous. Now the previous, neither previous will allow you to go back to our previous position of the camera. Now this one actually has a limit. How many previous Can you use? Or in another words, you can only use it a few times before he goes back to the position of the camera that you had before using previous as well. If you use some of these tools are commands. They're going to say that there is a few options that you can use right away. And also many of the tools are commands that you can use any SketchUp. We'll also have options that you can see at any point. And the most important options will appear at the same part of the user interface or loosened their tools are commands that you have in SketchUp. So for example, with the urban shift, you will be able to use pen or listened to recommend as well. If you use control, you're going to be able to see that you can suspend the gravity. Nasa quick sign in. You can do the same thing on a Mac by using the option key. Now suspend gravity is just another way in order to say that you can free or within the model, or in another words, you won't be using the center of tomorrow as a reference. Instead of this, you will be able to freely use the orbit, whether in the model. Now as well, if you use the Zoom and we'll be able to use shift on the keyboard in order to change the field of view. Another Philip You may sound in there, I'm going to cover in a little bit more throughout the course because there is a few things that you can actually do when you send the field of view and the rest of the tools on this toolbar. Nasa quick sign on the value of the Philippine. You can be changed by using the keyword once you enable this soon too. Now as far as something important for you to know is that you have what is score. There's some selection. So this means that if you select one or multiple elements within the model, you will be able to use some selection in order to zoom to that specific element. So this will be pretty useful when you're working on a large model. So with this in mind, you will be able to have an ether axis. So the elements that you selected. And also we are going to be able to use some of these tool circumvents by also using a mouse. So if you use, for example, the wheel on the mouse, you will be able to zoom in and out. But also if you press the will and the mouse, you will be able to orbit on the monospace. Which also means that you can use pen while using the orbit. So you can use pen while you send the urban or you can simply throw your model. So with this in mind, you won't have to use the camera toolbar so much while working in your model. And you can change the assumptions at any point by using the mouse. But also something for you to notice is that they assume that you can use where the mouse is different for lesson may have water soon too, because they assume that you can use, by using the wheel on the mouse is based on the position of the cursor instead of the camera as well. If you want to use, many of these tools are commands. You can actually see that many of these tools are commands have shortcuts. If you go to the sketch menu and you click where it says camera, you are going to be able to see the orbit, the pan, zoom. In the field of view. There's a window and also to some extent, but also you're going to see the shortcuts that will allow you to use this tool circumvents without having to use the camera toolbar or without having to use this menu. Last but not least, you're able to use the mouse in order to zoom in and out. You're also going to see they are able to use the preferences. You have any SketchUp in order to modify how you use the mouse. Or my specifically how you use that wheel on the mouse. So if you use the option that is called inborn, you will be able to embed it. You will be able to embark on how they will handle mouse is going to soon on the model, which means that instead of zooming in and out, you will be zooming out. So as you can see, the navigation is actually pretty important. But also you will have different ways in which again soon, but depending on what you want to do when your model. 9. Understanding The Axes in SketchUp: Now when you start using a SketchUp in your models, you are going to see that you have access, then you can actually use in your drawings. Now this axis, as you might have noticed, have an origin. And I love this is because I sketch it actually uses coordinates. Or in another words, he uses the Cartesian plane. So with this in mind, it will have positive values and negative values on the opposite direction. So the positive values are represented by consistent lines, while the negative values for the erection of representing what a hidden lines, as well as SketchUp will let you know which are the axis are you currently using? Because a highlight on the line, but also because of the texts right next to the cursor or a mouse. Because we actually grade everything based on coordinates, you are going to see that everything that your grade will work in your model will actually have a coordinate. So this means that the end points of the shapes will have coordinates. And then also when you draw, will have a star coordinate for the beginning and the end. So in another words, when you draw a line, when you're telling a SketchUp, is the coordinate of the end point or the point. And then the coordinate of the other endpoint, or in another words, the end of the line. And this is important because this ketchup or less storage this information. So if you then ln, one other lines that make a face and the face is going to be the leader makers. The face is determined by the existence of a line. Consequently, you can create new lines if you want to create a different face. But also while creating lines, you can see that the color of the lines changes to the same color, the axis when you use the access in order to draw a line. And also cyclic signer, the phases are referred to as polygon on other softwares, they're are used for games, movies and such. So SketchUp, actually crazy faces, or in another words, polygons. Now I'm going to create a few lines by using specific coordinates on the mono space. Which means that aren't going to draw these faces by using a specific values. So I can use them in order to show you the coordinates that I use in, thanks to a two argument that is called texts. So I'm going to grade the following shape and then I'm going to use this to recommend that also will be able to see some of the absolute coordinates, but also we'll be able to highlight the vertexes and then make this face. And as well something for you to know is that the basic coordinates that you have out of the absolute coordinates coin. In other words, the coordinates there based on the origin of this space are absolutely. That's a big center. This is one of the reasons why sketches very precise point. In other words, since I sketch abuses coordinates is going to be very similar to softwares such as Seroquel, which is one of the reasons why sketching is biocompatible when importing from advocate, but also when exporting to aggregate. Additionally, something that you might want to do is hide the access that you can see on the monospace or modal window. So for these, just need to use these SketchUp menu and then uncheck the option tesco axis on this menu. However, even if you hide the axis and the coordinate system is not going to change. So if you're trying to model space, you're still going to be using the exits. So with this in mind, you can choose how you want to create your model. Or in another words, if you want to use as a reference the origin of the coordinate system, which means that you can actually use this menu in order to high, high the axis. And this will apply only to the axis they are using within the model. Mass outbreak sino, within the components, you're also going to have absolute coordinates. If the component wise greater as an independent model, which is suddenly they're also going to show you throughout the course. 10. Understanding how to create Elements in SketchUp: Now when you start working in a sketchbook, you're going to see that when you create elements, it will need to know how to use the axis. So in this case, we are going to have the right access, the green axis and the blue axis. Now the red axis is actually the x-axis. So the green axis is going to be the y axis, which means that the blue axis is going to be the c-axis, which will allow you to be very precise when it goes to joins point. In other words, when it comes to the models. And this is mainly because of the fact that you will know when you are drawing or modelling and then a specific axis. Also using the measurements to see the values that you are using white gouache in the model. And even after grading they join, you will be able to see the information of the elements that make the drawing on the entity Info Panel. So in another words, when you create your joining a SketchUp, you will need to take into account the axis, the measurements that you can see on the user interface. And the entity Info Panel, learned SketchUp, different shapes that you can create. However, they're all going to be based on the basic elements that are used in order to create a shape. Which means that you have the vertex deadlines and the faces. So when you have more than two points for the perplexes, you are going to get a line. And when you get more than three lines, you're going to get a face. Now once the greater the faces, you are going to see the basic information on the entity Info Panel. In other words, Lear, as well as the two sides of the face. So this means that each of the phases is going to have a firm faith and about face. Now this is actually very important. If you are creating renders, you send a SketchUp because the render takes into account which phase is supposed to be the front and which phase is supposed to be the back. So because of this by default, as SketchUp uses the white face as a friend and a great face as the back sign. You can assign material to the different size of the phases. Or in another words, you will be able to select a material for the front face and another one further back face. So every time you select one of these phases, you're going to see the front face and the back face. The editing for panel as well. The entity Info panel will display the information based on the elements, but also the elements they are selecting. So if you select multiple lines, we're going to see them. I'm not lying still selected nasa quick sign on their lines in a SketchUp or consider edges. And as well as with the faces, you're going to have different options in order to edit them, in order to work with them as well. Since the axis are very important, we are going to be able to see a visual representation of the axis they are using while you're creating the drawings for your model. So this means they are going to have a green line, red line, blue line depending on the axis they are using. But also if you want to use and a specific axis, you can use the keyword main order to block the access to you're using and depending on the direction of your drawing. So with this in mind, you can restrict your drawing, repellent the access that you want to use as well. We can also be very specific of the lender you want to use. So this means that you can even tie the value that you want to use, the keyword in order to get a specific length or size the pen. Other tools you're using. Throughout the course, I'm going to show you how you can use the measurements in order to draw your model. Now as well, the x's are very important when a revenue model, because you can lock the axis, also an editor tomorrow. So once again, we access the measurements and the entity Info become very important in sketcher. So because of this, you can use them in order to determine how to create your drawings for your model. But also in order to see the information of the different elements that you have in your model. So with this in mind, you can actually create faces only by knowing the direction and the length of the lines, which also applies to the shapes because the tools are commands that you can use in order to various phases, also uses the axis, the measurements, and the entity Info Panel. Now as well, if you wanted to be more specific when it comes to your drawing, you can also use the iris and the keyword in order to lock the direction of the axis without using shift. So this means that you will be able to create an orthographic drawing by just simply using here is the keyword. So you can use the right arrow, the arrow and the left arrow for the main axis when you use SketchUp. However, we are also able to use the down arrow in order to lock the direction by drawing based on what you previously draw on the monospace. So you can continue the same line or you can create our perpendicular line by acinar cell reference, the previous one. Which means that this is going to take into account the coordinates of the previous segment. Or in another words, the edge we already draw. Which also means that you can change to another direction by using another of the iris and the keyboard. You can do the same thing with any other tools or commands that make use of the axis, which in SketchUp means most of the tools for drawing and editing mass. Well, something for you to know is that you can use once again, the service and the keyword in order to unlock the axis. And in the case of the down arrow, we will need to press it twice to draw as you normally would. So as you notice, the axis are pretty useful when creating your elements. But more importantly, this will allow you to be very precise when you work in a sketchbook. 11. Understanding The Faces in SketchUp: Now something important for you to know about a SketchUp is that you're able to edit the elements that you've already created by adding other elements. And this is possible because this ketchup squirts wet basic elements. Or in another words, it works with vertexes, lines in phases. So because of this, you're able to either the phases by creating lines that are in consequence is going to grow any faces. But at the same time, because you can create new faces, you can also restore the faces. So what this means is that if you delete the lines that modify a phase, you will be able to restore the face as it was before. Now the importance of this is that you will be able to use to sort elements in order to create more faces or in another words, in order to model. However, since the SketchUp works with vertexes, lines, or edges, and also faces, if you delete the lines that makes a face, you are going to delete the face. However, you will be able to create new faces by creating new lines. So it's very important for you to know how you can use this in a retrograde different phases for your model. Or in another words, in order to change the appearance of your model. Which also means we are going to be able to finish a shape by trying to unnecessary lines. And also the face is the Ukraine for heel will be created based on the ones closest to it, which means that it will be graded by using the firm phase or the back face. Now you can always see is the end of the info panel to make sure which one is which. Now once again, this is very important because of the renders. Now you can query based on the models that you create by using SketchUp. But also because of the materials, which also means that this is important certain materials. So in another words, the front face and the back face already have by default, a default material supply in order for you to know which one is the front face and which one is the back face. Mask while working with the phases is also very important because you have different options in order to work with the faces. So you have a basic option that is called reverse phases in order to reverse the direction of the face. So this means that you will be able to determine the front face and the back face of the phases that make the shapes. And another option that you have on this menu, his scholarly and faces. So if you use the option that is called, Are we in faces? After you select a face, we are going to be able to orient all the faces based on the face that you select it. Which means, very well try to orient all the faces that are connected together towards the inside or towards the upside. Or in another words, they won't match the orientation of the face there. You select it before using this option. So you can use this if we're applying the materials. And even though this is pretty useful, you might hand, if you're ever say my neighbor, clean up before presenting new model, especially if you wanted to present your model by using renters, because many softwares will only render the front face. Now as well, the faces are also important because you can also use an option that is called outline view. So you're able to use the outline view in order to align the view to the face view selected. So in case you are using a face that has an inclination, they are going to be able to use this in order to see what you create on the face. But also sensors, ketchup takes into account the access. You're also going to have an option that is called axis. So we are going to be able to use both of these assumptions in order to draw on a specific face. Nasa quick sign up, even if you change the location of the axis, the actual origin of the model in SketchUp is not going to change. So this means that when you change the axis, you're actually changing the relative coordinates that you want to use in order to create your model. While the absolute coordinate will remain the same, even if you're not able to see representing your model. So both of these options will be pretty useful when trying to model. 12. The Snaps or References: Now because SketchUp like coordinates are very important, you are also going to see references for it snaps in order to add more precision to your drawings. So for example, you are going to see the origin of the coordinate system. But also you're going to have an origin and other elements that you have created for your project. So in the case of the components are going to have references or snaps that you can also use. So you're going to be able to use this references in order to move elements, but also in order to draw the elements. Now this has snaps are references are going to appear on the cursor based on what you're doing. So this means they are going to be able to know if you're using any of the x's with some tools or commands, they're going to have further snaps references that you can use specific to that to recommend. So if you use the mode with this component, here, are going to be able to see that you will be able to multi-component based on the endpoints of the bugs that go find the component or what is called the bounding box. So each of the components, and it's going to have a bounding box that is going to bound the entire component based on the extent of the component. So when you hover, when any two recommend, you are going to say that the available snaps will appear on the component, which is something that also applies to any of the elements, are entities that you can create on your model. And this will even include the axis, because the axis are actually lines that are log on the model space. So you're going to see throughout the course that you can use this axis or lines in many different ways. Additionally, some tools or commands or best play a few additional controls on elements, such as the components, because SketchUp tries to make things a little bit easier. So for example, let's sketch I will try to make rotating I component a little bit easier. My atom is controls. So with this in mind, you're going to say that this has snaps are going to also work as controls. So you can use the penalty to procure man. Now as well, depending on the shape, you're going to have different snaps for references that you can use. So in the case of the lines, you will have the endpoints as well as on DH, as well as the midpoint, as well as the midpoint. On the case of other shapes such as TR, you're also going to have the mid points and the endpoints of the segments that make New York, but also the center of the art. A quick sign up every time you edit an existing element or empathy, you're also going to gray nearest names for these elements are entities. Well, the center is going to remain on the arcs and the circles regardless of how you edit them. But also you are going to be able to use them by using them as references when drawing and also when extra learning as well. This references will allow you to draw by using them as references, which means that you can use other endpoint such references in order to continue lines, but also in order to define the direction of the line you want to draw, which is something that you can also mix where they use for the shape as well as the use of the Arizona keyword. So this is an absolute references are going to determine I have some of the tool circumvents can actually be used as well. These are snaps, also great changes and the representation of the lines, if you start enjoying front annex system line, which is going to signify they are using their lines perpendicular, parallel or continuous. The line, they already have unimodel space. So as you notice, here are going to have some snaps for references. They're not going to be so common. So just for example from point. But you're also going to have a few common ones, such as, for example, on age and on phase. One important thing for you to keep in mind is that these naps can also be used as reference if people were to snap ones where the cursor. So if you do this, you can see the color of this NAB changes to black and that there is a hidden line that represents the connection to the snap. And on top of this, the curl of the hidden line will actually change if you're using one of the three axis, they have an MRO space, which means that the color will change to red, green, or blue. So we call this means safe. You can use this references in order to grade your drawings, but also SketchUp is very intuitive when it comes to using this references. Another greater straight lines to that destination. So what this means is the rough sketches very intuitive in or the grader line that has the shortest distance between 1 and the other. So this is actually pretty useful because it will allow you to create shapes pretty easily by drawing the shortest line once they have one of the endpoints in color or black. While you are going to see the little line that states can fix in that position until you're moving a little bit more. And also as a quick side note, this one can also allow you to use as a reference for the lines we already greater. So this can also be used when you try to create, for example, a rectangle. So there are a few snaps that actually intended to make everything a little bit more intuitive as well. A couple of things for you to notice the size they use. So the shape is that you're also going to have this snaps for references available, even if you hide the lines. As well as you will see throughout the course, there are other snaps that can be used when creating your model. So for example, there is a nose. Now, they can be used with shapes, groups, as well as components. And this is snap is going intersection. The intersection is going to appear when you're intersecting different shapes or elements. So let them will be pretty useful. But in the case of elements such as the components or the snaps are going to appear on a different color in order to let you know that there's references for it. Snaps are being used on components. So lattes is actually pretty useful for working your models because they will help you when modeling, but also when edit than the models. 13. Selecting Elements in SketchUp: Now we're working in SketchUp, since you have vertexes, lines, or edges, and also faces, we are going to say that the selection is going to be based on these elements. So this means that you can select the faces as well as the edges of your drawing. How are the perfect sets are going to be recognized by some other tools or commands when making your selection. Because at this naps, but also because they do recommend that you might want to use, can recognize the vertex is in order to modify your model and as well, something for you to know is that you actually have selection to automation on the user interface. By default, if you're using any of the tools recommends or you haven't SketchUp, you're going to be able to use the Spacebar on the keyboard in order to go back to the selection tool or a command. Or in another words, you can cancel any two or command in SketchUp by using the space bar. And it stays doesn't happen. You can use the selection tool or demand, but you haven't a user interface. And as well as SketchUp changes the color of the lines, groups, and components in order to reflect the selection of these elements are entities. While on the faces, it will add a texture on top of the face in order to represent that the face is selected by any of the two sort of commands that you can use, great and your model. Now once they are using the selection tool, I recommend you will be able to use shape and control in order to determine how you want to use this selection to recommend. So if you use control, you will be able to add elements to the selection. While if you use control while also present shave, you're going to be removing elements from this selection in as well. You can use shave in order to add and remove elements from the selection. Which means that if Sunday is not selected, it's going to be added. And this also means that if an element is already selected, is going to be removed from the selection. And as well, you're going to have different selections that you can use. Based on the right-click on the mouse. We are going to be able to use bounding edges, connected faces, all connected, all with the same tag, would say material selection. So if you use bounding, edges are going to say they are going to select all the edges to make the face as well as the face. If you use connected phases, we're going to select all the faces are connected together. But also you will have an option that is cool, all connected in order to select the entire shape. Now as well, you're going to have all with the same tag and put same material. Now we haven't seen that tax and the materials, however, it's important for you to know that this one's actually exist. And also you will have inverse selection in order to import the selection that you are using. Nowadays, one becomes very handy in cases in which you want to keep just one other phases of the shape. Now you're actually able to do the same thing by using the mouse. So if you use the mouse once, you are going to select your surface or an edge, while if you press twice, you're going to select all the lines are all DHS, they're connected together. And if you use this with a phase, they're going to select the face and DHS make the face. And finally, if you praise three times on the mouse, we're going to select the entire shape, or in another words, all connected. So as you can see, you can use bounding edges and I'll connect bias and the mouse. Now next SketchUp, since you're able to select multiple elements one at a time, you're also going to be able to use the window selection in order to select multiple elements at the same time. So you're going to be able to select multiple elements by pressing and dragging the mouse. However, this is going to be very similar to aggregate in the sense that depending on the direction in which you press and drag the mouse, is going to determine if you are going to select all the elements within the window selection. For all the elements that are touched by the window selection. If you go from left to right, we are going to select all the elements there are touched by the selection. While if you press and drag from left to right, you are only going to be able to select all there is within the window selection as well. You can use, once again, shift and control interface determine what you want to add or remove from your selection. And as well by you send the window selection, you will be able to appreciate a little bit better because it will add and remove elements depending on if these elements are already selected or not. Now what this means save, you also have a different type of selection by just simply using the lesson, which is a barrier to the window selection. So this means that if you use the lesson, you will be able to try lesser similar to Photoshop in order to select the elements within the model. Now the panel, the direction of the mouse, you are going to be able to select all the elements that are touched by the lesson. Now this is very similar to what you have in aggregate as well. You can use Control and Shift in order to determine if you want to add or remove from the selection. So they use or the shape and current drawn the keyword are standard in all the types of selections that you have in a sketchbook. Now, a quick side note, you can also see that you can use shift plus a space and the keyword in order to enable the lessor to recommend. Which means that they select to recommend, which means that the CLA have a lesson or consider different tools or comments. So the lessor is going to be pretty useful because it's an alternative to the window selection. And I say quick signer, if there are any shortcuts enabled by default mag, you are going to be able to see them right next to the name of the two argument. So with all this being said, you will have different ways in order to select elements for the new model. But also throughout the course you're going to see how all these options can actually be used. So you're going to see how all these options are going to be used depending on the complexity of the model. They are grading. 14. Standard Selection: Minus ketchup, they're going to have a few options that you can use in order to select multiple elements at the same time. So this means they are going to be able to use select poll, but also they're going to be able to use select None. Sorry, I'm going to create a few elements on a modal window to show you how this actually works, especially because there are many uses for the assumptions while creating your model. So if you want to copy an entire model, we then another one. We're going to be able to do this pretty easily by using Select All. So when you have multiple elements in SketchUp, they're going to be able to use Control a in order to select all the elements within your model. But also you are going to be able to use Control T in order to unselect all the elements within the model. And also they're going to be able to use inverse selection, which also means they're going to be able to use control plus shift plus the number one as a shortcut in order to do the same. And that's a quick signer. If there are any shortcuts enabled by default mag, you are going to be able to see them right next to the name of the two recommend as well. Throughout the course, we're going to say that there are other cases in which it's also useful. 15. Changing The Preferences (The Mouse and Lasso): Now to this point, you might have seen they are going to be using the mouse in order to grade your drawing or in another words, your model. So if you open the Preferences and you go to where it says Troy, they are going to see how you can use the mouse in order to change how you draw your model. And if you're using a Mac, it will look similar to this. So if you use the options that you have where he says, like their style, they're going to be able to change if you want to draw the lines one after the other one. When another words, continuous line drawing. He's the one option that allows you to continue drawing after you draw the previous line. If we disable this option, it will not be able to query the next line or element of tech join right after the previous one. And this can make drawing easier or harder depending on your model or the way that you create, you model as well, you're going to have other options that will allow you to determine how you want to draw fundamental space. So you can use, for example, click drag release in order to draw the model. And what this means is that in order to start drawing, you will need to press and drag the mouse at the same time until you finish the element or entity. And as a quick sign or if you use this, you're also going to see there under Preferences, continue, line join is disabled. And this is because you will need to click and drag every time that you draw poses a quick sign up. You can start a new drawing any way by using the Select tool for the Spacebar on the keyboard if you're using the default preferences. However, you can also select the other option that you have on the preferences, which is clay modeling, in order to also draw on the mono-spaced. Now by default, we're going to notice that this is pretty much what you normally do when drawing. Which also means that you will be able to enable or disable once again, the option that is called continuous line drawing. Now by default, use our other tech has ketchup, will determine the clicker style based on the tool circumvents that you're using. So in another words, that those are commands that you use in order to draw are going to be mostly based on clay leg. While many of the two circumstance they use in order to modify the shapes or in another words, the model are going to be based on click track release. Now below that layer style, you're going to have the lesser direction when she serves going to change the direction that you want to use for the lessor. However, this may be confusing at first because there is no other two are commend, may use this, this direction. And this is because it's the reaction forces you to change from where you store and finish your section. If you'd like to select the elements that are less or touches, you will need to follow the direction of the clock. And if you want to select only what is within the boundary of the lasso, you use the opposite direction. So by default, in SketchUp, this is set up the other way around and went a little bit of practice. This will not be so confusing. Now as well throughout this course, I'm going to link their preferences by default in order to avoid any confusion. However, if you want to, however if you want to, however, I'm showing you the preferences in case you want to start changing them right away. 16. Saving and Opening The Files: Now when you start working in your model, you might need to start grading a new model after finishing another one. So schedule will allow you to start any model by clicking on the icon that has a plus sign, or in another words by us and they knew to argument. However, once they use this, you are going to be opening a new model by using the default template. Let us assign on the preferences of a SketchUp. So if you want to, you can create any model by using the menu in case that this template is the one that you want to use. Which means that you can also use the shortcut, which is Control N, or in another words, Control plus N as in Nancy. But also you can select the template that you want to use, mice and these extra menu in order to select the option that is called New from template. So once they entered is going to be able to see the default template that is being used. They are also going to be able to select a new template that you want to use, a Loretta Gray, your model. So when they send mine, are going to be able to start your model right away to gray your model while it's still working in SketchUp. Meet Joe, so means they are going to be able to save your model at any point. If you use the same argument, you're going to be able to open the Save As window in order to save your file for the first time. And as a quick Center, you can also save your file by using the shortcut, which is Control S, or in another words, Control plus SS and Sam. So we are going to be able to save your file, which also means that you will be able to open it. So if you click the open to argument, they're going to be able to open the file, the receipt. Now with this being said, you can also do the same thing, basically SketchUp menu. So you're going to be able to use the open to our command, the menu. Or you can simply use Control O, or in another words, Control plus OSN Oscar, in order to do the same. However, on the menu, you're going to see that you have the option that is called Save As. So this one will allow you to open once again, they save as window regardless if you have say, your file or more importantly, this one will allow you to overwrite an existing file. Now with this means, say, you're even going to have an option in order to save this file as a coping. Which means that you can save the file as a copy for an ionic system file. In another words, you will be able to see the company without making any changes to the original file, which is a way in which you can create your own backups. So if you open any of these files, you're going to notice that the name of the user interface is going to change. And this is something more noticeable when you go back and forth between these files when you send a SketchUp. So with this in mind, we are going to be able to gray new files, open existing files, saving the files, and also open the file was already graded. Or in another words, the existing files. 17. General Preferences: In a SketchUp, model is greater base and a template that can be selected on the world. And when the Henley's one determines the units and the precision of the model. But also a few other things that are going to cover throughout the course. Now when you start grading your drawings, you will need to know how to change the template that you want to use in order to grow your models based on how you want to use a SketchUp. So you don't have to change the template every time that you create any model will work in SketchUp. Or in another words, every time that you've read any model, you are going to be using that template that you selected a stateful. So in order to do this, you actually use the main menu that you have in SketchUp in order to select a template that you want to use every time that you open any model. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to change the template that you want to use as a default template. But also if you go to waste this general, we are going to be able to determine if you wanted to create a backup. And also if you want to use how to save. Now the backup and the addressee are actually different because this ketchup can create a backup of the file that you're using, but also can add or say your file for you. In another words, it will be saved in the file without you having to do it. So the backup race any file while the outer safe, while RSA, the model based on the intervals that you select on the right of the arrow safe. Now depending on the size of the model, you might want to use the autosave in order to save the file in case you forget, however, if the file is very large, you might want to avoid the other safe and as well as SketchUp and actually fine a few issues when working in your models. They may actually have to do with coordinates or in another words, with the elements they already graded. So SketchUp can actually fix the problems, but also it can actually notify every time they have these issues. Now in SketchUp, I never have seen a problem that cannot be fixed while organic sketchy. And this is because most of these problems have to do with the information that is a storage in the model. So e.g. you have a model that has a few faces sharing the same vertical axes sketch, you will need to make sure that each of the phases has an accurate information, but also that that information is separated one from the other. So SketchUp is fixing coordinates, but then the information of the file and so on. Now reset or warning messages is nothing more than erasing all the error messages that you may already have, as well as the software updates that you have in SketchUp, which means that you're going to be able to check for updates. If you check Race says hello, checking for updates. But also in general, we're even going to be able to even select if you want to start a sketch showing the welcome window. Now the welcome window is the one that you see every time they started SketchUp. And it's the one that is similar to the window they use in order to choose any template. So all this in mind, you can change pretty easily the basic preferences that you have when you start working your models. 18. Changing the Units: Now next SketchUp, when you draw the shapes are at other shapes, the Braden S ketchup, you can see that the measurements are going to be visible while listen tools in a rather gray and add a new model such as the line. So in this lesson, I'm going to show you how these values are going to change depending on the tool they are using, but also the ones that you draw or at other shapes, you can select the different elements that make a shape in order to get the different measurements that are used within a specific shape. So e.g. with a face value that you can find on the model info is the area. However, depending on your country or region, you might need to change the units that you're using for grading your model or even after creating a model. So with this in mind, we're going to be able to change the units by using the model info window. Now this window might be confusing at first until you get used to a sketch. However, you are going to find that the first thing that you will need to know is the format of the units makers. The formats will actually determine the units they are going to be using. So you can change the format to architectural, decimal, engineering and fractional. So with this in mind, you're going to say that if you change one decimal architecture, some options are going to be disabled. But also the one-year drawn a monospace, the values you see other measurements are going to change. So this is very important for you to know because with this, you will be able to change the units of any other templates, the units that you use in your country or region. And this also applies for the models, the UK from somebody else. And as I mentioned before, depending on the format that you select, some options will be disabled. So they send mine, the pen and the format they use. Not only you are going to change the units, this play on the measurement, as well as the units press play on the moral info, but also the different options that you can change. So what is a mind that decimal one is the one that enables pretty much everything. Now as well, since we can change the format, you're also going to see, but you can change the precision, which is something that you might want to change the belly in your country or region. But also what do you want a gray. As far as changing the format will actually change how you use any of these tools while creating your model. So at the end, the important thing is greater than your model, a little bit easier with more precision. In order to make this a little bit more visible, I go into business and that decimal format. So you can see how the precision actually changes based on the zeros that you have right next to the point. So changing the precision, what automatically change the unit cell is pulling on the measurement, which in return is going to change that value. Is there going to be this play when you use the keyword as well using the decimal in order for you to see a different value so you can select for the land, the area, and the volume. Now the use of the land, the area and the volume are pretty much standard on every software. Just to clarify, the land is the one that is used in order to determine the extension of the lines while the area is used in order to determine the size of the face there is greater by the lines, while the volume is the one that is confined by all the phases of a 3D shape. So because you have different units in SketchUp, he will also have a different position for these units. So you can work using the same precision on all the units are with different precision on a specific units. As far as the groups and the components are also going to be covering in the course. Because in SketchUp, independent elements, groups and components function very differently. So in x, k, j, all of these is going to be possible depending on the elements that you're grading. The length and the area are pretty easy to see because they are related to the lines and the phases out of the volume is something that you can only get once they use groups for components. Now as well Sunday for you there now instead of SketchUp and snaps and the length of the objects that you're drawing based on this value. If you use this, you're going to see on the measurements that the value will snap and depending on the precision. So in another words, the precision is going to change my line snapping. And this is represented on the model info. Buy an option that is called enable snapping. So if you disable this option, you are going to see me, you can draw what that is snapping the land. However, in this case, this value is quite small because of the precision. This means that depending on the precision that you're using, snapping is going to change. So you are going to be able to change the user's this snapping by changing the precision. How are you can see that only when you change the precision of the land, this value is going to change. So this mapping is what a SketchUp Users, in order to help you avoid getting approximate values, which is Sunday night you might have seen by this point when you see this icon of the measurements. Now as well, you're going to see where you can even disable the display units format. So if you uncheck this option, you are going to notice that the format is now going to appear in the measurements. And this is now going to change regardless of the precision that you're using. Now because you can actually change the units affordable and you are also going to be able to change a few properties. We have to do with the angles. So if you use once again the model info, you are going to be able to change the precision as well as the angle is snapping. So with this in mind, you're also going to be able to change how the units relates to the angles. And in the case of the angles, is a little bit easier to appreciate how these snaps actually functioning and SketchUp. So this means that disabling, enabling this option is going to make this snap beans are a little bit more visible on this lesson. What isn't mine? I'm just going to change the value of your times so you can see the change on the measurements or in another words, on a tool that actually uses the angle. What did you send it to all the risk of protractor, we are going to be able to see the point in which the angle of rotation will lock until you rotate even more. A quick sign on the entity Info does not show an angle of rotation based on the origin of the monospace. Our SketchUp actually stores this information, has coordinates, just like for the suffers. Now as well, since the units and actually be changed on any of the models and templates, you're going to sit. The rough sketcher already has templates, whether specific units. So this means that you can open a template that is using the units that you want to use in order to avoid making changes while working on the model. Now the changes that you can do on the units. So huge, you cannot actually change this while working on the model. However, saving a little bit of time, it's actually pretty useful. And also as a quick side note, if you're using a format, they use this interests. You are going to notice we are able to enable or disable the display, the silver. When another words that you will be able to force the SketchUp to display the value of zero. And that's a quick sign on this template. You can see how the option that is called force, force, this play of silver actually functions. We'll try another mono-spaced or modal window. So with this in mind, you're going to notice that the units is one of the things that you actually need to know when working in SketchUp. But also, this is one of the lessons that might be confusing at first. So once they recorded the groups and a few other things, you can come back to this in order to see how this relates to the elements that you can create while working on the model. 19. Using the Measurements: Now next sketch are a few things for either no power they use are the units are e.g. how they're going to be displayed on the measurements. So e.g. if you draw the monospace a line that he doesn't actually reach, a value that meets the requirements of the precision, you're going to get a symbol of approximate on the left of the value. So in order to avoid this, you can always put the value by just simply using the keyword. With this in mind, you will be able to have exact values, but more importantly, more precision when he goes to the drawings. So you can create a specific shapes by using tools such as the lines, especially with more precision. If you know the direction and the value that you need to type on the keyboard. So this goes hand in hand with the coordinate axes and SketchUp. Now as well, something for you to know. Instead of SketchUp uses a lot of math because the language that is used in SketchUp. So because of this some other map and actually be used when drawing. So if you put a value and then you divide the value by using the keyword, you're actually going to get a line that is going to use a cell line, the result of the division. However, you cannot use this with a basic map or in another words, the multiplication and such. However, this is not aluminum factor because of other features that are SketchUp has. Once the elements are created, you can see the value of the result on the model info panel after selecting the element graded. Now as well, if you use the model info window, you are going to be able to see that you can actually change the format that you're using. How long were the other options that you have on the units? How are you going to see that if you try to use the keyword or in another words, once you presented the keyword, this window is going to close. So this means that when you have opened the modeling for window, you will need to select points again, my line to recommend for any other command on the toolbar so you can use as you normally would. And this applies to any of the tools may use when drawing and editing a model. Now with this in mind, something else while for you to know is that depending on the format that you're using, the balanced you important the keyword are going to be interpreted by SketchUp a little bit differently. So if you use e.g. the architectural units, you are going to notice that the sketch is going to recognize these values as centrist. So whatever value that you input is going to be converted to inches. However, 2 " are going to make it fit. The pen and the format that you're using, you will need to keep in mind how you input these values. However, something else well for you to know is that in the case of this format, you can actually input the value followed by the symbol that is used in the field. And a SketchUp will recognize the value has fit. So the architecture format actually combines the engineering but a fraction. And this is because the engineering actually works in faith while the fraction now works on inches. So what this means, but if you use the one that is called the engineering, all the values that you are going to be recognized by Sketch or as fit with this in mind, whatever value that you input followed by a point, it will become better at 2 ft or fractional is going to do pretty much the same thing, however, is going to do it based on inches. So the fractional value for pay pretty much the same thing as just simply following how they inches or actually use. Additionally, the values are either not type in. The keyword may appear with a symbol regardless of the format. So you send the keyword is still important if you want a specific values migrating your model. So if you want to be able to use feet and inches at the same time, or in another words, imperial units. That one that I would recommend you using is the format that is for architecture. However, if you are an engineer, you might need to work on Linnaeus and feet. So this is actually pretty useful for you to know, however, will come down to your country or region one as well. He went though, you're using a different format as SketchUp. Recognize the inches when you're using engineering. If we use the right unit, former nasa quake sino holidays is also very important for you to know because we're going to see that the value in the measurements are going to change based on the two, recommend that you're using. One of the benefits of using tomorrow info window will join elements such as lines, is that you can get the value used in different formats without having to close the window. So once that I cover that too sort of commands that you can use in order to draw different shapes. You are going to see they are able to use the keyword type two different values, which is the case of the rectangle. 20. Creating Lines: Now next, ketchup, able to draw on tomorrow space hormonal window. Now Detroit is the gray, are pretty much use a lot of the great elements that can be used for the shapes. However, you can also create shapes by just simply join the elements for your model. And in order to create that joins, you use the drawing toolbar. And as the other toolbars, you can enable and disable these toolbars in different ways, such as e.g. by using a mouse in order to open this menu, but also by using these ketchup menu in order to open petal persuader. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to enable or disable this toolbar, white gouache, and your model as well. This toolbar is composed of many different tools that you can use in order to draw different elements or shapes where you model the first two or command that I'm going to show you a straight line. Now that line is the tool that I have been using in order to talk about the z-axis, let coordinates, and so on. You're going to see that the line is the most simple tool that you're going to find. However, is the most useful one of all the tools that you have on this toolbar because you can use it in a retrograde phases, but also in order to add them. So with this in mind, you won't be able to use the line based on the access, but also you will be able to use the keyword, but also using the axis, which means that you can tie the palliate, the keyword that you want to use for more precision. Now since you can use the axis as well as the keyword, you're also going to be able to use references or in another words, it snaps in order to draw the lines. However, this doesn't mean that you cannot create the lines anyway, the one by just simply drawing the lines in any direction as well. There is a few things for you to notice about these two arguments, such as e.g. the fact that you can keep using the line tool or Command until you're finished a face. Or in another words, you will keep using my line tool Pergamon on to use the space bar on a keyword for interior finish her face as well. You can use the line tool I recommend as the other tools or comments on this toolbar by just simply using this sketch menu. And the shortcut for the line to our command SLS and Larry, where there is some Windows or Mac. Now the next two are command, where you can find that this toolbar is called the free hand. Now these two are domain is actually based on the line because it actually allows you to draw a polyline that follows the direction of the mouse. So this means they are going to create multiple lines in a retrograde has single polyline. Now as well. You can use the polyline in order to close her face. So this means that you can create a face by using multiple polylines, or you can simply use one single polyline in order to close the face. And as a quick side note, you are going to notice that you are also able to use the snaps you send the freehand. Now civic center in SketchUp this polyline Escola curve. And the reason why Scala curve is because we are going to be able to make a few changes, but you can do with the curves. So we're going to see on the model aim for a few changes if I start using the options they have in the free hand. So I'm going to use once again, they still recommend in order to show you how you can add, but also remove segments from this polyline. So after trying this polyline, I can simply use control in order to decrease the amount of segments that you have on the polyline until the point that is actually possible on a monospace. And since you are able to decrease the number of segments, you're also going to be able to increase the number of segments by just simply use an R on the keyboard. So with this in mind, you're able to increase or decrease the number of segments. So this polyline at any point. However, once the UK, so these two recommend, you won't be able to do this with a polyline that is already graded. So what this means is that you're only able to do this for the last polyline that you created, or more specifically, by the last polyline that you created before changing to another tool or a command such as the selection tool. You will need to give this in mind when you use the Paulina in cases in which you need to add a little bit more detail to this polyline. When cases in which you need to decrease the amount of dado the polyline or curb that is graded by using the free hand. So as you can see, my line tool is the basic one on the drawing toolbar because all the other tools, great elements based on the line for edges. So because of this, you can change the amount of segments that make this element. Or in another words, the current that is created by using the free hand. 21. Creating Rectangles: Next, there is another tool or a command that also uses the line to recommend as a reference, and this one is called a rectangle. Now when you use the rectangle, we're going to see that you are able to place a rectangle anyway, the E1, which means that it's SketchUp, is going to try to assign the axis that you might want to use. And this also means that you can use these snaps while creating a rectangle. Now, since the rectangle is composed of four sides, will be able to create a phase based on the rectangle. So SketchUp is going to create the face based on the fork vertexes as well as the lines or edges. So this means that our schedule is going to query that face based on the four edges and they end points of the edges. Now with this in mind, the rectangles actually use the measurements. So if you create a rectangle the following way, we're going to see that the rectangle actually uses the wave and the depth. Now in the case of the rectangle, you're going to notice that if you want to add more precision, you will need to use a comma. And this is because we are going to have two values. So you will need to input the first value followed by the comma and then the second value before you seen Enter on the keyboard. And as well as many of the other tools or commands, you can verify the values they are using by just simply using other tools or commands such as the line to recommend the sugar for this, to recommend me sorrow centromere on Windows and Mac. And with this in mind, when you're using this tool, SketchUp will allow you to see a line that is going to let you know if you're using this tool in order to greatest square or golden section, we're going to be able to create certain shapes while also adding more precision by using the keyword has a quick Center. You can use the line now to verify the values, not only in order to verify the values, but also to see which values were used to create a shape by itself. The golden section. As far as only for you to know is that these two are command also has an option to toggle if you want to draw the rectangle based on the center. So if you use the keyword or Option on a Mac, you are going to be able to draw the rectangle from the center of the rectangle. And you can toggle this option on enough by using control or the Option key on a Mac. Additionally, you will be able to select the values used to create a rectangle. So you will be able to control the result point. In other words, the size of the face greater by these lines. Now the next two recommend actually uses the concept of the rectangle in, out of the clay. Something a little bit different where the new model and this one is called rotated rectangle. And the way they agree this rectangle is by selecting the width, as well as the rotation of the rectangle. However, you will be able to determine if we want to select the rotation of the rectangle before grading the rectangle or after grade and the rectangle. So if you use on a keyword or Command on a Mac, you will be able to select the angle of rotation first. Or in another words, you select the angular rotation before that terminate the brain and the depth. So once they use this tool or a command, you will be able to select how you want to create a rectangle using the axis as well as the snaps. Now these two or command actually uses tool circumvents. One of them is the rectangle while the other one, instead, what they do recommend. So what this means is that you're going to create a rectangle that is actually going to be rotated on the model. This means that these two recommend pretty much functions the same way as the Rectangle tool or Command normally to us while also using the word they do recommend another, the greater the rectangle with a rotation. Now to this point, we haven't covered that what they do recommend. So this might be confusing at first. However, once they, you see how the vote I do recommend actually functions. You are going to be able to notice that this is pretty much two tools or commands in one. And this also means that you won't be able to add more precision with the creation of this shape by using the keyword. However, in this case they use of the keyword might be confusing at first because the value, so you can see on the user interface. So with this in mind, once they use this to recommend, you're going to see that the first value that you input is the length. Or in another words, what would be considered a width. So once the human patella and you are going to be able to input that we pan the angle. So the user interface will allow you to see which are the palettes that you need to input. But also, you will be able to see once again that you wouldn't need to use the coma in order to separate the values. And also, once we start creating this rectangle, you will be able to notice that there is a text that also lets you know that you're using so far. These two recommend is actually pretty intuitive. This also implies that you are going to be able, you see access in order to determine the direction that you're using in order to create a rectangle, whatever you lock the access or not. Now, this tool might be confusing at first because there are not many tools in SketchUp, it actually requires that many values. However, since the first value, the second value, are based on the rectangle and the only new value that you will need to determine what a find by using this tool is the rotation. And there are actually a few uses for up to like this because there are elements might actually use this angles when you create around wherever, you can simply use these tools when you know the values that you're going to use for when you have a reference. And this also means that you can verify the values once again while you send this to recommend because of the effects that you can see when you use this to Pergamon. Now so quick side note, this is a text that you can see at any point if you start moving the mouse, which means that you will be able to use it in order to also see which probably you are using for the land. Now the benefit of this to recommend is that you learn how to create a rectangle before you send the road the two argument. So you're going to be able to create faces not only based on the access, but also by using a rotation. So these tools are very useful in order to grade the phases where you might want to use a lot of Equator shapes. So your model. 22. Creating Circles: Now swelling or SketchUp, we're going to find the circle tool on the toolbar, mass a quick sign on. You're also going to see that drawing this circle is pretty much the same as drawing a circle in any other software, which means that you select the origin and then the radius of the circle. Now the circle in this ketchup, or greater circular shape, or in another words, a circle based on segments. So this means that our schedule is going to create a polyline very circumscribed about circle. So you're able to determine not only the radius that you want to use, but also the amount of segments or the size of the circle. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the keyword in order to select the radius before clicking into another keyword. But also, you will be able to change the amount of size that you want before drawing the circle. And as a quick side note, you can always see the value of the radius that you're using are changing on the measurements as well. Something that you can do after drawing the circle is actually change the radius. So if you change your mind, you're actually able to change the value for the radius. And Jeff's after drawing the circle, but more importantly, before you use another to Parliament. Now cyclic center, you're going to see attacks close to the miles that is going to display some of the information that you have in the measurements. Now as a quick side note, the number of segments is something that you can see an OpEx right next to the mouse icon. Now the circle has also a few options that you can use after creating the circle, which in this case will allow you to add or remove segments. So if he is plus along with current drawn the keyword, you will be adding more segments. While if you use minus along with current drawn the keyword, you will be decreasing the number of segments. You can do this by equating the circle and after creating the circle, before using any other tool, such as the selection tool. In the case of the MAC, is a little bit different because you actually input the amount of segments that u1 followed by the S key before you send Enter on the keyboard. Now you will be able to see, but this is pretty much a polyline circumscribed about circle because you actually have a tool that is called polygon. The polygon pretty much functions. Let's say where's the circle? However, you are going to see when drawing the polygon, the circle that is used as the boundary for the polygon. So with this in mind, we will be able to see how the polygon is going to be graded. And when they send mine, if you create a circle on top of the polygon, you will be able to see visually how the polygon relates to a circle. What they say will be able to see that the circle is what appears with a hidden line when you send a polyline. Because in this case, a value that I used as the radius is the same. However, everything else remains pretty much the same, which means that you can use the keyword in order to input the values for the radius by simply using the keyword southern level of precision remains the same. And a cyclic saying that these two will post a grade a face. So because of this, you can create faces three intersect one way or the other. But also you can change the amount of segments before you start drawing the polygon. And by the way, that's going to work pretty much the same way as it does on the circle, which means that you can use the keyword. I say that with a circle on Windows. And once again, able to draw on the monospace or modal window myosin references. Or in another words, you can use this nerves as you can do it with other tools such as the rectangle. All this in mind, let's circles and the polygons are graded pretty much the same way, even though will appear as different elements and the entity Info Panel, if you select them. 23. Creating Arcs: Now next ketchup sensory able to gray circles and polygons. You're also going to be able to gray just segments of the circle. So the first TO or command that you can use is called the arc. Now these are actually allows me to grade as segment or part of a circle based on the amount of segments that you're using. So if you select the arc after great in it, you will see on the entity that is SNR. But also you will be able to see the information of the arc, which is going to include the amount of segments and the radius of the arc. So when they send mine, you can see the information that you're using, but also you will be able to decide how you want to create the arc. Or in another words, you will be able to look to our name and our segments that you want to use, but also the radius that you want to use. This one is going to function pretty much the same way as the circle. And when you create an arc using this tool, you can see that you can also create a circle. And this is because the value that is to use, this is the angle, which is something that you can notice by looking at the measurements when using this tool. And this is because you can actually determine the angle of the arc. Or in another words, that segment of the arc will be determined by the angle gradient between two imaginary lines, represented by hidden lines by drawing the ER. Now once again, you can use control. How long would the plus key part of the Minus key in order to select how many segments that you want. Nasa quick center, the radius cannot have less than two segments. And in the case of the Mac, you can still select the amount of segments that you want by typing the number and then the S key before clicking and enter. And also everything else pretty much remains the same. Which means that you can see the size that you're using, but also that you won't be able to make changes on the M&O side and the radius if you use another two argument, even if it is another arc. Now the next art esco to Point Park. Now this means the standard card you might have seen in other tools or comments. Our next ketchup, this one is actually very useful because it allows you to see what is called the tangent. This tangent will change in appearance, arousing how he's used. So you will see a different tags depending on the tangent there is use. However, the biggest difference between the two tangents is the color. So in another words, the tangents will have two colors. So because of this, you're going to have two different colors for the two different tangents. The purple one, which is the one that lets you know that you have a tangent enter into line points and the one that is in color Cn, which allows you to know that you're grading of tangent by creating an hour after an endpoint. So you're able to gray missing segments of another circle, but also in order to continue shape that is tangent to the previous one. This tangent can also be used based on the axes. However, there is a few things that you can do in order to make sure that you're continuing on a specific tangent. So this means that you can use the arrows on the keyboard in order to lock the axis, but also that you can use. The keyword may not have to lock the tangency. And as well, both of these options are toggle, which means that you can turn them on and off by just simply using the arrows on the keyword. Now, you can find that the tangent will have different users when creating your model, especially because it makes organic shapes a little bit more easy, whether it's continuing with the previous element, or whether they even greater in order to connect elements with a new model. Nasa quick sinus. And then for you to notice is that when you use that to our sketch, we're going to let you know if you're drawing a circle by using the texts we have right next to the mouse for the cursor. As well. The tangents also recognize this naps. So this means that you can create very basic shapes, but also very complex shapes. Mason the tangents. Tangents can create something very simple, but also very complex. And the model, however, will always depend on S nerves. Or in another words, the endpoints, hey, points, hence a one, which means that the elements that I already create a new model are going to determine how the tangent is going to be used. And the Shogun front of the stool may say it's an apple on Windows and Mac. And as you might have noticed so far, all the arcs pretty much works the same way as the circles because they are segments of the circle. So even the tree Point Park closer function the same way. Now the three-point arc works pretty much the same way as the two-point part. However, one thing that allows you to find the radius is the second point that you use. Now this arc is a little bit different because you cannot create a circle base on it. So with this in mind, you might not find that many uses for the piece of paper unless you have excess and references, as well as something for you to know is that they are, doesn't actually create faces. So you won't be able to gray faces regardless of the New York State grade, unless the DRX connect edges with each other in a way that it worked great faces within the model as well. Regardless of the type of art that you're using, you will be able to use references. Or in another words, it snaps in order to grade the arcs. Additionally, this tool allows you to create different shapes just by changing the NMR signs or segments and the arc. So this is more useful when creating references for other elements like columns. However, you can also use this in the gray shapes. They're a little bit more strict with a new model. Now the last panel is a tool that allows you to create a face. And this one is actually based on the arc tool. If you use this to recommend microscope by New York growing to be able to create an art as you normally would. However, SketchUp is going to create two lines that are going to connect HRP. And so they are the center of the arc. Because of this, you're going to get a face as a result. However, the pie is going to function pretty much the same way as the arc. So you can select the radius, but also you can change the segments by using control along with the plus or the minus and the keyword, which means that you can do the same on a Mac. You can select once again, the amount of segments that you want to use followed by DES key before clicking and then the keyword. So with this in mind, this tool is more way to create a phase based on an R and an angle. Which means you can create something very simple as and I slice of pizza or a part of a mechanical component. Now I love this might not seem very useful first. However, all these hours will be pretty useful in their own way, especially with the heart and the standard art. 24. Drawing Basics: And as well, very few things where you didn't know about these tools are domains, such as e.g. the fact that you can use some of these tools recommends where the error is another keyword or in another words, you will be able to draw with some of these tools are commands by using the axes. So you can create a rectangle based on the axis, the axis, or the blue axis. Now so quick sign up. You can also see that the x is going to be represented by using the same color of the axis. And this means that every time that you change the axis with the arrow, so the keyword, the color of the rectangle is going to change. However, this doesn't apply to the freehand. So in the case of the free hand, you will need to make sure that you have a reference before joining other model space. Otherwise, the polyline is going to be graded anywhere on the model space. Once again, the goal of the lines are going to change based on the axis that is used in order to draw the polyline. Or if you're using the line, the rectangle, and so on, you will be able to see that the color is going to change based on the excess that you're using. When you're using a tool for command such as the World Theta rectangle, you are not only going to be able to select the axis that you want to use in order to determine the length, but also the access they are going to use in order to determine the rotation and the way that the rectangle dx is on these tours or commands are actually very important when drawing the elements and faces they are going to be using in order to query your model. The amount of segments or the amount of sides with a new model, that value is now going to change until you use, once again, the same tool for command in order to change the monocytes are segments. And if we want this value is to go back to default. You will need to close and reopen a SketchUp. So you can always change the amount of segments. How are you will need to keep in mind that the amount of segments will remain in memory for working model, which also applies to other circles and the polygons as well. In the case of the circle and the arcs, you can always use the arrows and the keyword in order to block the access they want to use. Our in the case of the keyword is very important for you to know how many segments the U1, because if you use circular shapes, then it can be very apparent that a circle has less detail than an hour if they are using the same amount of segments or sites. So you will need to give this in mind when selecting if you want to draw an arc or if you want to create an art based on a circle, even though there might not be that many cases in which the difference between DRX and the circles will be perceived. How cyclic center, you can draw angry faces on a face the already created just by using the phase as a reference plane or as a reference surface for what you're joining the model. Which also means that you can use the arrows on the keyboard in order to use the axis as a reference plane for our reference surface as well Sunday for you to know how it works is that a SketchUp also takes into account the size of the R relative to the model. And what this means is that if you have an arc that is very small, I sketch it won't allow you to add them many segments. This is because each of the segments will be very small when it goes to the size. So if you see this screen while drawing the yargs, you just need to change the amount of segments are the radius and the year. However, if you're going to have something small, then at the end, the actual element or shape to your gradient will be barely visible. So reducing the number of size will be actually more useful. So with all this in mind, the RX and the circles are actually very easy to use once you get used to them, because they will take into account pretty much the same thing that other tools take into account. Which means that they use the coordinates, the axis and the values datatype and the keyword for more precision. 25. Using Options to edit Lines: When you work in a SketchUp, we're going to have options that you can use with the elements that you created when you send the drawing toolbar. So if you create e.g. a. Line, you are going to notice that if you use the mouse in order to open this menu, you will have an option that is called divide. And once they use this option, you will be able to use the mouse in order to determine how many segments you want to divide the line based on the direction in which you're moving the mouse. So with this in mind, you can see the land of each of the segments. They're going to be graded. Nasa quick center, these segments are pretty much lines. In this case, what you're actually selecting or the number of lines that are going to be graded from a single one. So if you select any of the segments, you are going to see that they appear SHS on the end of the info. But also we are going to be able to find the length of the segment very selected. And if you wanted to combine the edges, you can simply use another option that is called well edges. So you can use this option in order to join the edges, then you select them. Now as well. You don't have these Control C in order to revert the changes. And this is because you have an option that is called while edges. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to combine all the edges or lines into a single one. So with this in mind, you can see on the info or using the assumptions are going to affect the elements that you can create by center join toolbar. And with this in mind, they're going to have a similar option just for the circles. So after grain in this circle, you can select a circle in order to explore the curve. Or in another words, in order to explore the circle, which is going to allow you to select all the individual lines, then make the circle. Because in a SketchUp, as in many other softwares in and actually create circles, when you actually create is an element that resembles a circle twice and multiple lines. However, this is going to appear on the entity Info Panel has occurred instead of a circle or a polygon. Now this is very important for you to know because in a sketch or you can actually create circles and polygons. So because of this, you are going to find a different option that you can use in order to convert this circle into a polygon. So once a greater circle, you can open this menu in adult acrylic way says comparative to Polygon. And once the model is, the entity Info panel is going to change the name of the element that you select the front circle to polygon. Now this doesn't mean that you cannot actually use the other options that you have with a circle. So this means that you can still use exploit curve as well as well Hs. So what this recording to be able to convert a circle into our polynomial at any point. Although you can now compare to the polyline into a circle, even though they're actually created pretty much the same way. Which means that you select the number of segments that you want to use, as well as the radius. So NSK job, there is an actual difference between the polygon shape, such as the circle and the arcs. So the assumptions are pretty useful with some tools. And also you can use this tool in order to remove unnecessary elements. Or in another words, in order to have our individual elements on the model because they can create other individual elements. When you add them. Nasa quick Signer, we're going to see that when you use certain tools or commands, such as the free hand, you are not going to be able to use well edges as you normally would. And this is because you cannot use this option in EBITDA, multiple curves, or in another words, multiple polylines together. As a quick side note, you can see the value of all the elements selected random ordering for panel. Now, holidays might not seem very useful right now. However, knowing this will actually save a little bit of time once you start creating your models. 26. Editing a Drawing using the Entity Info Panel: Now when grading your drawing is something that you might have noticed, is that the same value that you can find other measurements can also be found on the model info panel once you select the element. However, the model info will also allow you to change a few of the values of your drawing. How, what are the values that you can change are going to be different depending on the tool was used in order to create the element on the model. So in the case of the line, you can change the land. Well in the case of D, or you are going to be able to change the radius as well as the number of segments that make the yard. So as you can see, depending on what you draw on the monospace, you are going to be able to make a few changes even after grading your drawing. When you're starting a model, you might feel the need to make changes instead of starting again. So this is actually more convenient to what it seems. And as a quick sign-on, you are going to be able to say, which values can you change on the model info once you select that, because this value is one, appear grayed out on the model info panel. However, not all the elements that you can draw will allow you to make changes based on the model info. So a few tools or commands actually create elements that can be a river, basin, the model info. So you will need to give this in mind, my grading elements such as polylines and rectangles. And in the case of the rectangle, this value is going to change because these lines are connected to other lines. So changing the land will mean changing the position of the end points of the other line or lines. In which case, you will not be able to create a phase where you will store the lines that make the face. So what all this means? The entity Info Panel is actually very useful when working on your models. 27. Copy, Cut and Paste: When grading your model in SketchUp, something important for you to know is how to copy and also how to pace the elements. So SketchUp actually has two arguments that you can use in order to do this. So you're going to be able to select the elements that you want a copy. So you can use the pace to argument in order to paste them anywhere to be one, which is the same thing that you can do when you cut an element. So while the element is still selected, I'm going to use the car to recommend in the settlement from the model. And then I'm going to use pace in order to place this element anywhere in the model as well. Now reset tool that you can use in order to erase elements. So you will be able to find these two argument on the same toolbar in which you have the copy and the tool. And this tool is called erase. All this being said, as many other softwares, you can actually copy, paste and also the bias and the keyword. So you're going to be able to copy by using Control C. And then you are going to be able to base the elements facing Control B. So if you wanted to get an element, you can use Control X and then you simply use once again Control B. So this means that if you want to delete an element, you can use the Delete on the keyboard in order to delete the elements. And as a quick side note, if you look on the menu or for SketchUp, you're going to find that cut will appear as shaved cluster lead, even though you can easily use Control X. However, there is another way in which you can paste any of the elements on the model space. And this one is called Paste in place. So if you copy an element before moving the element by the use of the tool or command or by using Control C. Then you will be able to use based in place in order to place the element on the same place where it was before. So you're going to be able to keep a copy in memory of the same element in order to paste it on the same place. And as well as epic center, if you have an element selected, you're going to see where you can also delete the element by using this menu. And this is going to be available if you don't use the standard pace before you sent based in place. So if you remember from memory by capping or cutting or the element or elements, this one is going to be removed. So the element that you copy will remain under memory as long as you don't copy or cut or the element or elements with a new model. Which means that you can also do this by using cut. But also you can do this with multiple elements. 28. Undo and Redo: As well in a SketchUp, at some point, you might need to undo one other changes that you have done while working on your project. So in order to do this, I sketch it will provide you with the undo two argument. So if you use this, you won't be able to handle the changes that you have done while working your model. But also you can redo the changes they might have done by using the redu to recommend. So we are going to be able to undo and redo by using these two domains. However, you can use the undo by using Control C, and you can still use the redo by using Control Y. And as well, something for you to know is that even if you want to make changes that you have done, the elements that you have copied or cut will remain in the memory. So this means that you will be able to use paste in place, which means that you can also faced an element as you normally would. But also you can use the menu of a SketchUp in order to undo and redo the changes that you have done. Nasa quick Signer, we're going to see based on their menu which circuits from the end for redo. However, you're going to see that the sugar, the undo, now control C. You can also use plus packet space as a shortcut for the end due to recommend. Our the reader is still done by using Control Y. So you can use the undo and redo as you normally would in most of the other softwares. 29. Hiding and Unhiding Elements: Now when you work in your models, there is a few ways in which you can edit the model. And one of the ways in which you can do this is by actually hiding. Hiding elements are part of the elements, which is something that you might want to do in a few cases. So you can do this pretty easily by using the mouse after select any element may want to hide. And as well, you're going to see the ones that you hide, some of the elements, such as the lines or edges. This is going to extend to any shape that is graded based on that edge. This means that if you create a shape, we are going to be able to hide edges. They are graded on an edge that you already high. Now in order to see the edges the really high, or in another words, the hidden geometry. You can use this ketchup menu in order to do so. So once they either this, we're going to see the DHS, they're hitting away. I'm going to show, but also they are going to have a different representation. So we're going to be able to use this in order to high, but also noted too high once again. Now with this in mind, you can also hide the shapes. So this means that you will be able to hide from high the shapes that you have in your model. Now with this being said, the heating geometry, it's actually pretty useful when working in the models. Additionally, you will be able to use the hidden geometry in order to select the lines that are hidden away in case they want to unhide these lines. So this means that the hidden geometry will allow you to select the lines that normally you won't be able to select. And this is something that is also going to apply to the faces that you can hide in your model. Now there is a tool, it's actually pretty useful when it comes to hiring elements and they still recommend is the eraser. So if you use this to recommend, they're going to be able to issue a keyword in order to hide the elements. But also you will be able to use R on the keyboard while you send this to recommend in order to hide the elements. So this will be pretty useful if you are using the hidden geometry. Now when using this tool, recommend you're going to see that you will be able to select the lines that you want to high as we normally will buy you some the Select tool. However, you don't need to do anything else on the keyboard in order to select multiple lines at the same time. So this tool is a little bit more convenient when hiring the elements that you create for your model. Now as well, the hidden geometry becomes very important if you're working with cylinders, because the circular shapes are shapes that I created with multiple faces. So this means that you won't be able to see the faces that make the cylinder. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see all the hidden lines with elements such as this month, but also science. You're able to see the lines. You're also going to be able to add them as you normally would if this line is, we're graded by the center line two argument. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see how somebody tools recommends actually modify and shape. And as well in SketchUp, they're going to be able to high or high by Sunday sketch of menu. So this means that if you have an element selected, you can use this get your menu in order to hide from Heidi elements within the model. However, you're going to say that there are a few options that you can only use mice and the sketch of many hormones, specifically by Harvard where he says I'm high on this sketch are many hi, components or elements. You will be able to use some high value by using lives are all. Now you send less than 0. Well, function pretty much the same way for working on the model. How are you're going to see that there is a difference between using this options, whether groups and the components comparator using these were the elements within the groups and their components. And this is because the groups and the components are added independently from the rest of the model. However, when it comes to the objects, are able to also use hitting objects. This means you will be able to also use hitting objects in order to see the components that are hitting away. So with this in mind, you will be able to use on high selector. Because now you're able to select this object. Because that is we're going to see where you send this option will not only allow you to unhide the component, that also is going to allow you to use the other options that you have within this component. And this is because you won't be able to hide the elements within the component without worrying about not being able to select them. Hi them later on. And last but not least, you have the option that is called on high hole, which will allow you to unhide all the objects that are hitting away within the model or within the groups are components. So this means that if you hide a few elements within a component, you're able to use on high. In a retro high the elements, however, you will need to be within the component in order to do this because the component is like a model within a model. So because of this, if you use the options of a high on the model, everything will be on high within the model. However, if you hide something within the component, you will have to hide within the component. So you will need to get all this in mind when hiring, hiding. But also something as well for you to know is that if you're using the traits or more specifically, the entity Info, you can high on high bias and the second on the entity Info. So you'll be able to hide elements within your model by just simply using the Entity Info after selecting the elements within the model that you're working in. And remember that you can still use geometry and hating objects in order to see what you have fading away, whether your models are components. So all of these means are the assumptions are actually pretty useful work and your model's not only because they allow you to save resources, but also because they will help you are presenting your project to others. 30. The Move Tool: Now the next lessons I'm going to show you how to use via the banner for my specifically, how to use the tools are commands that you have on the Edit panel in order to enter the model. By any chance, you cannot find the edit panel from other toolbars that you have. You will be able to enable this toolbar by using the mouse for my specifically this menu, or by just simply using the toolbars window. So in any case, you are going to be able to enable or disable this toolbar. So you can use that tool circumvents, they can find that this toolbar, I'm going to place this toolbar, once again, the user interface. So we're going to start using her first to recommend on this toolbar, which is going to be to recommend. Now the move to recommend, as the name implies, is used in order to move the elements within the model. So this means that you can use this tool in order to move all the different elements that you can create on the model. Such as the endpoints, little lines, and the faces, and the shortcut. For that, I still recommend SMS and married and as well. So I think for you to notice is that the Move tool will recognize these elements. So this means that you will need to select the elements that you want to move before you send them all to recommend. However, this is going to be limited to one element at a time. So you're only able to select one element out of time by using the Move tool. And as well as something for you to notice is that the Move tool will let you know if you're moving an element along the axis by changing the color of this header line. But also you can use Shane from the keyboard in order to lock the axis. Which also means that you will be able to use the iris and the keyword in order to do the same. And as well, something important for you to notice is that you will be able to see this naps are references when you send them a tool, which means that you will be able to see if you're moving an element based on the phase, but also if you're moving this element towards another snap or referenced within the model, which is pretty useful once you start using the options of the Move tool, such as e.g. copy. This means that if you use control the keyword or Option on a Mac, you are going to be able to greater copy of the element while moving the element. That's a quick signer. They assumption is not toggle, which means that you will need to press and hold control. And the mouse, he noted the gray, the copy as well. My move tool is one of the tools that you can use in order to create a race. So what this means is that you can create multiple copies of the same elements by using the Move tool. So one of the ways in which you can do this is by selecting the elements that you want to copy. And then after using control, you will be able to derive the distance that you want to use, whether it's spatially or by using the keyword and then just simply type in the keyword. And the amount of carb is that you want to create followed by x and Enter. So when they send mine, here are going to be able to create multiple copies while using the Move tool. Which means that you're going to still use the axis of references that you already have in the model space or creating a copy. Now the Move tool has another option where you can use, I just go out and fall. Now this option is pretty much the same thing where you can do by moving an element will use in the Arizona keyword, may not have to lock the axis. Or in another words, when you move the element on the x-axis, the y-axis, or the z-axis based on the origin. But you have other modal space or modal window. Our counter pressing R on the keyboard, you are going to see where you don't have to move. This phase is on the axis, so therefore will allow you to move the face any direction. And SketchUp once tried to create unnecessary phases in order to create a shape. Now it's like saying that the substrate is sexually total, which means that you only need to press on the keyword wisely in order to enable and once again, in order to disable. Now something else for you to know. He said the move tool actually has a few benefits that you can use depending on the shapes they are working in. So if you use the Move tool for n, So the circle, we are going to resize this circle instead of moving the circle. So what happens is the rough sketch for a squat jumps part of the circles. And these quadrants are referred to in this ketchup as part of the nose because they are placed on the node, the cell and the ease and the West of the circle, depending on how you draw the circle. Hey guys, let's remember, you can draw the circle horizontally as well as perfectly or based on a slope. So what this means is that this cardinal points are going to be based around the axis, but on the actual center of the circle. And in the case of New York, you are going to get something very similar to this. Gardeners send the K sub d are the equivalent of the Cardinal point is going to be placed at the center of the Earth. And as a quick sign, as k j is going to let you know when you can re-size based on effects there you can see once you go over this point, now with all this being said, you are going to say they are able to use this, but for the different arcs they are going to be able to play on your model. However, since them all to forgive men recognizes the end points for vertexes of the shapes. You are going to be able to say that this tool has actually many uses when Morgan the model, just based on what you can sell it when you send this TO, in another words, a lot of different uses. Just why you send this to what the end points of the shapes that you have on your model. Additionally, the move tool is a tool that can be used in a vector omega few repairs on the model. So this means that if for whatever reason you edit the shape that you're going to be able to use the Move tool in order to make repairs on her face theoretic writer. And this is going to be pretty useful in cases in which might have a few issues creating a face. And this is also pretty useful when you don't want to create unnecessary edges or faces within the model. And as well as something for you to know is that if you don't want to use the toolbar, you can also use this, get your money in order to use any of these tools. So this means that you can click where it says tools in order to use the same tool. So you can find on the Edit toolbar, right, Also in order for you to see the shortcuts associated with their stores. 31. The Push and Pull Tool: Now the next talk program and then I'm going to show you is the potion pole. Now the push and pull is one of the most useful tool circumvents that you're going to find, because this one will allow you to create 3D shapes based on Linux system. Faced with this in mind, if you use the push and pull, you're going to see that these two recommend what automatically select a face once you hover. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the mouse, enter the validator selection or in another words, so you can confirm what you want to push or pull. Let's select the face. Now the push and pull will allow you to push the phase on any direction, but it won't post world for your basic shape by extraordinary shape towards the other side, nasa quick signing the sugar products to recommend SPS and Peter. Now the push and pull is also pretty useful because it will allow you to create multiple shapes, single one by using control option on the keyboard. Now the assumption is that toggle, which means they use control to enable and disable this option. So when they send mine, you won't be able to grade multiple shapes for an existing ones while you send a push and pull. Now these two recommend is also very precise because you can take the value that you want to use part of the push and pull. But also because you can use double-click on the mouse and everything is the same value once again. So as you notice the push and pull, and it's actually pretty useful in many different ways. Which is complemented by the fact that you can also use references when you send a push and pull. So this means that you can use the snaps that you have another elements as a reference. Now in this lesson, and use and their push and pull with a circle instead of a different shape. Because in the case of a circle, you are going to see when if you use it in geometry, you will be able to use the push and pull on their faces that are SketchUp grades, circular shapes. So with this in mind, you're able to use the push and pull in order to create unique shapes based on circular shapes. So this will be pretty useful in many different cases nowadays and mine, you can also use the push and pull in another great phases within faces. Which means that if you use control, able to gray shapes and another shapes. Now cyclohexanone, you are going to see that you can use the double-click on the mouse while pressing contract the keyword inadequate, use the same value they use before for the push and pull. What lives in the ocean varies, cool, grainy starting phase. Now the push and pull as such for the E is for a many different cases. And one of these ones is in order to provide the walls. But also you're going to be able to push in the opposite direction of the face in order to create openings for elements such as the doors and the windows of your project. But also you can use it to create the holes within certain elements that would actually use them in order to create a more accurate representation, such as e.g. a pie or a shaped me. Greg, for your project or model. Some of this on mine. You're going to notice that the push and pull is one of the basic tools that you will be using, white grading and architecture model. And as well, there's another option in a sketch or you can use that is hard to appreciate or less than you actually know how he sees. And they subsidize school has stretched more. Now this option is actually a toggle, which means that you can turn this option on and off by using on the keyboard. Now this one most cases is unusable because the elements need to share parallel edges, which is the same thing that you can do myosin option on a Mac. So what this means is that you will need to use the push and pull on that face, their shares, one of the edges. So in field under this, you are going to say that assumption is not going to do anything. Now the sorption storage is actually very similar to what you can do by using the Move tool. However, the result is going to be a little bit different. I'm going to use my move tool and the push and pull in order to show you that the result is going to be different in certain cases, but there's going to be the same one on others. And this is because your sweat man is actually based on the move tool. Because what it does is that it actually has stretched per phase. Or in another words, he moves the phase from its original position, which is pretty much the same thing that you can do. Either move to. As well, you can see on this case now using this option or gray, the same result as you send the move tool on this face. However, there is a few things that you might need to know. How are the push and pull. So just e.g. how the push and pull actually reacts uncertain situations. So if e.g. I. Grade these rectangles and then I use the push and pull. You're going to see whether first value that I crave, It's going to apply to the face that you push. And this is something that you can see when you see that text that he says upset limit. Now this is something that is now going to apply on every direction. However, if you want to avoid dealing with are you upset direction, something that you can use his country on the keyboard or Option on a Mac. Or in most cases, you're going to see where you won't need to worry about the absolute limit. And this is because the upset to actually consider as the upset limit as a way in order to help you when creating elements such as false. So in some cases, this might seem very useful, while in other ones, they might seem problematic. Now as well, if you have any issues when you create multiple phases, remember, you can then leave and then paraphrase myosin, double-click. And better also, you can divide faces, but also you can heal faces. That's a great sign. You can always use this nabs while using this tool in order to enter the shapes a little bit easier. So it called this means that the push and pull is a very useful tool in order to create the basic shape, while also using other tools such as the Move tool in order to order the results better. Awesome. I create unnecessary faces when you're not used to the push and pull. So with this in mind, the potion pole is possibly the most useful tool that you have an escalator when creating your models. And as you can see, this tool allows you to create one single shape out of multiple shapes. Now as a quick sign-on, they subsidize cool gray new starting phase. Now, last panel is the push and pull will allow you to assign if you want to pre-select the face that you want to use when you send a push and pull. Which means that if you use a model info, you are going to be able to make one. I'll show the score, let's say hmm, push and pull. So if you use this, you won't be able to use the push and pull on a face they already selected. Now by default, I'm going to disable this option in order to avoid any confusion when it comes to the preferences that are being used in the course. So what all this means? That push and pull is actually pretty useful, not only because it allows you to create 3D shapes, but also because they make uses of everything that we have seen so far. I mean, I'm very uses the snaps and then measure mass selections and so on. 32. The Rotate Tool: Now the next command that I'm going to show you, it's actually pretty similar to recommend, and this one is called Rotate. Now as the name implies, you use this to recommend in order to, are they the elements? So this means that you will be able to select what you want to rotate while using the word they do recommend by just simply hovering the element that you want to rotate. So this means that you won't be able to work day. And our faces or edges, which is very similar to the Move tool. Now what this means, say the rotate tool. We're rotating all the elements that are highlighted while you send them what they do. I pick sign or the shortcut for the base to argument basically are some quarter. Now another similarity for the move tool is that you can select the elements if we're using the Rotate do recommend. Now the rotate tool, what is the elements based on the reference or in another words, based on your selection. So you can rotate an element based on references that you have on the model. In other softwares, you might get a rotate tool that allows you to select a fan when I rotate based on the element, or if you want to rotate based on a reference. In the case of a SketchUp, it always rotates based on a reference. So this means that you will need to know which reference do you want to use as well. Yeah, able to break copies of the same element by using country on the keyboard. And if you're using a Mac, you will need to use the option key. If you press control on the keyboard, you will be able to create a copy, but also it will be able to create multiple copies. Were the molto argument. However, in the case of the road thing is a little bit different because we're using the angles. So this means that you will have a limit on the values that you can input. This is because the circles, it goes 0-360 degrees. Now this doesn't mean that you cannot create an eccentric shape. Might just simply selecting an arbitrary angle and an arbitrary number of copies because the copies had an unlimited by the angle. So the use of this tool will depend on the result that you're looking for. Especially because you can use these snaps of the elements as a reference when you send this to our demand. So this means that there are different ways in order to change the result. Now there are actually many uses for the rotate tool or command, such as e.g. radian mechanical shapes. Otherwise, I'll actually foresee to draw the same shape multiple times before editing the shape. Additionally, you can use this tool along with other tools, my grading different elements in the model space, which means that you will be able to use the hidden geometry, enter the red bird of the shapes based on what you are grading. But also, since it can be used for mechanical designs, you can actually use this in architectural designs. So this means that you can imagine that this is a round table with chairs. Which means that the water into recommend probably useful when the signing and placing architectural elements such as the chairs around a table. All this in mind, the ability to automate is actually pretty useful in many different ways and also in many different cases. 33. The Follow Me Tool: Now the next two fragments there I'm going to show you is the following me. Now that follow me is actually pretty much the two argument that you will use if you wanted to create a pipe. And this is because the Follow me actually uses a path and a profile. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to create that path and then the profile, or in another words, a phase in order to create the shape. Now you can select a path while you send a follow me, or you can select a path before you send a follow me. Now the result may actually change depending on the path that you're using. So because of this, if you want more precision, the best thing that you can do is actually selected path before you send a follow me. Now, quick signer to follow me and also create unnecessary lines after profile is based on circular shapes and there's a speaker as the follow me. Let's close the circles. Once they used the first time. This happens, you can use the option after selecting this lines, before using these two are combined once again. So in another words, if you are going to use the circles and the yargs is better to under the changes in order to change the path before you send the file. Once again, because I love is the thalamus actually pretty useful when grading pipes for our project as well. There are a lot of shapes like the pipes were working on the projects such as wires and grubs and also elements very use with them. So just the elbows of the pipes. Now this doesn't mean that the only use of the following is actually creating pipes. And this is because they follow me, uses a path. So when they send mine by another party or selecting and on phase or profile that you want to use, the result is going to change. So this is actually very important because in some cases, there were some that you might want. It might not be the result that you're going to get. So something for you to keep in mind is that in some cases, you might need to create one part of the shape at a time. And this is also important because the Follow Me uses the direction of the line in order to grade the shape. So it's not going to be based on the direction of the axis. Now this might be confusing at first until you start to create certain shapes for your model. Now the telomere such as different users. So one of the uses that follow me, we'll actually have its declaration when spheres. So you can use the filament in order the greater spheres, but more importantly, able to gray the French shapes based on the circles where there is ways and circular shapes. Or as I prefer, somebody sent mine, you can play a little bit further the different shapes that you get gray before you send the filament. So this means that you can create different shapes by changing the profile or the past that you're using in order to get something different. Which also means that you can use this in order to adjust the amount of lines and phase is greater by the file name, which is pretty important in the case of circular shapes. So the amount of information there is a storage on the file, as well as the overall performance of the model. And if you need to see the amount of lines we use on this type of shape, you can always use thinking and geometry. So this tool, path and a proffer are equally important migrating shapes for your model. Especially because we can use the following me, Main Out of the great cups or eye shape such as this one. So all these may say My follow me is one of the most useful tools are commands that you can use. I know that the gray models, especially when it comes to plumbing, air conditioning for elements that are based on circular shapes. 34. The Scale Tool: Now the next two are commands that you can find that this toolbar is the scale. Now the scale to recommend is a tool that you can find on many other softwares. And the shortcut is going to be the same on a Mac. However, the way that it will fungi in SketchUp is a little bit different because this one actually applies to faces an entire shapes. So this means that once they use this to recommend, you will be able to select the face that you want to scale. But also, once you selected the face, you're going to have controls that will allow you to scale the face and the different directions of the face. Or in another words, he will be able to scale the face by using these controls. So you are going to be able to scale the elements use and the directions of the controls. But as well, the direction is also going to change the value so you can see on the measurements. So because of this, you will need to use the coma in order to separate values from some cases, which is pretty much the same thing that happens when you create a rectangle. However, you will have options that you can use an editor change how you scale the face. So this means that if you use Shaphan, the keyword, you will be able to toggle the Uniform Scale, which is going to change how you scale the face. Big Thursday is going to scale the phase when a formula based on the control that you're using. And because of this, you are going to be able to see that the measurements will only have, in other words, you will have scale the phase by using one value or two depending on if you toggle this option. But also if you use country on the keyboard, you will be able to toggle the option that is called scale. Have our center. So this one will allow you to scale the phase based on the center of the face. However, this option also takes into account the control that you're using. The pen and control that you're using, you will get a different result. And if you're using a Mac, you will need to use the option key. So both of these assumptions are actually very useful because it will change how you scale the phases, but also the entire shapes, the selector. So this means that you are going to be able to use this. One of the phases prefer shape. But also you are going to be able to use this on an entire shape if you select the shape. So the scale sexual agree as well when Adam in your model. Now as a quick side note, you're going to see the values for multipliers. They're being used on the scale to cricket man on the measurements. So this means they will be able to take the value and the keyword that you want to use in order to scale the phases are the shapes, depending on the control or the eruption, but you are using, you will need to change how you input the value scale to recommend. Actually pretty intuitive. So you might not feel the need of actually using the keyword. Or in another words, now on the values that you want to use, which works very well, whether you said the references. And also you're going to see that the precision of the units will not affect how these two or command S scale the phases or shapes on the model as well. You're going to see that not even the measurements that you can see on the interface are going to change. Now, a quick sign on this scale can also recognize references, which means that you can also break references with a new model before scaling the object. Now this is mainly because the scale to recommend functions based on controls. And these controls are actually going to be based on the shape peer grading. So this means that the origin of the shapes is going to change how the scale tool or command will actually function. And this is something that you can easily see by these lines are the ones that are actually used in order to determine the position of the controls and the groups and the components. So this gate will do recommend is one of the tools or commands. Or it's actually more impacted by the functionality of the groups and the components. In other words, by the fact that the groups and the components have their own origin. And throughout the course, I would like to show you how to change the axis within the groups and the components so you can adjust them. What Morgan and the model. Now, so click sign up, even if the shapes are now use as a group or a component. Once we selected the shape, the scale to recommend will actually scale the shapes based on an imaginary bounding box that is graded every time that you select a shape. So what this means is that the controls are going to be placed based on the precision that they will have. If the elements that you select a group or a component. However, the origin of the selection is going to be the origin until you turn this selection into groups or components. 35. The Offset Tool: Now the last two arguments you're going to find on this toolbar is going to be the upset. They upset. He's a very simple tool because it allows you to upset multiple lines on the modal space or modal window. So this means that if we use this to occur man, with a single line, you won't be able to do anything. However, suddenly for you to know is that these two are command also recognize this if the lines are coplanar edges. So with this in mind, if you select multiple pages and you use the upset to cricket man, you are going to be able to see that you will be able to create faces based on the edges that you're upset. So these two are domain is actually pretty useful migrating phases because the edges are the ones that create the faces. You can create only the necessary I just further phases or shapes that you want to create. A quick sign. Now, the shortcut for them is to recommend he served as in Frank as well. Since this tool allows you to create pages based on existing ones without having to spend more time trying additional lines for your model. You are going to see that there are a lot of uses for the upset to, especially on construction. So with this in mind, the main use of these two argument is great, involves structural elements. But also the main use of these two men in architecture is actually creating walls and a structure elements. So what this means is that you can use this to recommend in order to operate that thickness on a shape. But also as you can see, in order to grade the thickness of an element such as e.g. the walls. It would be as the upset in order to grade the walls based on the faces as well. These two are command is pretty useful because it will create the faces that are defined by these edges. And also since the opposite is based on the edges rather than the face, this coastal going to say where you can select a specific pitches before you send the upset to. What this means is that you will need to select the entire face before you send this to order men. So what this also means is that you will be able to input except values when you send me upset to argument. We will be able to create walls and other elements for your model with a lot of precision because of the use of the keyword wine join, as well as Saturday with tools or commands such as the push and pull, the observed, among others as well. I feel things for you to know about these two arguments. Instead, this one will allow you to observe interfaces because it's going to recognize all the edges that make the face at the same time. So this means that if you use this tool or Command on pages, whether a phase, let's talk recommend he's not going to function. And once again, in order to use this to recommend, you will need to select multiple edges at the same time. Now with this in mind, you can use this to recommend in any direction, but also you can repeat the same value by double press and the mouse. So this means that you will be able to repeat the same value they use before without having to type the same value on the keyboard. So the upset to her command is actually pretty useful when creating your models. Especially models greater for construction. And as well, you're going to see that the offset to recommend has an option that is called Hello overlap. So if you use this option based on the keyboard or Command on a Mac, you are going to see that every solve is going to change when it comes to the lines are going to be graded. So this might be pretty useful in cases in which you want to create something different than what you would normally have as a result of using the upset to recommend. So you can try to use this when you're experimenting with different types of shapes with a new model or in another words, and you're figuring out near the sign as well. Something for you to notice is that this assumption can be taller on enough myosin on the keyword. However, this is still important for you to know how to add more precision to this tool argument, because this will add more precision to your project. So as you can see, the offset to recommend is actually pretty useful in many different cases, especially in construction. 36. Creating a Basic Roof using the Drawing and Edit Toolbars: Now in order to show you a little bit more of the use of the tool circumvents that we have covered so far. I'm going to create a roof because they can actually use many of these tools. So elements are going to create the shape of the roof mice underline to recommend. But also I'm going to determine the slope of the roof power. So using that line to argument, as far as sensitive rule is going to have a slope. I'm going to create the lines of the roof like on a floor plan. So the result will be triangles that has two sides equal measure with a 90-degree angle. And then I'm going to join these two triangles by a center line to recommend. After this, we're going to be able to sell like one continuous roof. Or if you want to add a little bit less shape of the roof. Now in this case, angry to make it very simple. So I'm just going to use the mole to recommend in order to determine this lobe by inputting the value for the height. Now the value of the high asexually the slope. So because of this, you can take the distance between the edge of the roof and the start of the line as a reference. And this case, this slope will be very simple. So it's just going to be 30%. Or in another words, it's going to go up 30 cm/m. Now as a quick side note, we're going to see the value of string using the measurements of the user interface. Now after this, I'm just going to clean up the join in order to make sure that the roof is working properly. Once I've finished the basic roof, I'm just going to add the thickness. The thickness is actually pretty easy because you just need to create a profile in order to use the following me. So I'm going to create a profile bison as a reference, the extrusion. Now I'm just going to use the line in order to grade the proffer before you send the following me with the edges of the roof. More importantly, in order to create the lines that are going to use has the thickness of the entire model, which is something that you can easily do because you can learn that direction of the lines by essentially if, but also because this ketchup into play, we'll try to continue the direction of the existent line. You're going to be able to use a line to argument in many different ways. But also as a quick side note, you can also use the line tool or Command while also type in the value on the keyboard. So you can do this either way. Something else that I'm going to do is just finish the road bike riding a few lines, but also by deleting unnecessary lines. Now once that has been created, it will have two options. You can delete. This entire shape, may not retrograde flat roof, or you can move the edges of the shape. However, in order to move the edges of the shape and just go into the lead, any unnecessary lines. Something else that I'm going to do, a series of phases in order to have all the faces are the same shape, oriented the same way. And then I'm just going to save the model so I can use it later on. 37. The Search Tool: In this version I sketch, you're going to find that there is a two argument that you can use in order to search for the other tools. Now this tool can be found on the tool, but every score getting started. Now cyclic signer is the one that you have by default when you first opened I SketchUp. Once they use these to forgive men, you are going to see that this is very similar to the dynamic inputs you have inadequate. So this means that you will be able to type the name of a to recommend in order to select it. And once you select that, I do recommend, you are going to see that I do recommend that you selected is going to be highlighted as they normally would. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to find those circumstances and you might want to use whether you send the toolbars. And as well, you can use this to recommend by using a shortcut, which is Shift plus SS and Sam. And once they use a shortcut, you are going to see that you will be able to search. Once again, I told you wanna use mice and this textbox. So once again, you will be able to select for the two arguments that you want to use without having to select it on the toolbar. Now cyclohexane sense, this is very similar. Dynamic input. You have inadequate. You're also going to be able to use the Arizona keyword before using Enter or Return on the keyboard painted over select the tool. So this will vary as well once you get used to as SketchUp, because you can search for the tools within those 2 bar with I enable in the toolbox or in another words, you will be able to increase the size of the modal window by removing a few toolbars. 38. The Views: Now we're working in your models. You might need to rotate the camera. Or in another words, you might need to change how we view model. Now there are different ways in which you can change from where you build a model, such as e.g. the day and the band. So with these ones, you can change the position of the camera. You can have an immoral without changing the model in the process. However, in SketchUp, you'll also have tools or commands that you can use in order to change the position of the camera based on the standard views where you have a most 3D software's going to be able to use that. The front of the bag. Hello, So the left. Since this is a 3D model, you're also going to be able to use the one that is called ISA. Now the one that is called Isa will depend on the position of the camera because this one won't show you the model by moving the camera to the closest position that he can have in order to show you the entire model. So with this in mind, you can use the toolbars NOW change the standard view. But also you are going to be able to use these SketchUp menu in order to do the same. So if you cover where it says standard views, we're going to be able to select the standard view where you want to use. As well. You have three different ways in order to write and how you want to use the camera. So if you use e.g. parallel projection, you are going to see that now the camera is displaced the model like it was advocate, which also means that this one is the one that you want to use before exporting throughout again, that's a quick sign or you're going to see that we're using by looking at that top left of the modeling area as well, you can use the other option, which is called two-point perspective. As a quick side note, when you use two point perspective, we're going to say very says two-point perspective on the top left after modelling area. And the last option is called perspective. Now there's not going to be that much of a difference between perspective and two-point perspective. However, two-point perspective, as the name implies, actually creates two points in our procreative perspective. So if you have seen geometric drawings, you might notice that this is pretty much the same thing that you can do by hand. However, there is a main difference and this one has to do with the field of view, because in perspective, you're still creating a perspective of your model. So what this means is that you can change the value of the field of view. So when you change the field of view, they're going to see that automatically the bill changes the perspective. You are going to be able to see this because you don't have anything on the top left of the area. But also because you can see this SketchUp menu. However, the field of view is something that we're going to cover in a little bit more depth throughout the course. 39. The View Styles: Now next ketchup, Sunday now so you can use while working in your models is the visual styles. So this means that when you start grading shapes are the elements for your model. You are going to see that you have the option to change the visual style that you're using. And among these styles, you're going to have the wireframe and the hidden line, which are both very similar, except for the fact that the hidden line shows you the lines and the faces without the materials. While the wireframe won't show you all the lines, even the ones that you can see. Now each of the visual styles that you're using is going to help you when it comes to grading different representations that you might want to use in order to present your model, but also in order to save resources. Because if he is e.g. wireframe, we're only going to be able to see the lines. And this means that if you use work-sample shaded, you are going to be able to see the model without the textures. While if you use shaded with materials, you will be able to see the shapes of the objects, but also the materials, the US side of the objects. So with this in mind, it will be able to save a few resources, which also applies for the monogram. This means that if you use the monochrome, you're only going to be able to see the model where you send the default material. So you're able to save resources, but also you will be able to use this visual styles in conjunction with two visual styles that I would actually consider selection styles because these ones make this selection a little bit easier. If you use e.g. back edges, you will be able to see the lines that are hitting away with a pattern. Or in another words, the lines represented by using hidden lines. But at the same time, we will be able to select these lines in order to delete faces are elements within your model. As a quick side note, you can use chaos and K on the keyboard in order to use back edges without having to use the back edges to recommend my use and the toolbars. Now the same time you're going to see that you have something very similar where the X-ray able to use the X-Ray in order to look very much the same thing. However, the face has n edges are going to look depend on visual style you've already selected, which is going to be true for the back edges and for the X-ray as well, their actual limits to what you can select by using the back edges and the X-ray. Because in a 3D model, faces are not actually plays on layers based on their position relative to the camera, which means that you cannot select a face behind another face. So you can erase the edges and then make a face instead. Hours on end for you to know is that if you use wireframe, you won't be able to use x-ray or back edges. This is because whether wireframe you are going to see or DHS and only the edges they having immoral. So because of this, if you wanted to select only the wedge-shaped, you can actually use the wireframe. Because if you copy the elements while using the wireframe, the only thing that you will be copying is the lines. So we call this means you will be able to go back and forth between the main styles and then the other style. So you can use in order to help you select any objects. Which also means that you can use them in order to read the model. 40. Exercise (Creating a Table): Now in order to show you how can you use the visual styles as well as the Beatles and the two circumstance where you have unmodified toolbar, I'm going to create a table. So I'm going to create first the top of the table by creating this rectangle two, which are going to add an extrusion as well. I'm going to use different views. So you can see the different elements that make this model, but also how they are going to load depending on how you're going to work on it and how you can present it. But also I'm going to be using the visual styles. So you can see how the visual styles can be used when revenue model. But more importantly, what happens if you use wireframe when copying the edges? So as you notice, when using wireframe, you're only going to copy the edges that make the shape. And in the case of a simple table, the potion pole is the one that you will be using. The gray, the basic shapes. Now I'm just going to finish the fate of the table, but also I'm going to play for the elements. What are they stable? They're going to support the paper. I'm going to be using the tool circumvents that are already covered in order to make this easy. So as you notice, editing shapes, this is actually pretty easy once you get used to the tools are commands that you wouldn't normally use. As a quick side note when you select a face. And then you go by the phase by using e.g. the line to recommend one other phase is going to remain selected in case you want to add a phase afterwards. As we are going to use the Move tool, may not have a greater copy of this element, so I can place it on the other side, myosin as a reference, the elements, they're already great on this model. Now as well, I'm going to create a shape bias and the fallow me, however, cyclic sign-on and also going to change the view that I'm using in order to create the shapes so you can see the result. Once again, use and abuse also requires for you to remember if you're using the perspective or if you're using parallel projection. Now I'm just going to add more detail to the elements that make the table. And starting first by adding more faces that can be used with tools later on. Now last but not least, I'm going to create a few shapes based on the file name. And then I'm going to copy these new elements on the other parts of the table. Now you can do this the following way or you can simply move the base or the feet above the changes that I did one other field. So you can just copy the changes to the other face of the table. This is just more convenient. However, once you get into a sketch, you're going to notice that there are ways in which you can do this. There are a lot more efficient for the purpose of this exercise. I'm just going to finish editing this model the following way. And after finishing the table, I'm just going to erase any unnecessary lines, but also I'm going to heal the phases of the shapes that are greater other people. Or in another words, that I created for this model. Now as well, you can also say this model because I'm going to give you a sense of the other lessons from this course. 41. The Groups: Now next sketch over you can create your elements independently. So if you want to modify a niche, a face, or an element independently from the rest of the model. One of the things that you can create as a group. So in order to create a group, we are able to use that to recommend on the user interface. Or you can simply use the menu on the mouse after selecting the elements. But you want a group. Now once you've created the group, you are going to see on the entity Info Panel and information and properties available for this group. And as you can see, once the greater the group, you will be able to edit the group. Nine edit to edit the group, you can use once again the mammals in order to select the option that you have in order to edit the group. But also you won't be able to press twice and the mouse in the group. Now since you can edit everything within the group without editing the rest of the model, you're going to see that that group as such, also has an origin. This lecture will be represented by dx is just like on the modal space or modal window, but they will be placed in a way in which the elements within the cube or the parser palace of the axis in relationship with the origin. However, if you do not have any other element, etc, another group, the excess will not appear. There groups made an element that will allow a sketch representing region because it's still uses a coordinate system. Or in another words, it's going to have relative coordinates based on the absolute coordinates, they have any SketchUp. Now what this means, you can edit the group as you can add the rest of the model. So this means that this is a model within a model. Now as well. Since you are able to gray groups, you are also able to explore the groups into the individual elements that make the group. However, this only works one level paradigm. So if you have groups within groups and they will remain as groups, I'm telling you explode into. Now in order to show you this a little bit easier, I'm going to use the groups were the table that I created. So as you notice, I can create a group for the entire table in case they are working on a bigger model. But also, I can create groups in order to avoid making changes on the right. So the shapes, because these shapes are still connected by edges and vertexes. So work rate changes on the rest of the model if you try to move them or even delete them. But also something for you to keep in mind when you work in the groups is the fact that you can select the elements before using Control-C. So this means that a SketchUp remembers your selection when you undo the changes, as long as you're not editing when you select it. So with this in mind, you're able to create groups in order for you to add them independently from the rest of the model. Now this is very important because you can have complete shapes independent from the rest of the model. But also because you will be able to create details a little bit easier when working in SketchUp. If you're using a SketchUp for more than just grading concept models and such, then this will become even more useful to you. Now with this being said, like robes, I'm not the only way in which you can separate the shapes of the model. However, this is going to be the basic one. They are going to be using what Morgan your models make us again group everything that you create on the model. Also, wherever you added the shapes for the groups, the snaps and the tools that you have on the modify panel will still function the same way. So once again, our group is a model within a model, or in another words, are shaped separated from the rest of the model. Now I'm just going to replace most of these shapes and the model with groups. Now cyclic sino, if you're not able to visualize the changes they are though, and on the model, you can always change their visual style. So you can use the groups in order to help you organize your model in a way in which you can add a new model for easily, but also in a way in which you can come back to it at any point and not having to worry. Reediting the entire shape. 42. The Components: Now when you work in SketchUp, you're going to see that there is another way in which you can organize the models. If we select this element, you're going to see later on the entity front panel, it appears as a component. So the entity Info panel will allow you to make sure that you are selecting the right type of element. While also use an API, change the information you send the components. So if you create a group, you're going to see where you will be able to edit the group as you normally would. However, you're now going to make any changes to any copy of the group, the West greater. So the groups are not really great to work with multiple copies of the same element while creating a model. Now if you do the same thing by using components instead of groups, you are going to see that every day is pretty much the same. However, the components are a little bit different because if you create a component, you are going to be able to see very few at one of the components. You're also going to add the other. So this means that the components are what you can consider families blocks in other softwares. However, let properties of the components is something they're going to show you later on. Because right now what I want to focus a thing, how can you use a component in a retrograde basic elements that you can use while working model. So I'm going to focus on the basic properties such as the name. So something for you to notice when it goes to the name. And so you can actually select the same name for different components. However, you will be editing the elements within the component, or in another words, you will be replacing the entire component. So this important for you to know when naming the components, as well as the option that is checked by default, that is called replay selection with components, which will allow you to replace the elements that were selected with a component. Or in another words, it will delete the elements that you select it and replace them with a component. So as a result, you're going to have a component in the model space, but you can use right away. So one other benefits of using components are, for example, the stairs, because you can create a stairs, has components in order for you to grade something very complex very easily. And with this in mind, I'm just going to create ester by using components for the different power. So this tear and starting first with the riser and then continuing with a trap. Now the good thing about this is that you can easily edit any of these components. Or in another words, in this case, the treads of this there based on this structure, are based on the design. So this means that if you want one other threads to store behind the riser, you can edit the component better also, you can create the dose for the design of the tread. So if you wanted to, you can even edit the components depending on what you need. Now with this in mind, all the copies of the same component, cardinal, different components, but instances of the same component. Or in another words, it's the single bond in place multiple times on the model while being counted as since then assess the risk, a chip can keep track of them. As well as I click center, you can actually use the groups in order to group multiple components into a single group. And also you will be able to see that you can use components within components. So you are going to be able to select a component and then copy the component. So you can paste in place the component, well then the other component, once you delete the components that are placed independently. And this will avoid creating unnecessary components with n elements, such as the stairs. Now you can edit any of the instances of the same component. And the result is going to be that all the components are going to change at the same time. But I SketchUp changes the appearance of the other components that makes sure that the focus remains on the component that you're editing. Sorry, go into gray this phase in order to finish the outside of the straps. And all the threads together are going to make this there. Now. So quick sign-on using components does not only extend to the shapes with other components, because you're going to assign materials to the phases that make the shapes. As I mentioned before, you can use the groups in order to have all the components together into a single element. And this also means when I sketch abuses the groups and the components for different reasons. And also something as well for you to know is that you can use the entity Info Panel in order to change the names of the groups. Which also means that you can do the same with the components. So one of the last things that are going to do is save the model, may not ever use it in other lessons. Now. So I'm looking for that as well for you to know how about groups and the components. Instead of groups and the components are going to have a snap. So you can use based on the bounding box of the groups are the components. Or in another words, you are going to have it snaps based on these edges that join together in order to form a box. If you're using a recent version of my sketch up here, going to be able to make use of this snaps while moving the grooves as well as the components. And if you have any bow, have IBS, nabs, remember that you can cover the snaps in order to see which number you're using. 43. The Flip Along: Now next SketchUp, you are going to have an option that will allow you to flip the direction of the elements that are great for your model based on the x's. Now this is an option that you have based on the menu that you opened with a mouse. Or in another words, there many of the European, after selecting the elements. However, you're not going to be able to see this option if you only select one line. And the assumption is called flip alone. So when you call where it says flip alone, they are going to be able to see that you can flip the elements on the right direction, the grain direction, the blue direction. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to create a basic shape on this model. And starting first with a rectangle, because it's a very simple shape, they can be edited in order to create many different elements, like for example, a box. And once the greater the box, I'm just going to make a few changes to the bugs so that the flip alone is a little bit more noticeable on this lesson. So as you can see, every time they use that flip Alon, who are going to be flipping the elements that you select them based on the direction that you're using. So this is something that you can use for an entire model or just a shape. Which also means that you can use this where the phases, but also with multiple lines as well. These can be used on elements such as groups or components. So after using microbe, you can notice that if you hold where it says flip alone, My name is going to change to reflect that is being used and the groups hormone specifically based on how the groups are using SketchUp. But more importantly, we're going to see that in the groups and other components, we're going to change the position of the origin within their crews and their components when you send a flip alone, because the flip alone changes the direction based also on the axis of the group or the component. So if you use this on any of the components that you have in your model, you're going to see that the component is going to change not only its position, but also its origin. So the groups and the components will work the same way. But in the case of the components, since they are using their internal origins in order to flip on a monospace, we are going to get as a result, something similar to the mirror to recommend another supports. Consequently is a very useful option. That is, ketchup has in order to make good use. So vx is what grading your model. 44. Qualities of The Components: 900 to show you how the groups and components can actually be used to organize a little bit better. I'm going to use this table once again in order to create components instead of groups. So I can use the components in order to organize the elements that are going to be the same, whether the model. So for this, I'm also going to be using the free Poland because if Philip alone, we arrange the elements based on the position that they are going to have within this model. So the first thing that I'm going to be placing once again out of the field of the table in order to complete the table. Also going to use the move tool to add the remaining field has components, but also using the flipper, learn to make use of the axis while editing the table. A quick sign-up list naps of the components can make moving these components a little bit easier. And then, since there are other elements that I can also use as components, are going to be grading other components within this table. Now as a quick side note, I can create a single component and then you simply use the scale to recommend. However, not every table is going to have the same elements on all the sides of the table. So because of this, I'm going to create two separate components for the two lengths of the table. Well, I going to change the place where these elements that make them more accurate for any type of document, which also means that this is more similar to what you have and the reward. And also I'm going to show you that by using the flipper lawn. You're also going to get us a benefit. The fact that you can edit the four fatal to the table regardless whether their place, because they change the orientation of the table. So the flipper long can be used as the main route to recommend or the mirror axis of other softwares. Or in another words, this can be used to save time by just working on one side of a shape for our model. If you're using components as well, when it comes to the components, there is also a few things for you to know, such as, for example, how to explore the component, but also how you can place a component that you already graded. So in order to place a component, now you've already created, just need to use the Components panel. So in the Components panel, it will be able to find components may have created within the model, but also you will be able to track these components are the model space. Last but not least, there is going to be an option where you can use with this menu that is called make unique. Sir, if you select where it says make unique, it will be able to make this component function independently from the rest of the components. Or more specifically, is going to create a copy of the components that you selected very well, make that copy a unique component. So this way you will be able to create new components without having to start from scratch. 45. The Guide Lines and The Guide Points: Now when you're working in SketchUp, you're going to see the importance of the references. Now many of these references are already provided by SketchUp and the format is snaps, or in another words, the control so you can use in order to draw, but also in order to add the elements that Ukraine, whether in the model. However, if you create preferences by using the tools that you can find on the draw panel, you're going to see you won't be editing the model at the same time. So any SketchUp, you also need references that you can use at any point while avoiding a vendor model unintentionally. Further is you actually have that tape measure to. So with this, we are going to be able to do pretty much the same thing. However, the result is going to be a guideline. Nasa quick sign-up that take to recommend is actually used in order to get the measurements of the elements, but is used in order to create the guidelines. The guidelines is going to be different because it's now going to add the element. And it can be used as a reference because it's aligned even though it isn't and it's still a line. Now the guidelines are also going to grade whatever snaps. So the guideline, what we perceive as a line. While also you're going to see where you can select the endpoint of the guideline. So with this in mind, you will be able to edit the models a little bit easier as well. You are going to be able to see a few other things that you can do with a tape measure to throughout the course. So what this means, say, you can add a b elements as you normally would use and the guidelines as references dictionary by using this guideline to whatever shape, you can see that this one will not edit the shape or the phase once they connect one way or the other. Now the guidelines are created differently depending on when you use a sub reference in order to draw the guidelines. So if you use, for example, a phase, you are going to see that you can align with an end point. Our views or lightness of reference, you are going to get a guideline and it's going to be parallel to the line that was used as a reference. But also, you're going to see that the guideline is going to extend throughout the model. Or in another words, you are not going to be able to see whether this one is going to end as well. The guidelines actually lies that can be used for different purposes. However, the guidelines can be used with other tools or commands, such as the move tool, not only in order to move the guideline, but also in order to copy the guideline. And once again, you're going to notice here are going to be able to use these guidelines in a retroviral elements. But also you won't be able to use them as reference in order to draw the elements. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to have a reference, but you can still use as you normally would. However, this one will not enter the elements, the Ukraine, what working tomorrow as well. While you send this to our command, you can avoid great in the guidelines by just simply pressing Enter on the keyboard. Now cyclic sign-on, you can do the same thing on a Mac by assembly option key. So with this, you will be able to toggle on and off recreation or the guidelines whether to recommend. Now another reason why the guidelines are also important is because in elements that are equated based on circles and arcs, you're going to see equating a reference for the center of the circle and the yargs is actually pretty useful. So in order to avoid having a line, you can use the guidelines in order to create this reference. Now if we change the style, you can see that the result is pretty much the same. However, the guidelines have here additional options that you can use once you finish the model that our normal line will not have when it comes to clean and your model once you finish. And also since this reconsider lines, you can also use the keyword in order to take the value. So you want to use for the lane or placement of a guideline. Nasa quick sino, the guidelines appear as guides and the modeling for panel when you select them. Now with this being said, you can use the type to recommend at any point while also using the options of this to recommend. What this means is that you can use the arrows and the keyword in order to lock the direction of the guidelines. But also as well. Something for you to notice is that if you use a point or in another words and then point as a reference in a retrograde the guidelines. The guidelines is going to be also created by the center line and a point, even if the point that is being used as a reference is another guideline. So these might be confused that occurs even if you're not using the point as a reference directly. Meaning that if the point is highlighted on the model space, you are going to be using the points of reference, even in for your grading, is away from the point of reference, which is something that you can see one working with these snips. Now as well, the axis on the model space are also considered lines for the tape to argument. Or in another words, you can use the axis as a reference in order to break the guidelines. Consequently, the guidelines will be graded based on the axis without changing the function of the guideline for how it works. Which also means that you can take the value and the keyword that you want to use when separating the axis from the guideline. But also you're going to be able to do the same with another to recommend. That also allows you to create guidelines, which is the one that is called protractor. Now the protractor is going to be like a tape measure to and the signs that you can measure the angles but then the model. But also you will be able to gray guidelines based on the angles the're selecting. So you're able to grade multiple guidelines that will stretch throughout the model. While I still use and the angles that you selected by you send the measurements or the keyword for more precision. As well saying is we're going to use lactose or commands on the modify panel. You will be able to save a little bit of time one place and you guidelines on the model. But also you can see that you can do the same thing by its undertake to recommend if you know or half of reference for the rotate tool, I recommend, however, if you use a point, you will get only the signal by guideline instead of a line, whether a visual endpoint on the model space. Now I'm just going to use that to sort command center trope panel in order to play something on the modal space or modal window. What posts are you somebody guidelines as a reference. Now as well, if you use a point of reference, you are going to see that the guideline is now going to extend through the entire model. Now, all of this becomes very important because you can actually grade the references that you need in order to create certain elements. But also because the components are the basics of the arrays in SketchUp. So you can use the guidelines in order to help you migrate in a race, but also when creating components. And also since they're references, at some point, you may need to delete them. So you can use this sketch menu in order to search for an option that is called the lead case. And once you use this option, all the guys, what does appear front of modal space? Or in another words, there will be the leader for any model. But also, if you don't want these elements are your model. To keep the guidelines, you won't have to delete them. The only thing that you will need to do is actually go to this menu in order to hide the guidelines. Which doesn't mean that you cannot hide the guidelines as you normally would. So the fact that the guidelines also considered lines will give you a few benefits when creating the guidelines. And if you want to hide them, just need to select them and then open this menu so you can select the option to hide. And in the case of the components, this will hide the guidelines from all the entities at the same time. So once again, you can create guidelines, but also you can avoid great in the guidelines by using control or you send option on a Mac. As well as you can use as a reference, the axis, as well as the lines they equate with a new model. So this means that you can even create a guideline I sub reference based on Linux system line. And this will place the guideline on top of the existing line, whether it's aligned, rater, bias and electro panel or an axis. So all this means said that guidelines are pretty as well when you create your models for many different reasons, but mainly because they can be used as references. Whether Arabella model. 46. The Basic Options on the Create Component Window: Now in this part of the course, I'm going to cover in a little bit more why you can do with the components and starting first with the different ways in which you can create components. So once you selected the elements, they want to turn into our component. You can open this menu by using the mouse in order to celebrate says Make Component, or you're going to use this sketch of menu. Now when you use this ketchup menu, you're also going to see that main component also has a shortcut, which is gs and George and I'm Mack. The shortcut will appear next to the name of the stool. And as well, once you use this tool, you are going to get the caret component window. Now the gray component window, they're going to see three sections that general the alignment and the events attributes. So in this case I'm just going to cover that gentle and the events attributes. So when they send mine, I'm just going to type in a name and description, but also I will be using the events attributes that you can tie when it comes to AI component. As you can see, the name in a sketcher scroll definition. While the Advanced attributes has to do with the price less sites, the URL, and also the type. So with this in mind, you will be able to tie the price of the component you're grading in case you're operating on a small piece of an element, such as e.g. a. Panel or the frame of the door as well. The URL, Mason, your company. Now the URL is actually very useful in construction because it can be used to let others know where you can find the product or where you can purchase it. So if you have that information, you will be able to write it down along with the type. However, the type is sent in. There are going to cover on another lesson. Nasa quick sign-up. By default, you're going to see once again, the replace selection with component is going to be selected by default. This means that after creating the component, you're also going to notice that you can create components using this option. However, if either is going to keep the elements that make the component. So because of this, you will need to use the Components panel in a little place, the component where you create it. Now as well, you can use the Components panel in order to delete the components as long as the component has been placed in the model. Now with this in mind, you are going to have a few controls then you can use, in a real-world radical opponents when you use a two or command such as the moon to recommend. However, there is a few things for you to know. They're going to be useful when you start placing components, but also when you start working. But toolbars, they haven't SketchUp. So e.g. when you place a component, you're going to see that at the moment that you place the components, you're going to have access to the same controls. Then you can see when you use the Move tool or a command in order to place the component not only based on their location, but also based on the rotation. So you don't need to use the Move tool, Rotate tool right after placing the components. Unless you need something very specific that you can only use with those tools. Also, this is based on the face that you hover. So with this in mind, you're going to see that the red axis is also going to affect how you work with other toolbars, such as the toolbar that you use in order to create the shadows, which also means that this is related to the Gamma. So if you use something for option that you have on the alignment, we're going to be able to make the component always face the camera. And at the same time, you can make the shadows face the sun, which is going to make the shadows less accurate compared to how they usually function. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see that every time you turn these elements into components, these assumptions are going to affect the component a little bit differently. And this is because the red axis will remain the same. However, the elements within the component are going to change the orientation. So always face gamma is the option that is used with the silhouettes that appear every time they open SketchUp. Additionally, you are able to see the position of the component once you edited, we chose some means that if you start editing the component, you're also going to see the actual shadow cast by the component. So you will be able to see the shadow instead of the shadow cast by the component when you send the assumption. Now in this case, I'm just going to delete a few components to make this less confusing. But also you're going to be able to see the bias and the Components panel. It will have a few options that you can use an edit to work with the components that you have in your model, such as e.g. select instances. So with this in mind, it will be able to select the instances of the same component that you have in your model. So this will be pretty useful every time that you have multiple components within your model. Now in this case, might also going to continue with the door by creating the panel and also the frame of the door. However, I'm going to avoid using any of the options on the alignment because we haven't covered all the oceans and the alignment just yet as well. I'm going to turn this element into our component. How are not going to change, how the shadow is cast by default. But also, I'm now going to use right away, we have options on the Alignments section of this window. Additionally, I going to do the same thing with a frame because I'm going to use this lesson's all sorts of fish e.g. or exercise for the course in case they want to follow along. Now as a quick sign on, one of the ways in which you can work with the components is by actually placing components that are placed within other components or groups, or set of components or groups. So you can edit them a little bit easier. But also so you can see a little bit better. The component that you're working in as well, something for you to see is the axis that I created for the components. Something that you will need to keep in mind is the direction of the axis when you have other components Li place in the model, how to use the axis and the components is also something that are going to cover throughout these lessons. And since I'm going to be sent the door for other lessons and also going to save this model. I can use it later on. Now regardless of the component they are editing, the benefit of working with components will remain the same, which means you can edit one of the copies of the same component and you will edit the definition, or in another words, all the other copies at the same time. So the assumptions will be pretty useful when grading components because we'll be able to define how you want to use the camera, but also because you will also be able to define how you want to use the camera when it goes to the components. 47. Editing the Components Information: Now we're working with the components. You are going to see they are able to use the entity Info in order to change some of the properties or values that are used for the components. And this means that when you use the component, you don't need to use all the information that you have at the moment that you create a component. And this will become very important because this includes the additional information that you can add to the component, such as e.g. the URL and the type. So with this in mind, you are going to see me are going to be able to change the information that is used when the components, or more specifically the instance and the definition. But also you're going to see that every time you create a new component based on the existing one, this one is going to have a different definition. And also, every time you place multiple copies of the same component, you are going to be able to change the name of the instance that you're using. So this means that you can add a name to each other copies of the same component. Now in order to place the component, you will need to press interactive component for the Components panel. And if you change your mind, you can simply release the mouse anywhere. Another monospace. Additionally, you can see the name of the component instance on the Components panel before placing the component hour, you can also see the name of the component instance for placing the component of the model. So with this, you can avoid placing the wrong copy or component instance and the model regardless if they look pretty much the same. However, this is going to be considered the same component. Or in another words, are the components that are using the same definition can be selected by using select instances. Which means that if you use the option of telling, you will be the leading or the instances at the same time. So this is going to be pretty useful when you're organizing the components within your project. You can create any component by exploiting an existing one. Or you can create any component altogether, which is something that you can use if you want to make changes on the component. As well as I mentioned before, DX is a very important when it comes to creating components. So with this in mind, you're going to see there under where it says alignment, you are going to be able to set the component axis. So once you define the general information that you want to use, you can click where it says the component excellence in order to select where you want to place the axis of the component. Once the load is, it will be able to control how you place the components within your project. Now as well while working on this lesson and also going to continue editing this component. I'm going to edit in this compound in just a little bit in order to also show you what else can you do when creating our families such as this one? So I'm going to finish editing a little bit this store before moving to the next lesson, which means that also going to save the model, a quick sign up, you can change the visual style. We make sure that you don't have any unnecessary lines on the model. And this is also useful when editing the shapes that you already have an a component. And to finish this lesson, I'm just going to adjust the shapes based on the changes of the component before saving the model so I can use them later on. So what all this means said, writing components and changing the information then upon is actually pretty easy once you get used to the Components panel and the entertaining for panel. 48. Gluing Components: And if SketchUp, when you start placing components that are created by somebody else, you're going to say they're going to be a few cases in which those components can be placed in certain ways. And this is because once the components are greater, able to decide how they're going to replace with a new model. So in this lesson, I want to show you how you can change the placement of the components we create for your model. So I'm going to be using once again that all of the previous lessons. The way for you to do this is by using the options that you have in the alignment for my specific likely option that is called GLUT-2. So you can create a component as you normally would once the UK to the side, the alignment, you will be able to decide which alignment we want to use. So you can select the definition as well as the description of the components. Now the alignment is going to be based on the name. So we're going to have horizontal particle and a slope. With this in mind, I'm going to start by using the one that is called vertical. So with this, we're going to see the ones that I use, the Components panel. This one can only be placed on the typical phases within the model. So as you can see the name pretty much in place where you can place the component. So if you try to place the component anywhere else, you're going to get this text. Now what this means say, since I also grading outdoor, going to continue with the creation of the door by creating the handle for the base, I'm going to scale this component so I can create the handle a little bit easier. And as a quick side note, you're going to see that changing the scale of the component is now going to change how the component is going to function. Which means that you can still edit one instance of the same component in order to change the rest. Or in another words, you can edit one of the copies of the component in order to add the remaining topics. And also, I'm going to create a few references that I can use in order to create this handle. Once again, you're going to notice that one of the components is going to change based on the changes to render into the other. Regardless of the scale, you're going to be able to see the result or the changes in real time on the door. Now what this on mine, I'm not going to try to grade something very specific or in another words, but a lot of detail. However, you can actually add a lot of detail if you want to. E.g. unable to use the hidden geometry in order to see the lines that make the shape. So I can use them in order the greater profile for the follow me. So I'm going to be using the hidden lines in order to create the shape. However, when you create a shape, so just please, when you actually need to add a little detail. And as I click Center, you are going to see throughout these lessons that I use quite a lot, Control C followed by paste in place. And this is in order to avoid unnecessary lines when creating the shapes. Because in a sketch of you might have noticed that when you use the following me, sometimes I SketchUp grace the shape while also making visible all the edges of a shape on a circular shape is going to make possible or the ages that make this circular shape. Because it is, I try to avoid as much as possible making basic all these lines, but also in order to avoid using all the options that are SketchUp has later on. So in another words, I tried to create and shape as intended from the beginning. Now, alright, we get patently those same tools such as the push and pull, but also by using the scale to recommend. So as you can see, you're able to make changes to our shape based on when you want to achieve. But also you can add a little more detail if you want to. As a quick sign-on, you can use the scale tool on the faces and you can't even scale the phase based on the center by using control or Option on a Mac. Now the aerosol won't be perfect for the actual references like Gambia use in order to create this component. Now as well, since I'm using this component on the door and postal going to great references that I can use in order to place this component on the door. Or in another words, that are going to use as a reference in order to make sure that I'm placing this component where it's supposed to go. Now after placing this element of the door, I'm going to create a few elements, whether this model, so you can see the difference of use and disruptions in other shapes. So in this case, I'm going to create another shape for the placement component. And then I'm going to create a component that is going to use a different alignment. With this in mind, you're going to see that depending on the alignment that you select, these components will allow you to place them on a specific surfaces. So it's very important for you to remember which option you select the on disrupt them in order to make sure that they are going to be placed according to what you want. Especially with the one that is fairly slow. Because this one will actually allow you to place a component when a surface that is not protocol horizontal. Or in another words, when a surface that has a slope, which is actually pretty useful when you're working in elements that you want to add. Something like a roof for our brand. However, if you want something to be aligned with the surface, even when it's placed on the ramp. They won't be able to use this because our elements, they don't want to follow the law that you're using. In the case of something like the railings, the option, the fallacy slope. Well, we pretty useful while if you create e.g. a. Dormir, this option is not going to be so useful because you don't want the dormir to follow the slope of the roof. Now this might be confusing at first because I SketchUp doesn't actually let you know what is vertical and what is horizontal. However, and I got a patient plane. The y axis is the protocol, while dx is the receptor. So in SKA to the red axis, as well as the green axis chart, the x-axis and z-axis respectively, are going to be horizontal, while the blue axis or y axis is going to be the vertical one. So the x is that you have on this surface or the horizontal ones, while the other one is the vertical one. And as a quick side note, if you don't have any specific preference when it comes to this options, you can simply use the one that is called Any. Now as well, something for you to notice is that by default, the option very small opening is disabled until you use this options. A quick center, since you can use the option to clue, you will see that there are ways to remove this assumption and the component, which means that you will be able to anglo the component from the surface. So it called this being said, it's actually pretty useful and very important when you start creating a standard components such as ramps, doors, windows, and so on. 49. The Cut Opening Option: Now as well, when you work in a sketchbook, you are going to see when you work with the components they sentence specifically, you can do enter into great details and a few elements within other elements. Or in another words, elements that are imbedded within others. And this one is called opening. Now this assumption can be selected while creating the components. Or in another words, the components are the ones that you can use in order to add color shapes in the model. So in order to use the company, you actually need to start grading I component that you can use. But also once you add the genome information, you need to use that drop-down allude to in order to select any of the options within disrupt them and wants to use it, you will be able to click races got opening. And once they use a component that uses the option that is called opening, you are going to be able to see the yard going to be able to cut surface of another element. Or in another words, have faced that you have within your model. Now you can use this in different ways. However, one of the ways in which you will be able to use this is by creating decorations. So I'm going to create a declaration that you can use within a door. Now that basic shape, and I'm going to use this, the rectangle. The rectangle. I'm going to create several shapes. The door that I graded nasa quick sign-on. In order to do this, I'm going to be using the file may have already noticed is the Follow me a little bit more efficiently. Asexually use the reference layer grading on the inside of the shape that you want to create instead of the outside reference. Now this will actually make things a little bit simpler for the following me. However, something else that you can do in order to make things even easier, sexually use less segments on the ark. As I break sign-on through this point, you can say that this component is Anabaena door, even if I had other component. Now what this means said something else and you're going to see while creating the shape, the shape needs to be close in editor Kathy, geometry, or in another words, the lines or edges that touches the face the marketing made to create one single loop. Or in another words, they need to create one single continuous line within the same high or plane of reference. Now what this means same and going to finish the shape so you can see the vessel, but also because I'm going to use this in both sides of the panel. Now I'm going to use the filament, the gray, the shape. So I'm going to start by grading the profile for the filament or in another words, the profile, the shape. And then I'm going to select the pen so I can use the following. As a quick sign-on, you can say that this component is no longer edit than the pan out the door, even if I remove unnecessary lines. A quick sign. And by doing this, you're also going to see what happens when editing this component. Or in another words, what happens when I then leave and gray lines, that is component actually uses in order to grab the phase in which replacing the component as well, if they shave the graded, it's not longer than the other component or shape. You can simply create the shape in a different way. Which means that if you have any issues, then later on unnecessary lines, you can simply create a new pen. Follow me. Now with this component grade and you can notice that the entire shape needs to be close, not only when it comes to the edges or lines that will connect with the other shape or component, but also everything within those edges are otherwise the element is now going to go. The other element. Now as well, you might think that you can actually use this in order the gravy openings for the doors. However, you're going to see that if you use this in order to create openings for the doors and windows, are now going to be able to cut all the way through. So you can use this in order to query an extrusion that you can use reference one place and better, but you still need to delete the unnecessary phases when it comes to the placement of the door. While at the same time, you still need to consider the phases that are created when you create the solution. Now as well, when you use the glue, you might have issues when placing elements that are glued to another phase. So if you have any issues, you can simply use the option that is called on glue and added to Angular component. However, if you are the one after this, you can simply use the Move tool or Command inadequate or the same. So we can actually do this either way regardless of the component. So personally, I prefer to use Move plus control instead of using Angular. So with this in mind, I'm going to finish at another component with the door based on the new elements or components that are added to the door. Now, so quick sign-up. If you create a component without using any of the options on the drop-down right next to where it says GLUT-2, then you're going to see the ones that you open this menu. The option that is colon glue will be grayed out. So it pulled. This means say, the options that you have in order to pollute the component are actually pretty useful, depend on the component that you're creating or do. They already created? 50. Changing The Axes: Now when you work in a SketchUp, we're going to see, but the more important SketchUp, more important, the axis are going to become. One of the reasons why they are important is because dependently access, the camera is going to change. And this is also going to apply to the components because the camera takes into account the center of the component, or in another words, the coordinates within the component. And this will affect the bills we're using. We're working on the model. And this will include the standard views such as the left, the front, the back, and so on. And this is more visible when you change the abuse. So because the model space and the components have the axis, we'll be able to see change depending if you change the standard view while editing I Component, Editor under component. And this is also important because the axis are also used in other elements of the model as well as within the components. So because of this, SketchUp has different ways in which you can edit the components. One of the ways that you can do this is by using the menu that you opened by using the mouse. So if you use this menu after selecting a face, you can use the option that is called hyaline axis. So you will be able to align the axis depending on the normal of the face where you select it. How are you can use this option at any point, as long as you only select a face. As well as you haven't used a software that actually uses the normal or you haven't taken a class that covers the normal of the surface, then you will need to know that the normal is the one that allows you to visualize the positive direction of the surface. And this one starts at the geometrical centre of the face are surface. And in this ketchup, in the positive direction is easy to perceive because the front face by default, happier singular way. Now swelling other softwares such as how they need in Maya, this is as important as it is in engineering. However, very sexually or to recommend that is called axis. So you are going to be able to use this tool or command in order to change the axis that you want to use, white working, you'll join. Our standing for you to know is they use and this axis is not actually going to change the origin. But you're using SketchUp. Or in another words, it's not going to change the absolute coordinates of a SketchUp. So with this in mind, you're able to change the axis in order for you to work in your model when it goes to the camera, but also when it comes to the tool circumvents that actually uses the axis as a reference. And I said quick sign-on in order to show you a little bit more about the axis, also going to grave references that will allow you to visualize the origin of the model space at all times. And as well as you remember, the groups also have an origin. The groups as well are going to be using the axis in order for you to decide how you edit the groups. So there isn't a real difference between the groups and the components on this regard, which also means that the origin on the model space and the agenda crew were correlate with each other. Lets say why? Nasa quick Center, by default, the origin is place the same way on the groups and the components, which means that the origin is placed in such a way that everything within the component is using the possible x coordinates of the axis. Or in another words, is going to be placed on the positive direction of the axis. And this is also important when the components, because when you create a component, you are able to sell the component axes. But also because you're going to be able to use the axis to recommend with any components. So you're going to be able to change the axis there is being used in order to either the components. So what this means is that when you added the component, you are going to be able to change how you work with the component just within the component. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the airline axis as well as the access to or command in order to determine how you want to work in your models. Now as well, you're going to see that the axis also change how you operate the elements for your model, which is something that you can also nowadays, once you select the component from my specifically ones that you are able to see, the bounding box of the component. Now as well, the axis also allow you to change the reference layer using when drawing elements on the surfaces. Which means that you can create certain elements and a little bit easier by just changing the axis within the groups or components as well when you use this tool or a command, you're also going to see that you're able to use existing references or its name. So you have with a new model in order to change the axis. And this is something that is going to be the same. Even if you use this tool within the groups, what are the components? This means that you can create your own reference within the model before changing the axis with the y-component. Now one of the two sort remains that actually uses the axis as a reference is the scale. The scale to recommend actually uses the axis in order to determine hybridization of the controls that you use in order to scale an element, including the components and the groups. Non-cyclic sign-on the absolute coordinates are actually very important in other supports that you might be using with the models that you create in a SketchUp. So if you use e.g. lumen, you're going to see that the absolute coordinates that you have in SketchUp are actually the same they use in Lumen hormone specifically, when you import a Lumia. Lumia is going to recognize the absolute coordinates for tomorrow. The gradient is sketching the absolute coordinates actually very important when rendering a model outside with SketchUp. But also when you went to crave multiple models, they can be used within the same file, again, another software. Now the axis will become very important as well. Because if you're creating your model by using different files, there is one particular thing that you can do by using the paste in place, which is the fact that you can open any file in order to copy other models into a single model by just simply select the files and then just using control C for copy to recommend, and then just go to the new file and then use based in place. So paste in place will recognize the origin of the other model, which is something that you can confirm by the coordinates that you can see what those are commands such as the tape measure to. So I'm going to cover what information can you can paste undertake to recommend one another lesson. So in this case, what I want to show you is that the position is actually the same within the tomatoes. And this is going to remain the same even if you change the axis of the model. And this is because this is actually based on the excellent coordinates. So regardless of the x's, so you're using in order to enter the model or in order to use the camera in SketchUp, you are going to see that the absolute coordinates well not actually change. So half a cup in the component for a second time, you are going to see thereafter you some face in place. The component is placed in the same position. So one advice that I can give you if you want to use the access to recommend is actually greater preference for the origin in order to avoid having any confusion when you start changing the x's. Because my one degree different models on different files may still want to use the same origin in order to make sure that you can work with all the models at the same time. 51. The Component and Group Editing on the Model Info Window: Now in this lesson I'm going to show you a few things that you can do when it comes to the components, but also when it comes to electronic components. So I'm going to go to this ketchup menu in order to open the Preferences. So you can see that there is an option once there click where it says compatibility, that is called bounding box only, which will allow you to change how the component and the group is highlighted. Some of this in mind, you will be able to say, a little bit of research says, if you choose to enable the bounding box only. Now as well, when you work with multiple components at the same time, we're going to say that if you select one of the components, the rest of the components will appear. But I have done. So if you open the modeling for window and you click where it says components, you will be able to change the values that you use in order to fail similar components as well as the rest of the model. Now these options are pretty useful for working on models with a large number of components, like e.g. an office building at multiple levels. They have a similar layer on the floodplain, as well as how much you want to fade the rest of the model. But also you can choose to hide the other entities as well. You can use this whatever I set the model. So you can choose how much you want to fail the rest of the model. But also you can choose to hide the rest of the model. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to create a few elements within this model in order for you to see how you send these options will affect the appearance of the model, but also the components of the same instance as well. Depending on how you want to proceed the model, you might want to avoid any changes to the appearance of the other components or even the rest of the model. Especially May 1st, these changes won't actually change the use of the components within the model. Now as well, you can choose if you want to show or hide the component axis. Which means that when you're editing a component, you will be able to see the component x is rho times, which is something that might be pretty useful in some cases. However, it might be a little bit confusing when you have multiple components within your model. Now what this means, save these changes actually apply within the file. Or in another words, they don't actually change for SketchUp. So every time you open a sketch, these values will go back to default as well. I'm going to use the default values, whoever any confusion as well. If you don't want to use the monoline for, you can also use the options that you have in the SketchUp menu in order to change how you added the components. So with this in mind, you can check or uncheck the options that you have when you hover over, it says Component Editor. So this means that you will be able to hide the rest of the model, or if you want to hide the similar components. Which also means that you can use both of these options at the same time. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see that you can isolate the components that you're working on at all times without actually having to multi-component different precision secretaries, any component you might want to add independently, such as e.g. the furniture. This is a way in order for you to do this. 52. Intersecting Faces: When you work in a sketchbook, you always create lines and faces in order of equation shapes. So because of this, you will have a lot of shapes with unnecessary faces if you don't use groups for components. However, in many cases, you will need a gray new shapes. And as well, many of the elements that you might need a gray are just as for shapes, the already graded. So because it is, you need to be able to combine the shapes. So one way to do this is by grade and unnecessary lines and the leading, any unnecessary elements. Consequently, there are also other ways in which you can combine elements on the model. Morocco, I had to be far more efficient and removing elements together before Arabic, the existing shapes. One of them is intersect faces. If you select the firm faces within the model, then you open this menu by using the mouse. You will be able to go where it says intersect phases in order to click where it says with selection, this will allow you to intersect only the phases. May you select it, which means that it's going to create a line. What are the two faces actually intersect? So you are going to be able to use this Internet of gray, several intersections based on your selection. However, because it is the rest of where the on the selection incident not satellite unnecessary faces the intersection is now going to create my lines some phrases that you should have once you select this option. So because of this, you may need to use one or the other options may have on this menu. So with this in mind, the next option that you have a sentence like faces with model, which will allow you to select the element, may want to intersect with the rest of the model. And this means that you can use this with a shape for elements and you want to intersect with the others without knowing why you need to select law you need to do when using intersect faces with selection. Now as well, you can also use intersect faces with groups and components. So with this in mind, if you create a group where component, you are going to be able to use intersect faces in order to intersect the component or the group with the entire model. So you are going to be able to create unnecessary phases in order to intersect groups and components with other shapes are between themselves. And this has various vertebrae, the lines that intersect the components or the cooler than them. Or you can use this when you add an icon font, or when you just want to add a component wacko. Because you can use this option within the groups. What are the components? Now you can also use this option within the groups and the components. So you can create intersections based on shapes, the grade just for this harbor, you're going to see that with model and with selection. I intended for a specific uses. And this is because there are different elements are entities that you get a and a SketchUp, but also different ways in which you can use them together. So you can see that there is another option, An intersect multiple elements at the same time, similar to intersect faces with model. And this one is called Intersect faces. We can text me at this point. It doesn't seem like it's doing anything because it's actually used in order to intersect elements or shapes. Now you can find for gray, but then the group cellular components without affecting the elements outside of them. So by using this option and you're going to see that the intersections are going to be created only between what is within the group. So in another words, intersect with model is in order to intersect when you are selecting with the rest of the model. One intersect selection will only intersect when you're selecting will intersect we can tax is pretty much like intersect with model. However, it will only intersect your selection where the contexts, or in another words, what shapes within the group. Without having to select the shapes, you want to intersect with your current selection. So as you can see, you can use this options for many different results. Because with selection only applies to the selection model, applies to the selection based on the rest of the model. While we can tax applies to the selection within the confines of the groups, hardware components. 53. The Solids: Minus ketchup. Another way in which you can intersect faces is body-center solid tools are in order to use the solid tools, you will need to know what is a solid. So solid is nothing more than a coup or a component, uses 3D shapes. However, the limitation that really shapes is going to be that the 3D shapes will need to have all the edges and faces. So you can create any shape that you want within the groups by just speakers there with an echo doesn't mean that they are solids. And this is pick a state function like objects that you can find under reward. And then the reward, even something like paper has a thickness. So because of these PAHs are not the only thing that can join the shapes. So because nowadays, you will need to make sure that if you have multiple phases and those phases cannot be joined by an edge, but also Eva, have any unnecessary lines. Now if you have any issues finishing as solid, you can use the entity Info panel because this one will let you know if the element is a select group or a group. Now as well, if you turn it back into a component, you're going to see that the only difference we will get on the entity Info Panel. Instead, this is going to be considered a solid component. So with all this being said, you can have a shape with falls within the groups and the components. So in another words, are unnecessary edges within the groups or components. However, you can have multiple shapes within the groups and the components. And this will still be considered solid. 54. The Solid Tools: Now, once again, in this ketchup, you have the groups and the components. However, if you have a closed shape or in another words, as shape that doesn't have any holes or unnecessary lines. This is going to be considered a solid liquid or a solid component. And a SketchUp is still going to consider next row, are the components a solid gray unnecessary edges for the shape. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the solid tools in a retrograde shapes based on existing ones. Are the solid tools were required. They are actually is in salads or otherwise you wouldn't need to use intersect faces. So you're going to make sure that you're using a solid by adding the additional lines that it takes to create a solid. Which also means that you might need to delete any unnecessary lines in order to make a group or component into a solid Howard you're going to see in this lesson that they use at intersections is not necessary in cases in which you can create the different elements you're going to get as a result to begin with. But more importantly, that there are different ways to create the shapes are elements besides they use at the Modify panel and intersections. And this is because in SketchUp the intersection when you use as a foundation of new tools. And it will also allow you to save time by using the solids ****, specifically by using the tools that you can find. It's solid stone work. By using the salads for my specifically, by essentially solid tools, you're going to be able to grow new elements based on the intersection of the elements. These are like on your model and the tools that you can find under solids toolbar or the shell mentors say the union, we subtract that train split. So by using any of the solid tools, you will also be able to see if a SketchUp consider the groups are the components and solid. So I'm going to use the first solid tool. Let's Go Aero shell. And once they use their outer shell, they're going to see the rest SketchUp lesson. Consider one other groups as a solid, which is something that you can also see on the entity Info Panel. And if this happens, you will need to refer to the group for component in order to make it a solid. So you said the entity Info Panel is the best way for you to know when they grew up. Per component is considered a solid ones, that this one is considered solid. You are going to see that you can still use intersect faces. However, the idea is that you can create something else within the model based on the solid curves are components. So by using once again, the solid to the risk of a Rochelle, you're going to see they're going to get any clue based on the two solids, or more importantly, that the two solids are now intersect and once again, face. And what are the phases in nature intersect together. But more importantly, only the exterior faces and edges of the groups while they are intersecting together. So everything that is inside is going to be the leader. Now if I use Control C, you're going to be able to see that you have other tools you can use, such as the one that is going through a sec. Now this one will intersect for the selected solid, but it's going to keep only their intersection on the model. And as well they are going to be a few select tool circumvents. They're going to function a little bit similar, such as, for example, the union. However, we even is going to be a little bit different because it also works based on what is inside. The red cell is going to be a little bit different when the shapes are different as well. Something for you to nowadays is that in order to use this tool circumvents, you will need to select less solids in which one I use this tool circumvents. But also that depending on the order we use selection, you're going to get a different result. So if you use this track, you're going to be able to see that the order of your selection will actually determine the result. Now the subtract is pretty much the same thing as stream. However, you are going to keep the result of the train, as well as the original solid to the trim is actually pretty useful if you are going to keep using the same solid in multiple solid groups. Point case, that you never intended to delete this group to begin with, maybe because they did not grade it, just purveys. The last solid to recommend that I'm going to show you is they split. Which are pretty much the two results that you will gain based on the order of the selections. There is also going to leave the rest of the Intersect is a quick side note. If you have selected and select group, you're going to see that that one is going to be considered your first selection until you reset the selection by selecting on an anterior on the modal window. Or in another words, when you press left on the mouse without selecting anything on the model space. As well. I'm going to gray additional elements on this lesson in order to show you a few other things that you can do with a solid tools that might be as well while creating your model as well. The important for you to know about the solid tools is that a solid tools will actually create as a result another solid. But also in the case of some of the solid tools, you will also create a service. So multiple solids. So you will be able to see, as a result, you select group so you can use if you're working with groups, however, equation you solids is more apparent when E is a component or in another words, and select component. And this is because if you use a solid tools in a component, every cell is going to be our solid coup. But also, if you select the result, you are going to see that on the entity Info panel, Let's select who will have a name based on a solid tool may use in another query and then you sell it in the component. It will be easier for you to appreciate that changes at a solid tools actually do an acetylene. You can always create and edit groups are components in order to use the solid tools. So you can test many different results for your models. Now you can always use these tools on components as long as their consider solids. I'm just going to use the option of my component with this group before you send a solid tools. However, since the result is going to be another component, you're also going to notice that the result is going to be restricted. Component Laplace transform into a select group. So in order to make a change to all of the components, you will need to work. You send a solid tools within the component. So when you use this, you will be able to make changes in other components at the same time without having to cover the component later on. So with this in mind, you will be able to see how the solid tools amuse, analytic way, more complex shapes based on existing ones. Although this is very important when you are creating certain models, because those morals may actually be very complex. In another words, they might be a specific shapes that I use in order to modify the model. So the solid tools will be pretty useful in order to emulate the result of a manufacturing process. Or in another words, when a specific shape is actually modify, when in the process of an assembly. 55. The Arrays in SketchUp: Now since by this point, and if I cover the groups, I components, the solid tools as well as intersections. Or in another words, the ways in which you can add in groups and also components. And also going to show you how you can use these concepts in order to create the erase. Now if you've have used other softwares, such as saturday, rabbit and so on. And you are going to be familiar with the curves of the erase. And if you haven't seen when an array actually is, then I'm just going to show you the basic concept of the array. So with this in mind, I'm going to play several copies of this component within this model. However, I'm going to be great in this cup is by using the two different methods you can use in order to copy elements, may send them all to argument, which are first to less than less. So by using first to last is nothing more than you creating a copy to a distance of your choosing and then just selecting how many copies do you want? Less is just simply selecting the elements that you want to copy and then just select them the distance of the last copy. Now cyclic center, we can input this value space and the keyword. And then just dividing that distance between the amount of carb is the U1, May 21st, and the less. Soulless can also be called first to last this week so that you can see is the array. So in another words, the erase and I'm adding more than multiple copies of the same components within your model. So if you haven't used a different software, these components are going to be the same thing as plot, instances, families, components, and so on. And if you are going to use this software is laid down, then this concept will remain the same. So as you can see, changing one of these elements in the array changes all the remaining ones because the arrays are made of components. However, you can create one copy of the component at a time and the result will be the same. As a quick side. Notice arrays can be resentful particle, but also aligned, which means that you can even use them in order to greatest stairs, such as the ones that are graded on a previous lesson. And as well, since they're able to gray, I've raised by using the Move tool or command posts are going to be able to grade reading your ProRes, which means they will be able to use the rotate command in order to gray several copies of the same component based on first to last, or by using less than the radio rays, there will be a little bit different because we'll be using the angles instead of the land, which means they will have a limit on the value that you can use for the angles, because the angles are between 0360 degrees. So what this means is that the values that you use is the angle instead of the land. So you can either input the angle between the component and the first copy in the reviews, first two less. Or you can input the value between the component and the last copy of the component in order to determine how many curve is the UN, between the component and the last copy, the component. So this means that we are raised. What we bring is for my grading, for example, the structure of your project, because we will be able to gray columns and also the foundation of your projects. While at the same time, this will be pretty useful when placing, for example, trees on a landscape. 56. The Arrays (Example): Now in order to show you a little bit better how the arrays can actually be used when working with elements and go into greatest there by using a radio agree as well. I'm going to change the amount of sites that anxiety is part of a circle in order to make this a little bit easier when it goes to the size of the treads. That also because the components on this type of stair will need to provide a space for a person to work through them. So something that you can change is the monocytes that you can use. However, the way that you create this, they're all remain the same. So the first thing that I'm going to gray is the reference that I'm going to use in order to create the array. And also the component that I'm going to use in order to create the treads for the array. So once I have the reference and the component, I'm going to grade the array by you send them for what they do augment. Once they're finished using the rotate tool, I recommend to create the copies of the component or in another words, the array. Also going to move these components upwards by using a cell reference, that height of the riser. And also, I'm going to create a protocol re, like copying all of these components. Particularly since I have too many components and just going to delete the unnecessary ones, might just simply on selecting the ones that I want to keep before the leaning. So once that I have the components in place, I'm going to start at even the components. Before finishing the model. I'm just going to use my group with all the components because that way I can move this terror at the same time. Social good practice because this will allow you to edit and the rest of the model in case you have something more within your model. Once it or edit the components, I can save this model in order to use it for other lessons or in another words, another exercise, for example. Now since you're working with components, you're also going to be able to create shapes Mason as a reference this components. Or in another words, you can do something similar to this tear. Sailor have to write a new shape, which we need to use. Those or commands such as the Follow me. As well as you notice, this Astaire is also very simple in the sense of the shape. So he says, if they stare that you're grading a stretch. A little bit more simple. This example you can see on abuses that the array is actually have when working with a new model. Which means that you can also create a shape outside of the component in a retrograde amnesia component that you can use independently from the treads. 57. -Importing 2D Graphics (CAD/AutoCAD): Now next ketchup, you're able to work with files, grading other softwares, such a sad, okay, So if you go to this SketchUp menu in order to click Reset same port, you will be able to open the import window. Now the import window, you will be able to see the files you're getting product to a SketchUp. So if you select and edit that file, and then you click where it says import, they're going to get this window, which is going to provide you the results of the input. But more importantly, it will let you know the entities that were simplified and the entities that were ignore. Nasa quick signer. When you start working in SketchUp, you're going to notice that I sketch it doesn't actually important the dimensions and the texts for aggregate. So even though it's very compatible with many of the elements that you can work it out. Again, you're going to see there's some objects they can create in aggregate are now going to be important to SketchUp, even though a lines to make the block in Attica will appear in a SketchUp. Also, you will see that if you select the elements, you will get a little bit of information on the entity Info panel, as well as an idea of discounted join because you can see the length of some other lines. Now, you don't actually have to worry about the size of the emperor because you're able to resize the file myosin to take ergotamine. However, if you want to import the file right away based on the units that you're using. The only thing that you need to do is actually go once again to this sketch your menu in another filigree. So simple. And then you simply use the options in order to change the units. If you're using a Mac, this window will look like this. However, many units that you need to sell it on, the options need to be based on the modelling units. Because the units and Erica are by default meter or inches. So because of this, if you use a smaller unit, we are going to see a warning letting you know that the father was important, asexually really large when it comes to the size. Therefore, many of the elements are very far away from the origin. Or in another words, from the origin of the absolute coordinates in SketchUp. So you can simply use a tablet in SketchUp that he sees in the same units theory is inadequate. So when it's on mine, I'm going to import the model once again, but this time I'm going to use meters as the units of the file that I'm going to import to a SketchUp. And once that I have done this, are going to see that both files are going to have, let's say in size. So you won't be able to use the size that you want to use right away, or you can use simply use that they do argument as well. You're going to see that when you select these files, the entity Info panel will give you the basic information about it as well. Something for you to notice is that on the options that you have when you import a file, you are going to have a few ones, therefore geometry and another one that is for position. So the ones that you have where it says geometry actually use when you import a 3D file for my software, such as aggregate. And by using first-serve join origin, you will be able to use the coordinates of the file that you're importing, which will be useful in cases in which you actually have a file that you want to keep working on inadequate. One is still quite in the model. Now something else. Well then you need to keep in mind when you import with SketchUp is that when you input for aggregate, all the lines are going to work independently one from the other. And what this means is that if you want to save a little bit of time modeling something for aggregate, you will need to import only the lines that you need in order to recreate the model. Because every time you see any sketcher or lines, so this file is going to be compared with two lines. Now, we haven't used plugs in. Aggregate. Flux are pretty much the same thing as the components, but only for aggregate. So this means that when you bring components to a SketchUp, sketch-based going to explore them into lines. However, since they are block scenario again, you're able to move them to another layer, but you can disable before bringing it to SketchUp. So that's why it's very important that you know how to use that again before important to sketch it. Now you can always clean the Join happening in Detroit. However, some tools or commands will equate even more lines when creating the model based on the drawing as well. When people tear, I can give you is two important different files with different layers or elements, such as, for example, the walls and liquids. So you can take advantage of the similarities between the coordinate systems may have involved supports and also the option various called first-serve joint origin. Now as well, you can import 3D file. A great inadequate. So I'm just going to go once again to the SketchUp menu in order to click where it says important. Name-calling, really far from arrogance is a little bit different because of the options on the way says geometry, which are merge coplanar faces for 3M faces consistently and important materials. So because of this, the first time that I import a file, I will not enable any of these assumptions on this window. However, on this case, you are going to see that the 3D options will become very important because when you Erica lines, but also because in Attica able to add materials. So with this in mind, I'm going to show you what happens when you use the options for geometry before importing the files? Now first glance, they're going to see only a few differences when it comes to this file that I imported without using any of the options. And the one in which I use the options that you have in a sketch. You're going to see the differences will be the materials as well as the faces. Because all the phases are going to be used phase and the phase in which you will have the material. Or in another words, a SketchUp will try to orient all the phases according to how the model will be graded within a SketchUp line spinalis sketch will try to minimize lines that you will need in order to create certain faces. Which means that you won't have them many lines, or in another words, that many unnecessary faces when you use the option that is called merge coplanar faces. And this is because the coplanar faces actually combines the faces that are within the same plane. Or in another words, it will combine the faces and now need to be independent. So when they sent me these options will be pretty useful in order to optimize a 3D model that you important SketchUp. 58. Importing 2D Graphics (Images): Now let's schedule. Since you're able to embark classroom etiquette, you're also going to be able to import references from other softwares. So this means that you will be able to import other files so you can use this reference, such as the images. However, the images are a little bit different because if you use the images, you are going to be able to see a few options that you can use before importing the file. However, in this case, I'm just going to focus on importing the file as an image. So throughout the course, I'm going to show you how you use textures and also how you use the match photo. Now, once you import the image, you are going to see where you can place the image anywhere when in the model, but also you can change the size of the image. Now once you place the image, the image will remain. Select them. So you will be able to also what they the image. Now. So quick signer, if you look at the other side of the images, you are going to see where the image is visible on both sides. However you're going to see. But on the other side, it will appear on the opposite direction. Or in another words, it will be oriented in a way in which you will be able to see the image like it was decided. Now if you use as a reference the images within a sketcher, you will need to resize the image based on the size that is being used and the reference. However, in order to avoid resizing the entire model, you will need to convert this images into our group, because by default the images are not actually a group. However, if you only select the image, you won't be able to use my group. So select the elements such as align. At the same time. Working around, he noted the greater group using the image. So this is actually different than importing a file for aggregate. However, even though this is not a group, you can actually explode the image. Now if you explode the image, but it will happen is that the image will become better into a texture. And this also means that you will be able to edit the phase in which the texture has been applied. So with this, you will be able to divide the image in order for you to grade different floor plans by international reference, this same image as well. You will be able to turn this into a group so you can resize it. I just simply using that tape measure to recommend you send an image might actually be pretty as well. However, an image in most cases will not allow you to see clearly the size of the elements within the image that you want to use as a reference. So you send any metrics of reference will, may use an accept values. A little bit more difficult. 59. Importing 3D Graphics (Collada): Now as well, there are other files that you can input to a sketcher, such as, for example, I can add a file. Or in another words, the files, they have, the extension. We ascend David a. As an apple. He has a network. So if you import these firms, we're going to see very much the same thing as importing a file when Erica. Now you may never use this file extension for file type. However, there are not many softwares that X4 or use the same file extension that you have in SketchUp, because this extension is created just for SketchUp. So you send the extension that you can see on this lesson will give you options when using other softwares besides ketchup. If you implement these files by using different options on the Import window, going to notice a few differences, and this is because of the options. So once again, you will see the options in order to merge couple of interfaces, but also you're able to validate the file, which only allows you to make sure that the file and actually be using SketchUp. So once you import a file by disabling the first option, you are going to see the nice ketchup is important, or the phases, even if they're not necessarily. This option is actually pretty useful in order to save resources one important new files. When the second option just simply allows you to make sure that you are able to use this file within a SketchUp. Everything else will remain pretty much the same. Now I'm going to use what options on this window to show what each of them will do to the file once it's important to SketchUp. And as you can see, the main difference, and as you can see, is the amount of lines or H is important. As well as a quick side note, you're going to see that the options that you have when importing the files are going to change depending on the type of file they're importing. Or in another words, the panel file extension. So as you can see that the four options are pretty useful, but they stop a file. So there is actually no need to change the options that you are using unless you want to add even more that fall within that sketcher based on, for example, the extensions. 60. Lock and Unlock Elements or Entities in SketchUp: Now when you work in a sketchbook, you are going to see that you can love tacos and the components that you create in a SketchUp, which we were pretty useful when you don't want to make any changes to our COO or component that you have in your model. So if you create elements within your model, you are going to see that if you go to the entity Info panel, it will have the option that is called low. However, it will be grayed out until the moment that you can burn the element or component. And if you're using a Mac, this panel will look like this. Now if I turn these elements into a curb or component, you're going to see that the option will be enabled. So once they use the lab, you won't be able to move, rotate, or in another words, you won't be able to make any changes to this group. So with this in mind, it will be able to avoid making any changes to a particular element with a new model under the moment that you choose to do so. In another words, under the moment they choose to unlock the group. Working on MRO, This option will make the groups and the components even more useful. While something for you to keep in mind is that if the CO or component, the eula is when an another group, you will be able to move the group in which you have the group or component that you love. You will need to keep this in mind when you send this option and the entity Info Panel. Now with this in mind, you can make groups and components as you normally would. Now, what you need to remain in the same place. And this means that you will be able to only select the file that you're logged in order to unlock the file as well, the assumption will be very useful if you create a large project because of the number of groups and components that you will need to gray and creating a large file. But also because enlarge files, you might need to use other files as reference. However, you send references also applies to a smaller files. And this is important because when you're using files from other softwares, you might delete these files unintentionally. So if you use files from arrogant or even images that you might want to use as a reference, you will be able to use this option in order to avoid erasing these elements are in order to avoid making any changes to the file they are using as a reference. So this will be actually pretty as well when you send references when the next ketchup, but also when you already have ropes or components, they're going to remain under precision while working on the rest of the model. So an example for this in architecture will be the grade of your project. 61. Exporting 3D Graphics: Now since you're able to import files grading, in other words, they're also going to be able to export this file to other softwares. So what is a mine? If you go to this menu and you hover over, it says Export. Now double-click where it says do the graphics. You will be able to export the file as an image, but also, you will have options that you can use in order to change a few properties of the image that you are going to gray. If you're using a Mac, this window will look like this. You're going to be able to change, for example, when they say so the image in order to use the resolution of the monitor, or in another words, the size of the screen that you're using in order to use size of your choosing. And as a quick side note, the size is going to be based on pixels. So you will need to get this in mind in case they are going to be using software such as Photoshop later on. Now, so quick signer on this pressurized SketchUp, you are going to see that you can use as Marseilles respirations further the experts, which means there are SketchUp used to cap the maximum experts size to 9,999 pixels in both w and the high. In order to prevent a SketchUp for facing. If you ask for the system for more memory and what's available. And now they do the exports are less restricted and more responsive to the working memory when a given device. So now you might enter any value on the image size fields. However, if a SketchUp thinks that the resulting image will exceed the available system memory at dialog will appear, letting you know that you will need to reduce the image size. Now with this in mind, I'm going to export a few images by changing these values on the options. So you can see the vessel where the different options that you have on the export options. So I'm going to start first with the size and then I'm going to continue with a line has scaled multiplier. So you can also see how this one is going to change the result. Every time I change the options and the options window, I will also open the image so you can see there. So in this lesson, now as well, among the options you are able to enable or disable the anti alias. Or in another words, you will be able to decide if you want to improve the quality of the lines that are used in the image, which is what the anti alias actually does. And last but not least, we're going to say that there is an option that you can use in order to remove the background from the image. Which means that if you enable transparent background, we're also going to be able to see that you can even remove the background. You're using SketchUp on the image. Otherwise exported. Disruptions will create different results. Now you can see once you open the image as well, Since you're able to export to the images and also to the files, or in another words, you will be able to export rice into the graphics. You're going to be able to export our 3D model bias into 3D graphics. Like Rey says 3D graphics, you are going to have this window in order to export the model based on these extensions, but also based on the options that you have for each of these extensions. Or in another words, based on the options that you have for any of the file tabs, including erica, including Erica. So when you use that, you're going to see, well the options are going to be based on aggregate. When another words are going to be based on what a SketchUp can export to Attica. And if you're using a Mac, it will look similar to this. This also means that you will need to keep in mind that when you export it actually lines. Because arguer uses lines to create drawings, which is something that applies to all the persons, Erica. And also, when you're exploring a 3D file, you are going to see the aggregate will recognize all the lines independently. So every single line that is great and in SketchUp is going to be recreated in Attica. And this is very important for you to know in case they're using hidden lines. Which also means that if you have elements and then other elements, you will need to use intersect faces before exporting the file to add again, because Erica will not create unnecessary faces for you. So in another words, advocate will only see the lines that are visible within the model. So what this means said, if you use the default options when it comes to export our file, we're going to see the faces and edges are pretty much the same because you need the EHS in order to create the faces. However, if you hide the edges or faces while leaving the edges, I sketch it will export the edges, then make a face. Even if the edges or faces are hitting away. As long as the edges and the phase gradient as a result of DHS, as long as they are now hitting at the same time. Now, all of these is also very important when you're exporting to get into the, so this will apply to export into Attica or you send to the graphics. However, when you explain it, by using the graphics, you will need to make sure that you're using I partly because the camera before exporting to R Again, because with this, you will be able to export elevations and floor plans are responding to hazard to the graphics has a few options that I haven't shown you use yet. So I'm going to show you this once a week over here other things that you can do, my grading and architecture model that actually applies to this options when exporting them to the graphic SketchUp. However, since urinary between four plucks, friend, aggregate to escape, you won't be able to export components or crops from this ketchup to add again. So you will need to keep in mind that all the lines will be exporting independently. So you might get a lot of unnecessary lines in here again, unless you're exporting multiple elements separated one from the other. Or in another words, inquiry, exploiting the roof, separated from the walls and so on. 62. The Outliner Panel: Now when you use a sketch or one of the most important things that you will need to know is how to organize the model. And this is because you will be able to create multiple elements in a retrograde a model. So this means that you have edges, faces, vertexes, probes, and components. And you will need to use this elements are entities depending on the model that you're grading. So if you need to see the element we are selecting, you can still use the entity Info Panel. And when it goes to the components, you can still use the Components panel in order to place, but also edit the components. However, on the trays you're going to find the panel that you will need to use in order to organize the model when you're using the curves and the components. And this panel is call the outliner. So in another words, a SketchUp focuses on the groves and the components. Because if you add in a shave the Ukrainian outside of a club or a component, you will have more difficulties if you want to edit the shape. So once they open the outliner, you are going to be able to use the airliner in order to differentiate between a shape outside of the groups and components and the groups and the components. So the icon for the groups is going to be different from the icon of the components. And as you can notice, every time that you select a group or I component is where it's going to be highlighted on the outliner. And this is because you can select the curves and the components in the outliner as well. Something for you to know is that the outliner also recognize when you have groups within other groups or when you have groups within components, or components within groups are willing other components, or in another words, is going to recognize the groups are components they are creating based on levels. And this is the hierarchy use on the airliner. So in another words, this is the hierarchy that you can find in the outliner. So with this, you will be able to see what other groups and components are placed on the model. And also suddenly for you to notice on the top of the hierarchy, you have the file. So you will have this error in order to lead you see this, I see what say you on a phone tree, but then the operating system. Now as well. Something for you to notice is that if you use the outliner, you're also going to be able to hide or unhide the grubs and the components as you normally will buy, you send the entity Info Panel. However, you are going to be able to see the actual group and component that you're hiding without having to select it. Which means you don't have to use the hidden objects in order to see once again that groups are components that you hide because you can simply hide in mice and the outliner. However, objects is pretty much use for groups and components. When healing geometry is for the shapes outside of the groups and the components, or in another words, the ones that you create, whether you think groups are components. So this will be pretty useful when you want to hi, hi, elements with other elements. Now because he didn't, geometry is actually use where the elements outside of the groups are the components. You will need to use my hearing objects in advocacy groups. And the components are this doesn't mean we won't be able to use the entity Info in order to high or high microbes and their components, as well as the elements outside of the groups. What are the components? So you will be able to do quite a lot when it comes to the groups and the components. However, you're going to see that you can do a lot more with the outliner because you're able to use the liner in order to rename the groups and the components. If you double press the mouse on top of the name of the group or the component. Now cents and the outliner, you have the name of the groups and the components. You're also going to see that you will be able to search for the groups are the components base in the search box. Now as a quick sign on the line and might be confusing at first because we will be talking how about groups and components at the same time. However, the outliner uses subgroups and the components very much as say y. So we are not going to see a real difference when you send the groups and the components by using the liner. So nowadays will become very useful when managing that groups and the components. Because you are going to be even be able to delete the groups and the components by just simply use and they have liner. Now with all this being said, the outliner is a resource that you can use when creating the models. Because you will be able to select Rename and also the side where you want them to be when it comes to the hierarchy at any point, while crate and the model. 63. Managing the Groups and Components with The Outliner: Now when you work with the outliner, you are going to see are also a few things that you will need to know how you send the outliner. Such as, for example, that you can use the outliner to do the same thing that you can do. What Paste in Place, meaning that when you use base in place, you will be able to pace growth and components on the same place, even if you place them outside of that group or components are inside of a group or component. So what this actually means is that you won't be able to press and drag the outliner in order to place this group work component within another group or component. So what this means is that you can do the same thing, whether groups and the components. Now as well, when using the outliner, you're going to see on a small difference between the groups and the components. And instead the groups are unique while the components are instances of the same component. So you're going to see that on the entity Info panel, you have the instance and the definition. So the definition is going to be the name of the component which when another software will be the name of the family, while the instance is going to be the name of a single instance of the same component. You will be able to see that on the airliner and the value, for instance, and the value for the definition are going to be visible. In other words, the values are next to each other, even if you can only change one of these values, bias and the airliner. And this also means that you are going to be able to say the name of the instance of the groups. However, in the case of the curve, the value for the instance is going to be used as the name of the group. So the naming is going to be the same, but at the same time, it's going to be a little bit different for other groups and their components. Now as well, Since you're able to change the name of the groups and the components, you're going to see that on the outliner, you are going to be able to decide if you want to change how you sorted the groups and the components. However, this is going to be a little bit limited because you won't be able to only select by name. So if you don't use my name, the aorta is going to be based on the placement of the groups and their components. So in another words, this is going to be based on when you place the groups for the components. As I mentioned before, you will be able to place other groups or components within other groups or components by just simply pressing and dragging. So you're going to be able to do this with multiple components, groups, or even both at the same time. So with this in mind, you're always going to be able to see that you are going to be able to create groups and components any way that you want and in any level that you want. But also, you will be able to also change how you visualize the groups and the components and the outliner by selecting, collapse or expand all, which will allow you to change the Outliner. Basically if you want to see only the top level of every group or component, or if you want to show all the levels at the same time. And a cyclic sign-on sending us while we will be able to see, is that the menu that you can open with a mouse after selecting a group or a component is going to be the same whether you have after you send them out in order to open this menu, after selecting a group or a component on the outliner. However, you are going to have a few additional options they have to do with the airliner as such. So with this in mind, you will be able to rename the group or the component myosin airliner. But also, as you can see, you will have a standard options. So just rename all the elements are entities and the airliner, as well as other ones such as entity Info. In order to open the entity Info panel. And just for the group or component, you select them. So what all this means? Say, you can keep using these options at any point, but also you're going to see how sketching is going to handle the different elements that you can import your model. So if I import, for example, this file there was greatly navigate. You are going to see that this is going to be considered a component, which is something that you can see. Basically I can do you have on the outliner, but also because if you add another instance of the same component, you are going to see that this is going to function the same way as any other component. Once again, you can keep using the outliner in order to delay the groups and components that you have on your model. Now as well, I'm going to import one or the image that I was using as a reference in order for you to see if this one is going to appear on the outliner. If I select the image after placing it on this model, you are going to notice that it's not going to appear as a group or as a component. However, if I turn this image into a group, after exploring the image, you are going to see that now it's going to appear as a group. So the outliner is actually pretty useful when it comes to grading your models because you are going to be able to select the groups and the components regardless of whether they are or whether you can see them or none. But also because you will be able to hide. Why do you want when I see at all times? In other words, it will have a lot of functions that you can use in order to organize the model. But honestly, in order to be a little bit more efficient when it comes to managing the resources that you have in order to create your model. 64. Architectural Model (Modeling based on Existing References and The Outliner Part 1): Now at least part of the course when I actually going to use are the images that are important to this model in order to recreate this model. Or in another words, I'm going to use the same interests as a reference may not have the greatest same model that you can see on the image. Now in order to make this a little bit easier and grind the greater few guidelines as a reference. But also you can see the values on the measurements. Now with this in mind, and you send the guidelines, they say way that I would normally use the grid. So with this in mind, if in your country or region that grades, I use a little bit differently. You are going to place the guidelines in a different position. Now in order to make this a little bit less confusing, I'm going to show you as much as possible. They imagined, which you can see the front of the model. Now in order to grade the guidelines, you can use that tape measure to recommend part of the protractor to Pergamon. Now this case I'm going to be using the tape measure to parliament. But also you are going to notice that sense the guidelines are still lines and going to be moving the guidelines based on the use that they are going to have on this exercise or model. Now once I created the guidelines, I'm going to turn them into a group because I'm going to copy some of the guidelines may not appear, use them on the other image. Now once again, you're going to see that if you start editing the groups and the components within the model, the images will disappear. However, in this case, you are going to notice that these are not actually images. And this is speakers once exploited the image, they became textures. So the other image, well, let's still be visible. And this is something that you will need to take into account if you're using images as references. So in this case, you might want to use the image you're using as a reference twice, if you're creating a model with the different levels or if you're following along with this exercise. So working with images and self-reference is not really hard, however, is a little bit tricky. Going back and forth between shaves, groves, and components when you're not used to it. So with this in mind and go into make sure that the guidelines are going to be a place for then the group I created for the guidelines, as well as a quick signer. The reference might be also confused on this case because there is a finished that exciting to the wall. So the first floor. So I'm going to give this in mind when adding the thickness of the walls. Now since this exercise is mostly based on the outliner, I'm going to be as in the outliner as much as possible in order to organize the elements within the model, but also in order to hide on high and also log the elements within the model. Now the first elements that are going to crave or the walls. So I'm going to create the walls of this model. And this is mainly because there is only an image of the front of this model. So everything else can be created based on your own style. Or in another words, it can be a model based on your InDesign. Now what this means, same, adequate in the main part of the walls, or in another words, the main structure of the walls and go into also crave the finish of the walls. So with this, you will be able to see why the thickness that you haven't, the reference is a little bit confusing. So I'm going to gray hyperbolic elements for the finished. My gray but gray there was high Santa sub reference the image. Awesome. I want to use as a reference the image in order to enter the walls. However, the height is going to be based on the exterior level, as well as the anterior floor for the second level. And also something as well. But you can see what I'm working with, images and self-reference. Instead, the image can be seen from both sides. So the image, but also something that our schedule is going to do instead is going to keep the image aligned to the orientation. Which means that when you look at it from the other side, the images going to appear on the episode direction, or in another words, in this case, is now going to go from right to left because instead is going to be left to right based on the placement of the image. 65. Architectural Model (Modeling based on Existing References and The Outliner Part 2): Up next and go into the interior walls of this model. So in order to do this and go integrator path, because I'm going to be using a felony now with this on mine and going to take into account also the floor that I can create for the first level of this model. Now you can do this a little bit differently. However, in this case, we'll be using the following me quite alone because I already have the guidelines. I can use the guidelines as a reference in order the greater profit of the walls, but also in other the grain that ban for the walls. Now this might be a little bit confusing because the guidelines are not based on the faces of the walls. Man just going through all the walls on the interior of the model, while also taking into account the Florida bracket add to this model. Now as well, since this is an exercise for the groups and the components and also going to be added in the walls based on the reference in order to address space for the doors of the model. So I'm going to be using once again the references in order to grade the space for the stores. So why is that? I finished my part of the model. I'm always going to be selecting the elements that are graded in order to use make group, or may component that by now in the case. Now as well, I'm also going to grade the holes that aren't going to use what are the windows? So I'm going to be adding holes to the walls of the model. Now as well, you're going to notice, and I also greatly, the main door of the model. Non-cyclic signer. Different ways in which you can do this. We are going to be able to use the solid tools, the intersections, but also you will be able to create faces that you can use in order to use the push and pull on the model. So what they sent mine, you're going to see that you will have different ways in order to edit the shapes once their use asset, group or component. So you can choose the one that is easier for you. However, in my case, the one thing that I like to do actually draw outside of the group or the component, the reference that I want to use. And then you simply use paste in place. And they say speakers based in place while intersect the phase where the phase that is created within the group or component. So in some cases, there's going to be a little bit easier. As a quick side note, if this was the front elevation of this model, it will be able to use the front view in order to get the references. My project and the guidelines are by just simply using that line to recommend. And as you can see, I'm trying to resemble as much as possible the image and using as a reference, or more specifically, the image of the front view of the model. And now sorry, I'm going to say this model. So again, you say in other lessons throughout this course. 66. The Tags Panel: Now next ketchup, you will be able to organize the model. You send the airliner, but also you will be able to organize the model by you syntax, which were previously cool layers. So with this in mind, you will be able to assign a layer that you already graded, so many elements that Ukraine, What grade and your model. And in order to create the layers are the tags you will need to use let tax panel. If you don't have the text panel able to use these SketchUp menu in order to enable the text panel under the filtrate. So with this being said, once I start using the tech panel, you're going to see that you already have a tag greater by default. If you're using a Mac, this panel, one log like this. But also you're going to notice that this time, just like the outliner and name, our color, among other things that you can change if you start creating additional tags. So I'm going to use this panel, or more specifically the second in order to add a tag. Now, once that you had attacked, you will be able to add the name of the tag. And as well, you will be able to rename the stack by double price and the mouse on top of the knee. And as a quick center, you're going to see that this tag is going to be graded with a different color. So once you create it at that, you are going to be able to use it right away. If you use the entity Info Panel, you will be able to assign the time to the elements on the monospace. In order to see this, I'm just going to hide the elements that are using this tag by clicking on the icon. You haven't the entity Info and on the aligner. So this means that you can hide the elements by also using that tax panel. You won't be able to hide that current layer. Now the current layer is the layer that has the pencil. So in order for you to change the current layer, you will need to select on this column of the tax panel. Now this might be a little bit confusing because there are no lines between the columns. However, this is a table like the ones that you can find a Word or Excel with lines they're not showing. Now, once you change the default layer, you are going to be able to hide by default layer there is greater when you start your model. Now what this means say, it will be able to apply the tax to all the elements for the new model. So this means that you can add a tag to the edges, but also for the faces. Because we are able to assign tags to the elements within the same shape, you will be able to assign the edges to another layer. So with this in mind, you can even hide the edges by using the tax without having to use any other method. So this is pretty convenient when cases in which you will need to work with the ages, separating from the faces. And because of this and going to rename the layers Mason they use that they have on this lesson. Now, cyclic system, if you have an element on the modal space, you are going to see that this element will inherit the tax to any element in the Ukraine based on the element that you had at the beginning. So if I use, for example, push and pull, where this phase, you are going to see that the remaining lines are going to inherit the same time. While the phases going to inherit my sun layer that was the same, the original phase. And this will apply to the faces because you can use the modified panel and the draw panel to upset by the existence faces on the elements are entities that you create within your model in order to cranial elements based on the faces. Now if you start using groups, you are going to see that this remains the same within the group. However, can also have its own tag. So what this means is that you can assign a tag to ICU Minnesota, the elements within the group. So they sent mine. You're going to notice when you start working with the groups, you are going to be able to hide the groups as well as the elements within the groups. And this is possible because you're working based on the tax. So when you're actually hiding or the elements within the tag. So even if many elements within a group have a different tag, the tag will recognize they want to hide the group because the elements are within the group and you are going too high, we enter our group. So once again, even if you add different tags to the elements within the group, you are going to hide the indirect Gu if you hide it back. Now with this being said, you will also be able to change the line type that you're using within a specific tag. And this only applies to the edges to your grade within the model as well, you're going to notice, but there is also a few things that you can do while working with the texts, such as, for example, changing the color of the representation that is used for the tax. Now these colors will allow you to differentiate between the different tasks that you have on the text panel. Now with this being said, you can also use texture image in case you have an image that you want to use instead of the color, which is sending a gimmick and very useful later on. Nasa click Sign in the corner of the tag on the tax panel will not affect the color of the lines. If you're using a Mac, it will look similar to this. Now with this in mind, you're still going to have basic functionality when adding it back, which means less thans, you're able to add it back. You're also going to be able to delete the tag by insulin mouse or my specifically by using this menu as well, you won't be able to use are like, Oh, in order to sell in or the tax and the tax panel as well, you're going to have an option that is also used in order to select all. However, it's going to be used in order to select all the elements. Are you sitting on a specific deck? So once they use this for that day, you are going to be able to select all the elements that you have in your model, as long as they're using the tag that you selected. 67. The Tag Folder: Now as well, since you will be able to create multiple tasks by using the text panel as SketchUp also has an option in order to add folders just for the text. Thank right at that folder is pretty easy because you only have to use the second 100 tax panel that resembles a folder. So you will be able to use this in case that you have too many texts or in cases in which you're using different tags for different purposes. In order to place attack within a folder, you will be able to press and drag that back to the folder. So once they either this year where we would have seen another tag is now in the folder, which is the same thing that you can do by pressing and dragging that tag outside of the folder. We are going to be able to do this in order to place the tax within a folder. And if you create multiple folders, you will be able to see, you're going to be able to use different folders or different tags in order to use them in different ways. Now I'm just going to finish adding more folders on the text panel in order to show you a few other things that you can do with these photos. Now, quick center, if you wanted to play the tag within any specific folder, you just need to select the folder and then create a tag so that attack will be graded within the folder. However, sending us for you to know is that you can add the default tag within a folder. And once you start organizing the texts when you send the folders, you're also going to see that the folders have also the same icon that you can find, one of them on our info and on the airliner in order to hide the elements. So we're working on the model. You can have individual tag or several tasks at the same time by using the folder. And as we remember, if you assign the tax two groups and components, these groups and components will be affected by this option regardless of the tax that you're using within the groups and the components. And every time you select the elements on the model, you will be able to change that tag by essentially entity Info Panel. So this means that the entity Info panel will be very useful when creating your models also because of the tax. So with all this being said, I'm just going to show you once again, how can you use the folders from part of the individual tax by creating a few other elements within this model. So as you might have noticed, that tax will be pretty useful while working your models. But also the folders will add additional functionality. So the tax that you can create one word in SketchUp. Once again, you won't be able to let tag, that is set a screen. And you can actually use this as a way in order to store your models. Which means that you can start your models by essentially default tag. And then you simply assign the tax that you want to use on the elements that you created for your model. Now you can assign the tax anyway, the E1, our SketchUp still uses the tags of the groups and the components to define the appearance and be civility of the elements within the groups and components. So you will need to remember that even if you change the tax of the elements within the groups and the components, you're not going to change the appearance of neither the groups are the components. Now as well as you might have noticed, there are a few similarities between the airliner and the text panel, which means that you will be able to collapse and also expand the content of the folders. While at the same time, you can use a like oh. And also you will be able to then leave that doc folder. Once the user lead the folder, we're going to see that layer will remain there. However, if you delete a layer that has elements within it, I sketch it will open a window that will allow you to assign the elements are entities to another tag. But also it will allow you to delete the entities. So when they send mind, you are going to be able to see where you can assign the elements to a different layer. And you still able to use that tag as you normally would. But also something for you to notice is that if you delete the elements within a tag or the elements will be the leader. However, the elements that are not within the tag will remain on the model even if they're within a group or component. So with all this being said, you will be able to easily create tags, but also you will be able to add text to photos, the gradient, and as a quick sino, the folders, unlike the levels and the outliner, which means that the folders Kevin be used where that other folders. So you can place a folder within a folder as well. You will be able to use the search that you haven't attacks as to use that search on the airliner, which will allow you to search for the tax based on their names. They haven't attacks. So the functionality of the tax is actually pretty simple. However, it might be confusing at first makers. You might not be sure on how you want to organize the tax, on how you want to organize the elements within the text. So with all this means say let tags are still use in a little hobby of mine managing your model. And you will be able to serve the text by using the header of this column. Or in another words, by clicking where it says name. 68. The Tag Tool: Now as well, and the effects panel, there is an option that is called furlough or biotech. And if you use this color, you're going to see that all the phases are going to change based on the color layer using the tag. So this means they will be able to differentiate between the elements that you have in your model. Specifically, you will be able to proceed among the different tasks that you assign to the elements thanks to deception hour, we're going to see that if we assign a tag where I grew up, then the color is going to change based on the tag be assigned to the group or the component. So this means then interpret hurricane representation of the groups and the components is more important than the elements between the groups and the components. That the elements within the groups and the components. So this means that if you want to perceive the tax of different phases within the same shape, you will need to avoid using make, group, or MainComponent with those shapes. And that's why the reset to recommend that you have in the text panel that is used in order to add tags that the different elements are entities that you can create a new model. So in order to make this easier to appreciate, I'm going to create a few elements within this model as well. These elements will represent columns as well as walls on this model marrow. So once the equator, these elements, I'm going to create a phase that is going to represent the floor. We're going to grade these elements without worrying so much about the measurements that they could actually have within an architectural model or in another words. And it will actually have if they were parallel construction. But also going to change the name of the layers based on those elements. In this angle's going to go to the text panel interviews that d2, which is the two recommend when it's right next to color by tag. Another tag tool is the one that lets you apply tags by clicking entities on the modal window or motor area. So it will be pretty easy. Apply an individual tag. If you select the tag and the text panel, can you send a text to? Once they use this tool, you will be able to see where you're going to assign the layer to an object based on the one that is selected on the tax panel as well. You're also going to see that you can actually use Control Enter to apply the same tag to all the instances within the model. So this means that you can apply the same tag to all the instances of the same component, whether the model, but also you can apply this tag to all the shapes they happened in the model. This means that you will be able to add a tag to elements outside of the groups and the components that are subtly elements within the groups and the components as well. If you shift on the keyboard or leaves and these two recommend, you are going to be able to see where you can apply the same tag to all the elements. They're using a different tag at the same time. This means they are going to be able to use this in order to replace the default tag once you start adding the tax to the elements as well, you're going to see that there is a difference between using this to recommend to our curve or component or to use in it within the groups and their components. So if you use one of the groups, you will be able to see, but you can change the type we are using on the group. However, the color will remain the same. And this is because the elements within the group are using a different tack. You can always use the same argument in order to change the tag that you're using for the elements within the groups, which also means that you can do the same thing with the components. Now these options will be pretty useful and there will be very similar to the options that you're going to find on another to Pergamon, also going to cover throughout the course. Now so quick Center, you can use the text tool and elements that you've already selected. So this means that if you select the elements before you send a tech tool, you can simply click on this elements in order to apply the tag when you select it. And once again, if we shift on the keyboard, you will be able to replace the attack on all the elements that are used in the same tag based on attack when you select it on the text panel. And as well, color by tag will be actually pretty useful if you wanted to create our presentation of the different elements that you add into your model without using the materials point. In other words, you're getting great representations for the structure or further different parts of an assembly without having to use the materials. And the case when you're in high school, you can actually use this in order to create different representations, in order to present new models to others. And if you're good with a sketch or you can even use this. I know that the great mass based on the different color representations that you can use if you are going to export this model, I see images, which also means that you can also use this with softwares such as Photoshop, as well as you can combine this with keeping for removing the background. Where did the urine using them, which supports such as Photoshop or not. And as well well, listen these two argument, you are going to see me. You don't have to select the one I use before you send this to recommend, because you can actually use R on the keyboard in order to sample the tag of one of the elements that you have in the model. So you can use the same tag on other elements. So this will allow you to use it back to base and another tag may already apply this to other men is actually very versatile when it comes to applying Tags, the elements now Ukraine, while creating a model as well. And you're going to see that there is a difference. Hey, don't use entities to recommend what the groups and the components, and you send it outside of the groups and their components. Or in another words, you send this to recommend within the elements that you can find in the outliner and the elements that you are now going to be able to find on the airliner. So if you use the tags and the airliner, you are going to be able to organize your model in a way in which you will be able to give you a model to somebody else. In order to continue the model, you will be able to present your model a little bit more efficiently. And last but not least, we're going to see that there are a few options that you can use in order to purge that tax they are not using. If you are graded texts that you won't be using anymore for whatever reason, you can click on the dose in order to purchase that tax, they're not being used. So with all this being said, you will be able to organize the elements within your model in different ways. However, one of the most efficient ones, I is going to be the text summary. Select, all instances, will select for component instances and we have the modeling contexts. They share a definition with a selection. Once the length or width tag, we'll select O n entries and the acting modeling contexts. They share any tag with the pre-selection. But also you will be able to see that you will have functions that will allow you to sample at tag. There is overlap line on an entity and tomorrow. While also select tag, we'll select entities and the model then share back with a pre-selection in the text panel. And this is the one that you can use, my mouse, nasa quick sign-up. You can use this option with a text, but also with a tag, photos. 69. Architectural Model (Modeling based on Existing References and The Tags Part 1): Now for this part of the course, format specifically on this exercise and going to be using once again, the model that I continue while also using the airliner. So this means that I'm going to continue recreate in this model by using a server and France, this image and these textures, but focusing on the use of the tax. So I'm going to create unnecessary tags, but also the necessary folders that are going to use for this model. Now the same time, you can always visualize the elements are entities based on the Colorado layers. So you will be able to use this in order to make sure they are working on a specific elements. Now with this in mind, I'm also going to organize the tax base and they use it they are going to have on this model. So this means that aren't going to work in different areas of the model, then it wasn't grading or recreating before. Now I'm going to start working on the second level of this model. Or in another words, on the second floor of this in mind, I'm going to create once again, the world's n elements, such as the windows. But also I'm going to be using the text in order to organize the elements based on the different levels, as well as then going to be using components instead of groups. The second level or second floor. Because this way I can work on the second level independently while it's still great in the model. Now so quick sino, You don't actually have to use this because when you use the tags, you will be able to hide the elements within the text at any point. So what is being said, you're able to use the outliner in order to keep working and organizing the model. But also, we are going to be able to use the tags in order to do the same thing. What Morgan this model. So what this means is that you can actually keep using both of them at the same time, depending on which way it's more convenient for you. Now, even though I can use the texts with different elements within this model, I will also use this component in order to add the second floor, while using the first floor as a reference for the position of the component. Images as references for the modeling. That's what it is for other lesson and go into gray level for this model. Now going to create the roof based on the image that I'm using as a reference. However, since I don't have the actual value for this low, I'm going to create an SLO based on the reference. So what this means same and going to be using the tax as the primary way in order to organize the model. I'm going to make sure that the elements are using the tag that I want them to use. More specifically, I'm going to make sure that this obeys also on the levels. So with all this being said, you're going to see that difference between the tax and the components once you start using them. Now with this in mind, if you have any issues grading the roofs, and the only thing that you need to keep in mind is this Florida you want to use, this lovely are going to be using is higher than this one. You can create these slopes away from the model. So you can use this length as a reference in edit to edit the roof. Now this loves will depend in your country or region. However, in most cases, it's going to be based on the rise and the segment. A segment of one meter rise will represent the percentage of the slope. If you use one meter for this segment, then the rise of 0.15 meters or greater slope of freedom per cent. So there is going to be a relationship between the rise and the segment. As well as a quick side note, you might have noticed that every time that I organized attacks and use semi-colons attacks. And this is because it's easier to appreciate the tax when you're using the color. And I will use these tags in order to organize the elements on the model, while also taking into account the type of elements that they represent on this model. And I'm just going to finish organized under layers before continuing with the model. 70. Architectural Model (Modeling based on Existing References and The Tags Part 2): Now continuing with the model, I'm going to start adding other elements. And then there's a coupler or my specifically going to be adding the Windows product second floor. So I'm just going to use a reference in order to determine where I'm going to place this windows becomes a very great I component for the windows within this model. Now with this being said, since you can create different alternatives for the different elements of the model, you can also make changes at any point. Now I'm going to edit the roof in order to change the slope because I want to show you how you can edit a roof statistics. But also because you can even create more than one roof within the same model. So you can have different designs for my specifically. So you can have different design options on this model or any model A12 grade in SketchUp. Now once that I finished the roof, I'm going to add a few other elements I'm going to use for this model. So I'm going to finish my finished in this area of the model. So once again, you're going to see that are organizing the elements within the outliner, but also an organism the elements by using the tax. So this model is pretty useful in order for you to see how organized and the project. And actually pretty useful when working in models, especially once you start presenting new model based on, for example, layer. But also because it can create different alternatives that you can use, bias and attacks, which is sand. And they're also going to show you throughout the course. Now this element is going to be based on the reference. However, what is not visible, it's going to be based on the overall design of the model. Now as a quick side note, remember that when you use push and pull, you can use R on the keyboard in editor for a limit and they use the push and pull my economic system reference. However, if there is not a phase where it stops you from using the push and pull. Let's catch up. Well, perceive the use of the R key on the keyboard as symbolic. Lastly, I'm going to say this model because I'm going to continue using it for other lessons within this course. 71. The Design Options: Now, working with the texts and the components is always going to be a little bit different. So organized into tags might be a little bit more difficult because you will have a lot of components and groups if you are creating a large model. But also you will have to keep in mind if you are going to create multiple copies of the same component. So in this model, you might need to create different copies of the same components within a model for our project. Now when you use components, you can also use options such as making money because you can have different components and also curves. They can be used in order to organize multiple components or even other groups. And as well, you can also use groups in order to organize multiple components or even other groups. So if you do something like this, you will need to make sure that you are organized in the model. In a way there will be more cohesive view. So I can organize the first level and the second level independently by using the groups and the components, which means that I can make sure that the naming and also the models for work gardening. But also this means that if you have the gray different options, when it goes to the same model, you're not going to be able to use components because you won't be able to create references, signs out other the components. So what this means is the working with the components will be pretty useful when you want to repeat several elements with a new model multiple times or when you want to use, let's say model multiple times, that banana model that you're grading. Now while doing this, we are also going to see that I'm going to use options for the components such as Meg you need in order to avoid making changes to the components on the other model as well. So I think for you then nowadays is there on the outliner is pretty easy to have a lot of groups and components we're working in tomorrow. Or in another words, you will end up having more girls and components when tax on a model. So that's one of the differences between groups or components and attacks. Now as well, if you notice the airliner in the text panel are pretty similar when it comes to the main functionality, which means that they organize the elements, but also they will allow you to select the elements by using these panels. So both of these panels are fairly similar, but they have basic differences when it comes to the users. So depending on the way that you are going to work in your model, these differences will be per se, a lot more. One of the cases in which they use or the airliner and the text panel will be very different as wine crate and the same options. Because gradient descent options, it's not something that you can do by using tools or commands that are specific for that. So in order for you to create the same options, you will actually need to use the text panel as well as the outliner. However, you will be using them a little bit differently if you want to create them just by using the airliner or by only using the groups and the components, whether tox panel. And in order to appreciate this a little bit better, you can use color by layer in order to differentiate between the different tags where you create for your model. A quick side note, I going to change this slow myosin references. And these references are based on how much the roof. So every meter, so this is low, it's going to be 20 per cent, or in another words, is going to go out 20 cm, the first meter. Now with this value and just going to use that distance between waterproof it starts and where the slope ends. So the two values are going to be 3.75 m and 6 m respectively. So with this, you will be able to create different ropes for one of these models. But also you will be able to create a different design for certain areas of the model. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to add this model based on a change, but I'm going to add to this model, or in another words, I'm going to add a little bit less second level in order to wear a balcony on the second level. Now I'm going to use the push and pull to whatever shapes are already greater than make a space for the balcony. Well, I'm going to make sure that they are not unnecessarily lines on the model because they can be exported if you're using other softwares, such as aggregate. So avoiding unnecessary segments can save you a little bit of time later on. Also going to change this window into a small curving wall with a space for Glassdoor. So I'm going to use Menu need, but also I'm going to gray in the glass door has a component. I've probably isn't going to organize the components and the groups by using the airliner and the facts panel. So with this in mind, you're going to notice that you're gonna still control the elements by using the layers regardless of the design option that is being used. But also you're going to assign the layers that are being used for the different design options that you might want to create the panel on the model. So this is one of the advantage that you won't be able to create very easily by just simply using the components. Additionally, the entity Info Panel can also be used to make sure that all the basic information of the groups and the components is exactly what you need. Especially because the entity Info panel allows you to change the tags are layers as well as the instance and the definition. However, something for you to notice is that you send the outliner and the tax panel will actually provide you a lot more functionality once you finish your model, because you will be able to present new models a little bit easier. Also added a new model later on will become a lot easier thanks to the tax. As a quick side note, remember that you can always use color or by tag in order to differentiate among all the different tags you're using. What editing your model, especially when you haven't added the materials. So with all this being said, you can create different design options so you can present them right away to somebody else. 72. Sections Overview: Now this part of the course, I'm going to show you how you use the sections. Because as many softwares that are using construction and engineer SketchUp also can create sections. So this lesson is an overview of the sections. These sections are pretty much use in order to model our project depending on what you want to see. In a SketchUp, you actually have to recommend various using abilities. And these two are demanding sexually found on October, whereas graded just what other sections. So in a sketch or less section can actually be greater in any of the excess by U Santa Barbara friends with faces of any other shapes that you have in your model. But also you can use the axis of the model. So this means that you can log, that you can lock these two are determined by using the red, green, and blue axis. So with this in mind, you can use the keyword not only in order to lock this section on any of the x's, but also in order to lock this, to put a man on the faces. Which is what happens when the representation of these two men happier, same color, purple. And once they either psi, where you're going to place this section, you'll need to use the mouse in order to validate the placement of section. And once they have done this, you are going to have this window which will allow you to change the name and the symbol, this section, as well as an option in order to avoid this window. Now you can use this option because you're going to actually change the name of the symbol by using the mono info panel once you select the intersection point, another words, they shave animal null space. A quick sketch of the z-score section plane, as well as on there for you to know is that this shape is actually composed of different shapes. Hi, In another words, this is something that actually exists within the model. So because of this, you can hide this section. Now you can use the mono info panel in order to hide this section. However, if you use like an in geometry, you won't be able to see this section. So what this means is that in order to display this section, you will need to select the area that is pink by this section. Now nowadays is pretty standard when it comes to the options that you have in SketchUp painter go high and unhide elements. Now so quick sino, You can also enter the model as you normally would. And this is something that applies regardless of how you use this section. So you're able to use the tools that you have enough SketchUp to multiple sections. And what this means is that if you rotate this section on any of the x's, you will still be able to weather this section as you normally would. Have a reason where you can rotate this section is because this representation search is still an element within the model. So you can even use references in order to do this. A quick sign changes that you do on the position for rotation of this section will change the model in real time while also making your own changes, which means that you can still select the elements in the model. So the sections are pretty useful. Enter intrusive on this pressure in SketchUp. Now with all this means, say, you can even delete this section by just simply select this element or representation of this section within the model. Now cyclic sign. Every time we create a new section, you are going to see later SketchUp is going to change the naming based on the previous section that was created even after the leading this section. Now as well, a few things for you to know about this section, such as e.g. the fact that by default, this section is going to change the appearance or representation of the shapes that occur by using this section. And this is done in order to resemble in the representation of a floor plan or section we are presenting to others. Or in another words, in order to create layouts or sheets. Now with this in mind, once you select a section, you're going to have a few options you can use in order to change how you use this section or how you view this section. So you can use e.g. reverse in a retrovirus reorientation of this section, we are going to be able to see that the reset check where it says arctic cod and this one allows you to change, but also see which section is the active one, as well as an assumption that is called hyaline view. With the Align View, you are going to be able to align the camera or the section, which is the same thing that you can do by you send up these two parts. And this is something that you can also use by changing the camera to parallel projection. This will be very useful when creating the floor blends for your models. And as well, there's even another option, but it's useful when selecting the elements related to this section, which is the one that is called Inverse selection. Now this option is fairly standard. However, these are useful when selecting the elements that are being covered by this section as well. You can use this menu if you want to erase this section. So almost every option of this section can be found in this menu as well. You can also hide this section by using this menu, which is the same thing as using the entity Info Panel. Now there are few things that are a little bit more specific, such as e.g. the Gracian, if I go based on what is caught by this section. So if you use great group from a slice, you will be able to create a group that is only going to use my lines that are created by the intersection of the model and the representation of this section, which is what is called the slice. That's a big center. Once a greater this group, you can edit the model without changing the group. So this group does not update in real time. Or in another words, this group doesn't have a direct connection with this section, which means that you can edit this section or even the later session with them making changes to the group. Now as a quick side note, you can also convert this group into AI component. Now since this section where we mainly use in a reliquary layouts or floor plans. You will also see that you will have a few options in order to change how you visualize the section within the model. So with this in mind, you can remove this section field of this section, as well as removing the effect of this section within the model. But also you can hide a representation or a shape that is used in order to represent a section within the model. Now you can enable or disable the assumptions at any point. So this means that you can play a little bit with how you're going to display this section within the model. As I mentioned before, you can use parallel projection in order to use this sections before exporting to add again. So with this in mind, you can go back and forth between the cameras that you want to use. But also, you will be able to create multiple representations of the same shapes or projects by adding multiple sections. Now cyclic center, the representation of this section are what is calling a sketch of a section plane is going to grow as big as the model. Which means that by default, section plane covers the entire model. Now this is something that is going to change depending on how you place the section which is Sunday. They're also going to show you within this lessons. And this is very important because as the model for projects becomes more complex, you might need to have more section planes within the model as well. Something for you to know is that by default, you're only able to visualize one other sections at a time. So this means that when you have multiple sections, were able to double-click this section that you want to use. But then the model, which is the same thing that you can do by using the menu for Europa with the mouse after selecting one of these sections as well. It's also very important for you to know that these sections will appear on the airliner. So the outliner becomes very important not only because of the groups and the components that you can create, but also because you can manage the sections by using the outliner. Which means that from the outliner, you will be able to change the base information of this section, such as the name and the symbol. For awesome, you won't be able to determine if you want to hide from high these sections, as well as the turbine, which section we want to use by 0s and double-click on the airliner. There are different ways in order to select which section is going to be the active one. And additionally, you can create a section by using the sketch of menu. So with this in mind, you are going to notice that every time you add a new section, this section is also going to appear on the airliner. So this section is as a whole, will be actually pretty useful. We're working your projects, especially in architecture and engineering. 73. Using Sections on a Project: Now next sketch of the sections will be pretty useful because we are going to be able to grade the actual sections that you will be using for the different models that you create will use SketchUp. So in models such as this one, so this sections will be more apparent, especially once we get to the layers, because on the layouts, you will be able to use sections like this one. However, there is a few things that you will need to keep in mind. One of them is that this section is going to extend to the entire model at the same time. So this means that this section, we'll add up all the elements within the model at the same time as well. These sections can be used to create different representations. Just my balloon, this section that is already greater, which also means that you can even add more sections. But also where you can only use one section at a time. However, this only applies to the level in which you have this section. When in other words, you can only have one section active panel level on the outliner. So if you look at the outliner, you are going to see if this section is actually because of the icon where you have right next to the name. But also because how the model is represented as well. If you use the airliner or the skater menu, you're going to be able to place a section within that group work upon and further isn't going to be using paste in place. And once that I use paste in place, you're going to see that now the extent of this section is going to be based on the group or component in which this section is placed. But also you're going to see, and now I can actually use both sections at the same time. So this means that I can have two sections active because they're on different levels from the outliner. So with this in mind, you can control not only what you want to see, what the sections, but also how many sections you use at the same time. Now cyclic sign-on, you can use these ketchup menu in order to high or high. Let's section cuts, which is the same thing that you can do, various intersections toolbar as well. You can also use these catering menu. We use the tools are options that you have under section toolbar, which means that this is also an alternative to the menu that you can open by using the mouse after selecting this section of the model. Now as well, if you want to use this in other softwares are in layer, whatever is there I can give you has to do with the camera. Because if you use parallel projection, you are going to be able to see that you will be able to export it abuse in a way that you can use it in other softwares for floor plans, elevations, sections, and so on. Once again, you can create a group based on the intersection between the model and the section, which is called gray cool from a slice, which is going to allow you to greater group based on their lines. I created this section. So you can export it into other softwares such as that. Okay? So with this in mind, the parallel projection is going to be pretty useful when working with these sections. And those sections will allow you to get necessarily abused or u1 in order to use this ketchup, which supports such as hurricanes or even with other softwares such as Photoshop. But more importantly, you are going to be able to use holidays with a layer. So we call this means same as section is actually pretty useful when grading elements or mechanical components. Which also means that in architecture or constructor in general, these sections are going to be very useful, but also this sections are going to have even other uses that are going to be covered throughout the course. 74. Using the Section Slice: Now in this lesson, I'm going to cover once again how you can export to a software such as SketchUp power. In this case, I'm going to apply the concept of this section. So what this means is that once that you have a section within your model, you can use these SketchUp menu in order to export this section slice. So with this in mind, you will be able to export to a software such as set again by just simply using this section slice. So in cases in which one to explore everything else within the model. Or in another words, when you went to export everything that is being caused by this section separated from the rest of the model. So these will be mainly used when you want to organize the model in other softwares. And this is because this ketchup lesson actually grade the representation that is used in Attica, which means that what is Pinker have a separate layer. So what I'm trying to say is that organizing your model will make things a lot easier when it comes to the fact that you can export. Hollywood is pink and so on, on separate files. You can organize these files before combining them into a single file. Or in another words, you can have a single file in which we are going to bring furniture, walls, stairs, and so on. After you've already graded layers, but also after already optimized individual powers in another software such as sciatica. So be a little bit more clean and also a little bit more productive. Sunday important for you to know. Is there a SketchUp Users by May options? Because a software such as surrogate will recognize all the lines within the model, or in another words, all the lines with our groups and components. So because of this, something like the polyline becomes very useful. Because the polylines our way to improve how this happens in a software like SketchUp. And also you're going to see on this window and standard options, or in another words, options that you can find when exporting to another type of file. So because it is the options that you can see on this window will actually take into account the scale next section lines, but also the camera. Now these options are fairly standard when it comes to this type of file. You're going to see that the options are not as important as the use of the camera. So with this in mind, and go into export files with different options. When it comes to the camera there is use the grader lines of the drawing. But also I'm going to input an infant files exporting in order for you to see the difference. Because these options are going to take into account the camera. If you want to export to Africa in a way in which you can use the export for creating the floor plans. Now you will be using the option that is for through section has in parentheses orthographic. This is because this one will explore this section like you were using the parallel projection. With this in mind, I'm going to import the results so you can see the difference. But also you are going to see, we are now going to be able to get the same result by using the other option that you have in this window, which is called Section projection. And this is because this section protection actually allows you to export this section based on the view. Or in another words, why the camera is seeing a quick sign on. The files are imported, will not show infant they are wrap up this section, but also they will not show if they are at the same height of this section, which is going to apply to elements that you can create within the model as well. You're going to see how this file is going to look relative to the model. Also going to show you what happens when you play around with a few of these options, even if you're using parallel projection. So while still using parallel projection, I'm going to export this view. You can see how far left projection will allow you to explore the beer without using once again, the number is go through section. Now these options might not seem very important when working on your projects. However, they won't be of any instances in which you might want to have a 3D view, ex-boyfriend and sketcher. So with this in mind, you will be able to export and 3D view. They can be opening that again. So because of this, you can use this options when exporting race in this file extension. Or in another words, when you export it to a software such as surrogate. So as you can see through section and parallel projection, the pretty much the same thing. Why did the same thing can be said while also using the option that is called Section projection. So sexual protection and perspective, as well as two points, perspective are going to distort the results based on the position of the camera. 75. The Materials: Now in the next lessons, I'm going to cover one of the most important things that you can do with a sketch, which is the materials. Now the materials in SketchUp will function like in any other softwares, which means that they are textures. And you can actually apply to the phases of the different elements that you can write in a sketcher. However, in this ketchup, they will have their own functionality because SketchUp focuses a lot more on the faces than other softwares. So you will be able to apply different materials to all the phases of the elements that you have in the model. But also you will be able to apply different materials to both sides of the faces. Which means that you can have a material on the front face and another one on the back face. Or the functionality or the materials will not be so important for you if you're applying materials asset texture ID, or in other words, as a picture ID that you can use in other softwares such as aluminum. Which means that if you're using a schedule in order to grade the models and then grade the renders in another software. You're not going to be using many of the options that you have with the materials. However, the materials within a sketcher actually very useful 1% in your model, but also when preparing your model further supports. Additionally, I want to try to show you as much as possible, not only the different changes that you can do that also have these changes will affect the faces on the model. So I'm going to use the model info panel as well as the basic shapes before you send the course project. And a cyclic sign of the material that is used once we opened, I sketch a steady for material. So by T for sketcher offers you a material. They already can be used on the front face and on the back face. Nice Paulina sketcher. You're going to see that there is a panel just for the materials. This panel has an API on the before tray. You can go to this kitchen menu in order to enable the material spinal tray that you're using. Now this panel is the one that you will be using the moles in order to find an edit the materials. So with this in mind, you will be able to search among all the different carpets are already installed with the SketchUp. So you will have different carpets they will be able to use in order to find translucent materials for landscape. But also you are able to find materials for the asphalt or the concrete. So with this in mind, you will be able to select and assign the material that you want to use. The one other phases of the elements. Nasa quick center, you're going to automatically be using an argument that is called Paint bucket. So the paint bucket is a two argument they use in order to assign the different materials. So the face is the Yorker, write down the model. So if you want to apply a different material, GIS need to select a different material before selecting a face. Now so once the already applied on material, you are going to be able to also apply the material by using this window. And this is because this window will have all the materials that have been applied to any other phases that you have in the model. Now as many of the other changes that you can do with a new model, you can use Control C in order to undo the changes. Was that the materials are no longer apply to the phases. You are going to see that they won't show this window. So you will have two basic ways in order to apply materials to the faces. One of them is the paint bucket and the other one is the entity Info Panel. However, we enter the info panel will only have available and materials theory apply on the model. So the entertaining for is more useful when you are making sure that the faces are using the material that you want as well, regardless of the changes theta to the materials, you can still use Control C out of me undo in case you change your mind, or in case you want to make corrections. And the model parameters panel has another tool that you can use when assigning materials, and this one is the sample material. Now this tool allows you to sample the material may already applied to any of the phases in your model. So you can actually use it, has the current material porous media use. When I sign here material to another phase. Now with all this means, say, you are able to apply different materials through different phases. But also you're going to be able to apply multiple materials to multiple phases. So this means that you can select more than one phase in order to apply material wherever you're using the paint bucket or the entity Info Panel. So this will be pretty useful when you need to apply a material to multiple phases when in the morals are within the groups and components as well. Since this is a panel, you will also have a standard options that you can use. Heyne negative change a few things within this panel. So just for example, changing how you view the materials. Which means that you can select the size or the total nodes. But also if you want to use a list, posts are having an option that is called refresh. In case you're adding the materials are in case in which you need to update the changes, turn to one of the materials. And as well, another standard option that you will have, this panel is used for the second, which will allow you to show only the materials that you have in the model. But as well, this area will also fungi so many browser because you will be able to go back and forth between the different folders that you have a little library. But also you will be able to use a trap them in other fields are pretty much the same. So as you can see, the materials at first glance, abrasive to use and very standard because they fulfill the same function that they have in other supports mean that these materials are used in order to represent different elements. But you want to use on your models are projects. While at the same time they can be used as a material ID if you don't want to use the remaining functions, having a SketchUp 76. Assigning Materials: Now next sketcher, we will have different ways in order to assign the material. So in this lesson, I'm going to show you the different ways in which you can select the elements to which you're going to assign a material and starting first with the model info. Now the model is pretty much based on the selection tool, which means that you can select the faces to which you want to assign a material as you normally would. So you can select just one other faces, are multiple faces with the selection tool. And then just apply the material myosin More Info window or more specifically my opening, they choose Window. And also since you are using the selection tool, you will be able to select Enter objects at the same time by using the mouse. The more info is pretty easy to use when it comes to assigning materials. But also you're going to see that I sketched, actually use that tool in order to assign materials. And this one is called the paint bucket. Once you select a material, you won't be able to assign materials, do any face that you want by using the paint bucket has the selection tool, which also means they are able to select multiple phases on the model in order to assign the material. So this means that you can use the understanding that you have of the selection tool when assigning materials. That's a great sign. The paint bucket tool you can find on the toolbars. You can use the paint bucket directly from the toolbar in order to assign the material that is set on the Materials panel. Regardless of the way in which you do this, you're always going to be able to change the material price and they choose pane window or by you simply select under default color on the material spinal. So with this in mind, you can change the default material anyway, the E1, which also means that you're always going to be able to assign the material, that is said as the current material and the material spinal. And as well as with many of the other tools, you can use Control C in order to undo the changes with the materials. This is also going to undo the material that is set of scurrying under Materials panel. Well, something important for you to know How about the paint bucket. The paint bucket actually has options that you can use in order to assign materials, the elements, but you have immortal. Now the assumptions are going to depend on the model that you're working in, but also on where you need to assign the materials. Because these options might seem very similar first, until you start working on your models. If he is, for example, the first option, which is called Paint all matching. You are going to see that you will be able to assign the current material to all the faces they're using, but they found material. So what this means is that this option will assign the material to all the phases are using the same material. However, Sunday for you to notice as well. But this tool is that these two panes are the phases are using the same material even if those faces are within groups and components. Now this is an option that you can use by using shape from the keyboard while using the paint bucket. However, if you use this option within the groups and the components, you are going to see that this option will affect the phases within the groups and the components, but not the faces outside of the groups and the components. Even if they're using the same material that is assigned to the phases within the groups or the components. Now the next option is very similar to this one, even though AC you some different cases. So if you use the keyword while using the paint bucket, you will be able to use the option that is called, Hey, all connected. Now paint all connected will be actually pretty similar. However, it's only going to paint all the faces that are connected, which means that applies the material to one shape at a time. However, if you use this option with that group work component, you are going through say the reception will apply the material for the entire group or component. Now this doesn't actually have to do with the assumption because this is a default feature of the paint bucket, which means that when you assign them a favor by component, the paint bucket by default or less, sign the material to the group or the component based under the full face. Now they use either the full face and sketcher is something that I going to go a little bit more on the next lesson in order to avoid confusions as well, I'm going to go on the next lesson. Why am I happier or some info when you select a group or a component? But it's not the one that is assigned to the phases within the groups and the components. Some of this lesson only focusing on the different options that you have in order to select the faces, the wage you went to assign a material. Better also, how the paint bucket selects the different elements that you have in the model. Nonetheless, option is very similar to paint, whole connected speakers, actually painting and entire object. So most other shapes they are going to grade are going to be based on connected faces. So both of these options are not going to have a major three friends until you start creating different shapes on your model. So even if I edit this shapes quite a lot, you are going to see that both of them can be used pretty much the same way. They are now going to be too many cases in which you're going to be able to see the difference between both of these options. Now, there are going to be cases in which you're going to see the paint all connected when you're looking for. However, if this is the case, you can always use Control C and then try with bank all on the same object. So personally, I always use paint all connected or pain or matching hormones. In another cases, I actually needed to use paint all on the same object. Now this is an option that you can use, but essentially if encountering the keyboard, however, something for you to know about paint all on the same object has the OH, on the same object actually uses the boundary of the shape as a reference. Which means when it's going to select everything that is connected within the imaginary boundary. But you will have burn a shape into a group y component. So this may seem confusing until you remember that the scale to recommend actually does the same thing. So I sketch it will use that imaginary boundary in order to define what it will be within the same object. If you convert it into a crowbar component. And then it's going to paint all the phases they are connected within that object. Which is the reason why paint all connected and paint all on the same object works almost the same way. So while you have phase is connected one way or the other, you're not going to see a difference. Same conclusion. Once you have faces, they're connected together throughout the entire object or element, you are not going to see any difference. So with all this, Be safe, all these options will be very useful when selecting the faces to which you want to assign a material, your model. More importantly, this will make the selection of multiple phases a lot easier regardless of the model or project that you're working on. Especially when it comes to the paint bucket 77. The Default Material: Now continuing on with the materials, if you assignment errors within a SketchUp, you are going to notice that the default material is applied to all the elements. Wednesday I grade it. But also that this material is the only one in which you can assign any material. Which means that if the great elements outside of the groups and the components, and you will be able to assign the material as you normally would if you create a group or a component. And then you assign a material, the material is going to be assigned only to the phases. There you send a different material, even though this material is going to be applied to the crops and the components, but not the phases within the groups and the components. Now this might be confusing because you have a material that you can see on the groups and the components and other info when you select the groups and the components. But another phase is where the groups and the components sketcher asexually intention. And this is because you might want to assign a material to some faces at all times and at the other ones. Science, you can create new faces on the components. You will need to keep in mind which material is going to be using the component and which one on the face estimate the component. So this will add more versatility the materials to you and in a sketching for this also means that you will need to keep in mind how you assign the materials. Because this will actually remove the benefit of working with components, which means the restroom assign a material to order components at the same time, you will be assigning materials to each component independently. However, this can be also beneficial if you are actually considering doing this anyway. Which means that you can have a components such as this one. And then just simply saying, I went to only a specific material to all these components. And then I just want to assign a different material, photoreceptor copies. So this is something very useful on something like pillows, but not in components that are used, for example, columns. So depending on the element that you're creating, you're actually going to be doing something differently. So when they send my basement be actually very useful in certain components, but not in all of them as well. You also have to keep in mind how we work with the elements. They're using the materials. Because if you scale the element to which you have assigned material, we're also going to be distorting the material. Which means that if the element that you are scaling group where I component that material is going to stretch along with the phases and the element. So you will need to keep this in mind because it's not the same thing as scaling an element within the curves are the components and scaling and element outside of the groups and their components. So when you use the scale tool argument, you will need to consider if you want to scale the group or the component within the group or the component outside of the group and the component. And as well as the signer, if you explode the element material is now going to be a stretch anymore. But also you're going to notice that the material is going to be assigned to the face and stereotype default material. So this everything is for you to keep in mind when working with the materials before you start grading the groups and the components. Because in some cases, you might see a distortion in the materials after you already graded all the groups and the components. And you might not know where that distortion constraint. So if anything like that has happened to you, this is the reason why. Hi now, so this is something that is going to affect the materials that are created by you. Which means that even if you create your material, this will remain the same or are they suddenly you can see when you scale an image be important for your model. So in this ketchup, you will always have to take into account the default phase that you're using and the groups and the components. There are also other material that has been assigned to the elements within the groups and the components. Which also means that you will need to keep in mind what are the materials that have been assigned to the phases within the groups and the components. While at the same time, you will need to keep in mind how you added the groups and the components before I sign in the materials 78. Editing the Materials: Now for this lesson, I want to show you how you can edit the material that you already assigned. So with this in mind and go into greater face within this model, do we check INS side limit theorem? But more importantly, in order to show you the different ways in order to enter the material, depending a little bit on how you assign the material. Sophia, saying the material might use and the motor info, you will be able to collect great sincerity. He noted to add the material that you just assign. And once they either this, you're going to have the added material window. Now, the added material window, you will be able to do very basic things, such as, for example, changing the name of the material. But also other ones might even allow you to add transparency to a material as well. This is a window. Now you can open when Ed event or the materials. So you can see the ones that you change. For example, the name, they choose Paint Window when updating my theory on the model. But as well, there is another way in which you can edit the materials. And this one will provide the same options that you have in this window. So instead of just using the model info, you're also going to be able to use the materials panel and other materials panel. We are going to see, let's say material that is assigned to the face. But also you are going to be able to see very seasonally now re-assign by essentially are the materials window. So reflection that you have is going to be available by clicking where it says add it after silica material. So what they send mine, you're going to notice that you will be able to change other properties, such as, for example, the color of the material. But more importantly, you will be able to see the different ways in which the color of the material is interpreted by a SketchUp. So this means that if you have a specific color in mind that you may already have used before in a software such as Photoshop, you will be able to add the same values by using Photoshop. Hey, in order to get the same color as well, you can actually click on this second in order to enter the changes that you have done before closing this window. So this means that once you close this window, that changes will apply to the material. So you will need to get this in mind when you added the material. Because if you apply the changes by clicking on Okay, you are going to notice that now the changes are going to be undone. Based on the last changes that you have done. Nasa quick center, you can actually undo these changes are also using control C. So this means that if you validate or change that you don't like, you can actually use Control C in order to undo it as well. Now as well, something for you to know is that when it comes to the materials, eye color is used as a way to paint the texture. Which means that a color that actually changed the texture. It just sounds a little bit of shading or saturation. The other color based on the color that you selected. But also there is another option that you're going to find them, this window, which will actually affect the texture. And this one is the opacity. If you change the opacity, you are going to see that you will be adding transparency to this material. So this means we are going to be able to gray windows by using opacity. And that also there are going to be some materials. They are going to find out the library. They will already have transparency because they are used in order to represent water or glass. So this will be very useful when creating components for your model, such as Windows, hard-coded thing whilst, as well as center. Since you're able to do pretty much the same thing by using the material browser. You can also undo it changes by clicking on this icon. However, the materials panel will allow sort of options to be visible because they have to do with the materials panel. And this means that you will have an option in order to match the color of an object in the model Roseanne option in order to match the colors on screen. So one of them will allow you to change the material based on another face within the model, or in another words, based on another material, while the other one will allow you to do the same thing. But based on this screen, which is centered, they will be able to use in case they are using another software, such as Photoshop. Or more specifically, an image you have in Photoshop. Because as we remember, we are able to reduce the size of the windows you have open, or in case they're using two monitors or more at the same time. Now once again, you can always undo the changes based on the most recent change that you have done at any point. Now with all this being said, sanctuary able to do pretty much the same thing by using both of these windows. You are going to notice that everything is pretty much the same except for those options that have to do with the materials panel. And specifically, what all this means said, you will be able to always change the material any point based on the info window. But also you will be able to change materials based on the materials panel. Which also means that you can use all the same options that you have on the edit materials when they're on this panel. You can change, for example, the opacity of the materials. One of the panels on the tray will always have options that you cannot find anywhere else. And this is because they are used to help you out at the model, as well as changing the appearance of the model. Now with all this being said, I'm just going to finish adding an additional phase to the model. So you can actually see what other options that you have while working with the materials. Or in another words, I'm going to use these two faces as a way to compare materials, but also to show you how to grade material's, run an existing one. So I'm just going to assign the materials to the face before Edit and this shapes as well as the materials. So with this being said, I'm going to show you that there is a way for you to create materials power. So you send the materials panel. So if you select a material and then you click where it says gray material, you're going to see that you're able to create a material based on the material that you selected before open in this window, several days and mine, you can actually avoid making changes to one of the materials that you have in the library. But also, this is pretty much the same thing as editorial material by creating a copy at the same time. So the added material window and the great material window are going to function pretty much the same, which is centered the against C because they share the same options. And also because once that you added nine new material, you also have this same options. So the most important thing about grading and the material is that you won't be anything the original material. So all of these means said, creating materials and other materials and in SketchUp is actually pretty easy. 79. Using Images on the Materials: Now in this lesson, I'm going to continue with the options that you have in order to edit the materials. However, in this case, I'm going to show you how you can replace the existing texture with an image. But also how you can even make changes to the texture by essentially are the materials window. So with this in mind and going through up and once again, the added material window. In order to use the option browse for material image file, which will open yet another window in order to select the image file or you want to look. Now with this in mind, may match file will need to be comparable or the type of files that you can load as images, which means that you can use, for example, JPEG. And once you click on open, you are going to see that that texture has changed. But also you're going to see that that texture has been all over their face. However, even if you load the image, you can also remove the option in order to use the image, which will only leave you the main color of the image, or in another words, the main shape of the image. So with this in mind, you can use symmetries in order to extract and a specific color. Now I'm going to load the image once again in order to show you how you can edit the image based on the face they are using. Weight, in other words, how you can change the size of the image in order to adjust it to the face. I'm just going to change the values for the height and the width, which by default are actually love when it comes to the ratio between the height and the width. Or in another words, they are based on the original size of the image. Additionally, the size of the image is why you might want to adjust to a surface. Because you might want to add Lean metrics as a banner, picture or a painting on your model. While changing these values, you are also going to see that even if the image is suggested, the phase, the position might not be exactly what you're looking for. So with this in mind, you will have two ways in order to deal with this. One of them is by adjusting the phase based on the position of the image. But also by tournament the phase into a group where I component. And this is because the groups and the components have their own origin. While the face is, they are not being used within a group or a component, actually based on the origin of the model space. So the texture is that you apply to the monospace are actually Tau based on the origin of the model, even if you're not able to see this arrow times. Now this isn't a lady is going to be more apparent on the next lessons of the course because they are going to be a few options and the materials which will allow you to see the actual tiling of the material on the model space. And with this in mind, they're also going to be able to say that this is going to apply to the components. So you're able to gray components based on the phases to which you apply the materials in order for you to use the benefits of the components. Which also means that you can scale the components that are having to worry about changing what is within the component. So the benefit of the components remains the same regardless of the materials that you're using. Now with this makes sense since you are able to add images, you're also able to add shading for the materials. So this means they are able to replace that texture with another texture. But also you will be able to add color to the texture once they click where it says calories. So once you click where it says colorize, you will be able to change the color like you normally would, which means that the textures that you have by default with SketchUp already have enabled by default option that is called colorize. Because by default you're able to tolerate the textures, myosin, the colors on this part of the added material window. So with this in mind, you're able to enable or disable this option at any point while he is in this window. I additionally, if you do not like the rest, so you can reset the color in order to train other one by using the color wheel or any of the other options that you have, which is something that you can do by your standard chapter and that you have next to where it says picker. Since you're able to add a file, also going to be able to identify that you're using. Now this is going to be a little bit more tricky because obviously option that is called the texture image in external editor, where you will be opening is the default editor that is assigned to a SketchUp. Which means that you will be opening the editor that is assigned by default on this ketchup preferences. So with this in mind, if you open this ketchup preferences, you will be able to choose the editor that you want to use. Now this will actually open a browser in order for you to search for the software, but you want to open every time they use this option. So if you have Photoshop, you will need to search for the executable, or in another words, for the application that is installed on your system. So you will need to find the folder and then load for the application file. So with this in mind, you will be able to introduce a matrix for the materials. But also you will have ways in order to edit the images once they use them on the model. While at the same time, you can keep editing the images, whether suffer, you're choosing 80. Creating Collections and Editing the Material Library: Now let's sketch you when you work in the materials, you will also have weight. We know that the gray and save your materials. So because of these, SketchUp also has a way in order to add a second panel just to select the materials. Or in another words, you can open another select with under Materials panel. They sent mine. And it will be able to do either their materials while also select the material so you want to add so the elements within your model. But more importantly, it will be able to open the folders and carpus you might already graded in order to change when you're going to place the materials that you've graded. However Sunday for you to keep in mind, is that material steel grade when organic sketchy, I'm not going to be saying on the library where you having a SketchUp. So in order to do this, you actually need to say the material. Now there are different ways in order for you to do this. So I'm going to start by using open or create a collection. Now, this one works pretty much the same way as with the components. So what this means that in this case, you open the folder corresponding to the materials instead of the components. And then you can create a folder in which you can save your materials. Now the way that you create that folder is like you normally would create a folder on your computer. Once the greater the folder here needs to click where it says Select Folder. And then you will have a folder greater by yourself within the library. As long as you're using the secondary panel, they're also going to be able to add the materials to the new carpet by pressing and dragging the material. So you will be able to use materials on different models or projects as well. The more materials you have your model, the more information we will need to be storage on your file. So editing your models can eventually fill a slower. So you can use options like Bertrand use in order to remove the materials that you're using. So with this in mind, you can actually make sure you're not using the material in any way, shape, or form by removing any element or reference to the material. So in order to illustrate this a little bit better, I'm going to remove any element that makes reference to this material. So I can remove this material from this model. So I'm going to make sure that this material has been removed from the model. So you can see where you can still have access to the material even though it's no longer in the model. Or in another words, he will say that the material is still on the same Carpet even after using fortune use our when you use these are also going to see very few open. A new file in the folder is now going to appear. I want the folders that you have in the library. But regardless of the way in which you search for the carpet, it's not going to appear. And this is because this is a collection. May you need to open every file. So this means that you need to use once again, the option that is called open or gray collection in order to use this folder within the libraries. So you will need to take this into account when deciding how to manage the materials on your models or projects. And because of this, sketch up as an option that allows you to make this folder available within our models. And this one is called at collection to Favorites. So if you use an election to trade routes, you will be able to use this folder on our numerals are projects, which is going to be possible because now this folder is going to appear among the favorites and the recently used. Since you're able to add folders to the favorites, you are going to be able to remove the folders from the favorites are just simply using the option of remote selection from favorites. And once they either is, you're going to have this window that will allow you to select the folder that you want to remove from the favorites. That also is going to show you the location of the folder. Now, ones that I use this option, you're going to see that the folder is still there, but it's not on the favorites. So this means that once there I open a new file, this folder is now going to be loaded by default. And the location of the folder on the computer is actually useful because you can actually create the folders that anyone with a new computer in order to use at any point without having to open a SketchUp. Additionally, I'm going to leave the location of this carpet on the screen. However, you will need to restore it SketchUp in order to apply this change because sketcher already loaded the material library. So restarting SketchUp also means there is going to load, once again, the material library Now cyclohexane, you need to make sure that they are able to visualize any hidden files in any Carpet, Just to make sure that you will be able to find the carpet that you're looking for. Now once again, this is pretty much the same thing that you can do with the components. So if you already know how to do this with the components, you will know how to do this with the materials. However, with the materials is very important for you to know how to do this because the materials are a little bit different from the components and the sense that you will be actually using them. How most of your files? Nasa quick signer, some other components. They are already loaded with the SketchUp. They're not actually open the carpet which are located. Or in another words, we want to allow you to use the icon right next to the location. So in this case, I'm just going to look for a component that actually allows me to use this icon right next to the location of the material. Now cyclic sign-on various. Another way in order for you to open the folder where you can find the materials while let's get to me. So open. This one is by using the Components panel, because many of the components leaving IP model allows you to open a SketchUp folder in which you have the components and materials. So we will only need to load the right component in order to open the folder. Now this issue, so worker, because you can actually do the same thing once they even know where sketcher actually installs or the libraries, our science, you can do this at all times and in different ways. You are going to have more versatile in it, not only when searching within the library, but also in creating the folders that you are going to be using. So you can create folders for easily. However, creating a folder directly on your PC is going to be their friend to use an open gray collection. And this is because open-end gray collection is an option that allows you to create a folder that can be used in on your models as long as you open the collection. So this means that when you create a folder directly on your PC, that folder is going to be available regardless of the model that you're using. So you only need to keep in mind this difference because one will allow you to have a permanent access to a folder that you created. While the other one will ask you to open the folder, the unique while working on your models. How are you going to still use our collection to favorites in order to get the folder available throughout your projects. Since I've already used remote connection from favorites, list folder will not be available throughout the models. So what this also means is the remote collection from favorites is now going to apply to the folder that are grading on the BBC. And in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to use once again, open or gray collection on this model. Once this carpet or collection is load on the model, I'm going to use remote collection from favorites. So once I select there, you're going to see this window with no information. And this is because we can now remove it from the computer. Nasa quick sign-up base. Another collection that you can actually remove from favorites. And this one is the one that is called a model. And this is because in model, the materials are currently being used in the model. And in order to illustrate this a little bit better, I'm just going to open a new file in order to show you once again that the folder that I just grading is available while the other one is not. So this is very important for you to keep in mind because we won't be able to say your materials. And also greater folders in which you want to save those materials 81. Aditional options or ways to Edit the Materials: Now this lesson I'm going to show you few other options that you've had when you were reading materials, because the materials also has a few options that you can use once you select the materials under Materials panel and then use open the money that you can open by using the mouse. And this is because the sketcher uses textures as materials, while at the same time. While at the same time, it's still going to take into account that coordinates the ear using SketchUp point. In other words, it's going to use the origin of the model, but also the origin of the groups and the components. So as you remember, if we use groups and components, that material is going to be based on the origin of the group and the component instead of the origin within the model. Now this is now going to seem important at first. However, the materials are also used within surfaces. So this means that instead of grading different materials, you can simply assign a material to a surface and then just convert the surface into a group or component before moving it within the model. Or just simply create the group and the component by using a surface and then applying the material. So with this in mind, you won't need to worry about creating different versions of the same material at all times. However, B12, you can simply open this menu in order to click make unique texture, which will allow you to create a unique texture based on the material that you selected. And once they do this, you're also going to see the rough sketcher as science and name for the new material using the word cupping, followed by a number after the same name of the material that was used in editor create a new material. And in SketchUp Thursdays, let you know that this material is a copy and also how many copies have you graded? However, this material is completely independent from the original, which also means that you will be able to delete the materials at any point. Now, holidays might not seem important at first because you might think that the materials are only useful when they are assigned to a face. However, there are few options they have to do with the materials, such as, for example, the area. So when you select the area, you're going to see the area occupied by the material. But also you will be able to select multiple phases now using the same material. So this means that you can select faces based on the material. And also you will have another way in order to save a material within the SketchUp library or anything, whatever you want on your PC. So if you use a pass, you will be able to determine where you went to save the texture. So this means that you won't have to save the texture within this ketchup library if you wanted. Which also means that you can save a backup of your materials in case you any style is getchar. Because when you install it, SketchUp as SketchUp is also going to delete this ketchup library. So creating a pack of your library is going to be also useful. I, once again, I'm going to leave the location of this carpet on screen. However, remember that you wouldn't need the restore SketchUp, may not have to update no matter your library. Now with this being said, there is another option, this menu that will allow you to do something very similar, except for the fact that it's going to save this material as an image. And this is because you can actually get in and create textures within a SketchUp. Send the next lessons. I'm going to show you how you can do this. And since the materials that you're using are based on textures or in another words, images. Also going to be able to write it very much by you send your default editor. So with this in mind, we can edit the image as you normally would, might just simply using the editor we assign. And because of this, how you edit the image while the panelists or whatever you're using. So the result will not actually depend on a SketchUp. However, once you finish, just need to save the image before importantly new image to in SketchUp. Now cyclic sign-on, there is more than one way in order for you to do this. If you select the texture, you are also going to be able to open another menu and then you simply call where it says texture. So you can click where it says at the texture image. However, once that you had an image, you will need to import the measures that picture. So with this in mind, you're going to find that there is even another option in order for you to do this. So if I use this picture menu and we'll be able to click Reset simple. And then I just need to click resist texture in this window before select an image. So this is the option that you use if you want to use images to recreate an object in a SketchUp. So when you see models and look like photos is most likely because somebody apply images to the phases of a model. Once that I've done this and we'll be able to use the paint bucket in order to apply this immaterial. So with this in mind, you will be able to add any material that you can edit as you normally would, which means that you can change the name and also the appearance of the material. Now if you use this sketch or menu in order three important textures as images, you're going to see that the result is pretty much the same. However, they say much is going to be more like a coup in which you use the option that is called locked. So if you get at it, the scale of the image and such, but you won't be able to change the material. It has been assigned to this group because you don't actually have access to that texture within the group. So in another words, SketchUp actually creates a phase in which is already assigned that texture. And in order to illustrate this a little bit better, I'm going to use contrasting in order to show you what happens when you input the image instead of using a texture. So I'm going to use once again, this gets your menu in order to import the image as I normally would. However, in this case, I'm going to explode the image. So you can see what happens. With this in mind. You are going to notice that after exploring the image, schedule allows you to interact with the phase in which the image has been applied as a texture. So because this sketch is going to create a material race and the image that was important. So all of these is actually pretty useful when you're working with the materials because it's going to add a little bit more than three options that you have met all when adding materials, but also when working with your model, thanks to options like this select and the area. Which means that the material Center schedule are not only textures that you can apply to the faces 82. Open GL on SketchUp: Now this lesson, I'm going to show you how you can improve either the appearance of the model or the performance of the models within a sketch it. So for today, Sandra is going to create a basic shape. And then I go into open the sketch of preferences. And on these ketchup preferences, you have a section that is called OpenGL, somebody's intersection. You will be able to change the quality of the anti alias for my specifically the multi-sample and TLS thing by using disrupt them. And with this, you will be able to improve the MPLS for the edges of the shapes they are using on the model. But also within here, you will be able to see that there are a few options actually based on the performance that you have an escalator by pushing the hardware. So this means that you will have used by spit back in order to push the GPU so you can keep the performance as a quake center. The way to improve performance is by decreasing the multi-sample and ideas listen because this effect all the edges of the model. So the larger the model, the model of a man and you will be better also, you will have another option that will impact the performance, which is called Use Maximum texture size. Now, use maximum texture size might be a little bit confusing because there is no way for you to see this right away or less than you have images that have a large resolution. This means that you can add images to your model. And this will allow a SketchUp to keep that texture size of the image. So this is going to push even more than whatever you're using based on the textures that you're using. So holidays is going to be based on the performance of your graphics card point. In other words, for GPU. So because I didn't sketch it allows you to see the details of your GPU, or more specifically, the OpenGL details of your GPU. If you're going to be using SketchUp as your primary trading modelling software, you will need to use a GPU that has a great performance focused on OpenGL. Because as you can see, this one is the one that is used by SketchUp as well on the model info window, you're also going to have a section, Let us go rendering, which is the one that is going to allow you to select, select the option that is called use. And the earliest textures, which will allow you to prove even more their parents or their textures while you are using the mean SketchUp. So this means that all of these will affect the textures that are important to sketch it more than anything else. So please keep this in mind when you're using textures in a sketchbook. Because in some cases, you might feel like the performance of a SketchUp is not what you are expecting. Many of those cases you will have to do with the textures that you're using. And also how much we're pushing the MPLS based on the GPU that you're using. 83. Assigning an Image to the Tags: Now this lesson is going to be more like a pointless, because as you might remember, there isn't an option that you have in the tax panel that will allow you to change the color that you're using on the attack. However, the window that you actually use in order to change that color is actually there, the material window. So wait up to this point in order to show you how you can add an image instead of eye color to the layer because I didn't cover the materials until now. Now the general idea is actually quite simple. So after you select on the second, on the Edit Material window, you will be able to select the image that you want to use. Now you will select an image from a theorem. And after assigning the material to that tag or layer, just need to assign that to the phase or phases when your model in which you want to display this image. Now with this in mind, this is not actually grading and material. Or in another words, this is not actually everything a material. So what I mean is that when you do this, you won't be able to see the image until you use the option called color by TPACK. So this option is actually more useful once a year. Grading specific representation for your layers are based on your layers. So quick center, you are going to notice that it doesn't matter which time the current pack. Or in another words, this image will display as long as you're using color by tag. Suddenly only issue that you might encounter is the size or scale of the image. However, something as well they are going to notice is that you're also going to be able to use the same options that you have when it comes to the fact that you can use groups for components in order for you to use the origin of the groups and the components has the origin of this texture. Which also means that you will be able to even a scale like groups and the components as you normally would. Additionally, you can add a tag ropes and the components in case they have specific dimensions in mind. So everything is going to be pretty much the same as using a texture on her face because the tying of the texture is still going to be based on the origin of the model space, on the origin of the groups and their components. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the different ways in which you are going to scale an object, such as for example, and that they do recommend. So you will have different ways in order to scale the phase two, which you have a sign-up texture through the text. But more importantly, sensory going to be using the same window that you can use in order to edit the materials. Or in another words, you will be using the Edit material window. Then you're also going to be able to change the other properties that you can edit on the materials the same way that you normally do when editing a material that is now used in the text. So with this in mind, you can even use the entity Info panel as you normally would put a tax in order to add certain materials. Now you might not find this very useful. We're working in your projects. However, in some cases, you might want to present your project and a little bit differently. Point. In other words, you can use type eye color as a way in order to turn everything into monochrome, certain things that you might want to use. So just a picture of portrait for the elements within your model is that you want to accentuate. May want to accentuate 84. Editing the Position of the Texture: Now next sketch here. There is a way for you to edit the materials within a SketchUp, which means that you won't have to use another software in order to whatever textures before you send them in a SketchUp. Which also means that you won't have to assign the texture to our surface. And then greater group y-component. This means available once you open this menu by using the mouse. So once the ICO where it says texture, we're going to be able to select the option that is called position. And once they use this option, you're going to find four controls at each end of the texture. Now this word controls what actually allow you to change things on the texture. So the first one that I'm using will allow you to change the position. So when you use the right one, you will be able to change the position of that texture based on the origin with the texture. And the origin of detector is always going to be on the bottom left of the texture. Now as far as something for you to notice is that this options for controls will recognize this naps, which means that you can use as a reference, these snaps that you already have in the model. As a quick side note, these controls in SketchUp are called paints. And these beans are controls need to be trained to a position of your choosing. So what this means is depending on where you try to control, you might be using the control or you will change just the size of the texture within the face. And the other control they are going to have will allow you to scale the image. So this blue Control S scales the image depending on the direction that you're using. And once again, this control will recognize this naps. The next control does something very similar. However, this one will distort the image. So once they use this ventral, you are going to be able to see, but you're actually changing the image based on the position of this control. This control will move independently from the other controls. So this one's a little bit different from the blue, because the blue one has scales the image based on the direction that you're using, but it doesn't really distort the image while the yellow one actually does this. And the last control, or in another words, the green one allows you to rotate the image around the origin of the image. Or in another words, based on the position of the right control. So with this in mind, we're going to say to these controls or modify the image pretty easily. While at the same time you're going to notice that they only modify the material heard of texture within the phase in which the material has been assigned. So you're not actually editing that texture or image as you will have to do it in other software. However, you can control the risk. So in a way, we won't be able to do a silicone and external software, especially because of these maps. Now with this in mind, you can always convert this phase into a group. So you can take advantage of the benefits of using groups and components, such as, for example, the freedom to move that grew up in a component without worrying about this story in the material within the groups and the components. So this means that you have a face and you model where the measurements that you want to use, you're going to be able to import an image, has a texture, and then adjust the texture based on their face that you're using. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to weather the image where the new model by their chest and the positions where the controls are by just simply adjusting the phase after creating a group. And either way, you're going to get an element where the dimensions of your choosing. But also if you don't like the result, you are going to see that you're going to have the option in order to reset the position of the image on the face. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to restore the image back to default Nasa quick sign up when you're working with images is also very important for you to get an idea of the actual size of the image or the barrel is the proportion of the image relative to the phases in which are going to be using this texture. So you can use the line tool or command in order to do this. Now as well, when you're editing these images, you won't have the user controls the way they are served by default. So what this means is that there is another way in order for you to use these controls. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to use Control C, which is the same thing as using Reset position. However, once that I use the Option proposition, once again, I'm going to be using shape from the keyboard in order to use the option allows you to toggle the fixed pins. So once they either this, you will be able to freely move the pains or in another words, the controls anywhere to be one. And once again, they're going to be able to use these labs, or in another words, the references that you have on the model. Hello. So if you don't want to, you can use contour on the keyboard to move these controls are pains without using these maps. Now what this means say the assumptions are pretty useful in order to do different things for the model. And one of them is resizing the texture by some values that you will need to use in the reward. Or in another words, based on actual values that you will need to use. So what this means is that you can use these controls as well as the materials panel in order to get at the material in a way in which the elements that are represented by the texture will have more precision. And if he is Materials panel parameter to the aspect ratio is locked by default size of the texture. So if you want to change this, you will need to click on the icon right next to the dimensions of the texture. And a cyclic signer, memorable. You can undo the changes that you have done by selecting the option that is called reset position. So this also means that you're gonna create references, portable pictures in other gorgeous that texture based on what you want to do. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to whatever texture in different ways. We chose some means that you won't be able to distort the picture. As well as you can see, actually need to edit the phase in order to enter the position that I mentioned. So that texture based on a reference where you can find our great on your model. And remember that you can use Control C in order to undo the changes. Additionally, you can change the position of the texture regardless of the x's. So this means that the controls are not going to change regardless of the orientation of the face. Now, this might not seem very useful right away. However, this will be very useful when you want a gray, something very specific point. In other words, you can actually use the phases in another way, different effects or appearances for the elements. So with this in mind, I'm going to do something very simple. Why isn't this material? So in this case, what I'm going to create a few faces that will allow me to grade the effect of a scale by just simply using the faces. When another words, I don't actually need to use 3D elements in order to provide a sense of distance within the sediments. So with this in mind, they're going to be able to add materials, but also the elements there uses these materials in order to get different results. So in order to perceive the elements a little bit differently. Now, a quick Center, you can also use parallel projection in case you use entry, the elements that you want to perceive as to the elements. How wrong this case. I'm just going to leave this example like it is, because I'm just using this in order to give you an idea of different things that you can do with NSK. That might be interesting, representation or 1% in your models. However, the generic, the air can actually allow you to find the find ways in which you can edit the texture within a SketchUp or in another words, without using external editors for the textures where you send the model. So what this means, I'm just going to finish grading on this model in order to add the sensation of them to this view. So I'm just trying to grade this in a way that looks like a straight for the wall of a building. Now it's a great sign up if you don't want to use this now, you can use contrast the keyword in order to avoid snapping 85. Creating Terrains: Minus ketchup, you will find that there are different ways in order to grade for representative terrain. But more specifically, you will find different ways in order to create surfaces. And this is because his catcher uses lines to gray faces and the top surfaces. While the top surfaces uses lines to represent the changes under the rain, such as the height interpose. Now that we're in has within a sketcher silence specific toolbar you can use in order to create the reins. And this one is called a sandbox. So you're going to be able to find the sandbox toolbar the same way that you can find the other 2% sketcher. But also you can find the tools that you have on the toolbar, on the sketch are many. And regardless of the way in which you find these tools, are going to be able to do pretty much the same thing, which is great at the rain. Now when you use this toolbar, you will have to bear it different ways in a retrograde rains. One of them is by using existing elements as reference, and the other one is from scratch. So you will have a total risk score right after rain from a set of selected cages. And the other one that is called crater terrain mesh from scratch using a baseline grid. And what it makes these two methods, peripheral friend is the one of them allows you to greater the rain by sin references that you already have. While the other one will allow you to upgrade after rain based on elements that you will be able to write on the model. So the first method, specifically great circle, that is composed of pages like Carnegie, DHS, the word use as reference in a little gray faces. And automatically this edges are going to be hitting away by sketcher. So if we wanted to see the hidden geometry, you can simply use hidden geometry on the sketch menu in order to see all the geometry the worst grade it by using this option. So with this method, you can create the terrains or use an existing edges. Has a great sign. The camera toolbar will help you visualize the model, including the top surface. Which means that if the top surface for terrain is very large, you can use some extent to see the entire model at the same time. Now as well, if you use the second option, you will be able to gray out the rain from scratch. However, once they use this to recommend, you're going to see where you have a value that is called greater spacing on the measurements. So this means that a schedule is going to create a grid based on these values. Which will also mean that you will be able to use the keyword in order to change the value of the greater spacing. So if you type a different value, we are going to see where this value is going to change on the user interface. But also the ones they, you start grading the grid. Spacing is going to be based on the value that you selected. Now once I created this grid and also want to show you that this group is also composed of edges, mass, while something for you to know. How I pick the right means greater from scratch, is that if you use the hidden geometry, you won't be able to see a line that divides the elements that make the grade in triangles. In another words, the squares we can post the grades are going to be divided by this line. And this is because in a sketch or the minimum number of lines that it takes in order to make a face at tree sketch or will automatically add these lines so you can edit the range or greater from scratch by using the sandbox toolbar. And as we remember, all the edges can be edited base and tools are commands that you haven't modified toolbar. So this means that you will be able to add a monopoly the grade, but also any geometry that you created by use an existing edges. So the important thing for you to remember how this surface is in a SketchUp is there is still composed of lines, but also vary in both cases, you're actually creating a group composed of edges and faces. That's why you can see that the different ways in which you can grade at the rain will change the appearance and also the options that you have when you're editing under the rain based on your model or when you're grading after rain, before great in the model. Now as well, there's even another way in order for you to create surfaces. And this one is using a surface the already graded in other software. So with this, we will need to recreate have surface that you already have or are they already graded? But also something important for you to notice. How about using existing references are edges and even top surfaces are important for SketchUp. Sketchup is going to connect all the end points that are closer to each other on the c-axis. Additionally, all these elements can make the file even larger than it should be. Which means this n times I sketch work great, too many lines and faces for you to handle. Or in another words, as sketcher, my slowed down. If your great arrays with a lot of detail, especially if you're already assigned materials, the model. So SketchUp is going to do a little bit of math in order to grade the top surface. So because that is, he's going to add unnecessary faces and edges that you might need to believe in order to clean up the result. This means you will be able to achieve pretty much the same result by using either there's two methods. However, you centigrade, he sent them, they would use when you're making changes to the terrain. So in another words, one can allow you to recreate any specific terrain. While the other one allows you to work a little rain based on the actual construction of a. As you're going to see throughout these lessons, both methods have very different results. However, both and greater range with a lot of data, even if the corrosion performance may increase significantly. So we will need to consider this, especially because newer hardware focuses on different type of computation. Better SketchUp does not depend on or in another words, a SketchUp does not take full advantage of the generation of population from one generation to the next. A quick center, since both of these groups are composed of faces and edges, we can even intersect the parent agree a wage or greater. You model the original terrain. And on this toolbar, you're going to find a few ways in order to do something very similar. So in the next lessons, I'm going to show you a few things you can do by using these two. Recommend whether the reins. 86. The Tools on The Sandbox Toolbar Part 1: Now this lesson, I'm going to continue with a sandbox toolbar by showing you the different tools that you have in the toolbar. But more specifically, how they use them on a terrain. They important for the graded based on insistent references and how they use them and terrains that you create it from scratch. Now with this in mind, I'm going to start with a tool that is called loved part of a press faces to shape at the right mesh. And the purpose of this tool is to change the height of the end points within that radius selected using this tool. Now this tool actually needs to be used within the groups. So this means that once you start editing a group, you're going to be able to add hi to the end points of the shape based also on the ambulance or the shape has the name of the tool actually implies this tool creates as low wherever pressure based on this, but also as small as the change in the height of the end points by adding less high towards the end of the radius. Last week, many of the other tools that you have in SketchUp, you're able to add precision by using the keyword. This means that you will be able to change the radius of this tool by just simply type in the value that you want to use another keyword. However, you do have to keep in mind that there are two values available. One is the radius and the other one is the upset. So this means that you can change the radius and also the upset. Additionally the face as you select all the time and from where the upside is going to begin. So the upside space under select the faces rather per cent of the selection. And also as a quick sign up, selecting faces can slow down this tool because of the amino information. So after you change the radius, just need to decide the upset that you want to use on these edges. Now as well, make use of this tool is not actually going to change. Where do I use hyped up surface the gradient based on existing edges, or by using a surface by a greater from scratch. This means that you will see the same process and almost the same result regardless of whether you use this tool. However, if you use this tool on at the rank rating from scratch, however, so we'll look a little bit more artificial because of the fact that this terrain uses a square grid. But also when you use this to recommend, you are going to see that there is a few things that you can do. What is 21 of them is that you will be able to change the radius for the diameter by just simply inputting the values. And then the symbol of faith, followed by the letter r for radius, or the letter D for diameter. How are the most important option for change that you can do by using this option is the fact that you can make a selection with a new model and then use these to recommend hello. So using Shaphan, the keyword in order to apply the value of these two recommend based on the selection mask. Well, while doing this, you're also going to see where you can change the radius once again. Minus, well, something for you to keep in mind is that some of these options are going to be very taxing on the heart, whatever you're using. So we'll need to keep this in mind when deciding the size integrate that you want to use, but also when designing the options that you will be using along with your selection. Nasa quake center, you can use the space on the keyword in order to cancel the two. But this will also remove the upset like when you're using control. Which also means that you can use Control a to select VHS once again. Now the next tool that I'm going to show you that actually allows you to add t tos to the top surface. And this one is actually called detail. What these two actually does, this actually increase the number of edges and surfaces that you have within your selection. So you will be able to do this in order to increase the amount of data that you have within a specific area where you select it. Once you add detail, you can see how much predicate the rain will look once you use a web tools to edit it even more. Which also means that this tool can be very useful and terrain is created from scratch and in some cases can make it a rain feel like it has a different composition. But also these two men also allows you to add details without having to select edges or faces within the model. So if he uses this to recommend, you will be able to add vetoes based on a specific pages where the new model or in another words, you will be dividing VHS, also grading and unnecessary edges and faces in order to maintain the shape of the terrain. So with this in mind, it will be able to add motivator for the turbine, the already graded. Or in another words, you will be able to increase the amount of polygons and quality of the terrain. However, you do have to keep in mind that the edges will also increase the amount of information that you have within your model. Well at the same time, while also demand more resources, the more you add the top surface. So this is something that you will use only in specific areas of the top surface point. In other words, only other parts of the top surface that actually need motivators. Additionally, since this tool works with the end points of the lines you have on the model. You are going to be able to use it outside of the Torah is the gradient. Which means that this will affect the end points of any shape as long as the shape is within a group. However, it will not affect the groups are components within those groups. You will also need to take this into consideration when using this tool to arrange elements in the model as well. Something for you to notice is the rough sketcher scroll integrate the top surfaces pays and triangles because in a sketch or the minimum amount of lines the union interactive greater face our tree. So SketchUp go into great at arranged in any other shape by using at the very least three lines or edges. So because of this, we're going to see that SketchUp allows you to add more detail by dividing the triangles into my triangles. But also because of this, it also has a tool that you can use in order to change that the dose and you want to get the rank. And this funny score and privilege the smoothness of our terrain by filaggrin and H. Hence the name implies this tool will allow you to flip an edge painted at a greater phase where the inner shape on your model. So in the case of the terrains, you will be able to change rainbow, the parents of the terrain by flipping the edges that make the faces, I can post it rains, which is going to be more noticeable when you use this tool on turbine hysteric rated from scratch. And this is mainly because they still will allow you to change the direction of the edge that is greater in order to divide the elements that make the grape in triangles. That's a great sign on. You can see that these two satellites, the edges, even if you're not using hidden geometry, because this won't recognize that lies at the geometry even if they are hitting on the model. Now as a quick side note, if you use from scratch and you will be able to create a top surface, you can use under landscape of a video game, wildlife files that you already imported, but top surfaces they already have access to. You will be able to grade something more specific to an architectural project, construction, or the backgrounds that you want to use on a presentation or an auditor important later on to another type of software. But you might be using like Unreal Lumiere. However, the geometry can have a lot of information that needs to be exported. So you're going to support him as cities. Or you can export a bit the rain after editing a little bit in order to lower the polygon of the geometry or just analytic, change something before you send it somewhere else. After you add about a little bit in order to lower the polygon or in order to change something before you send it somewhere else. I'm going to link this lesson are to this point because both of these tools work hand in hand one way or the other. Or in another words, one allows you to modify that top surface that you really want to be or the one that allows you to add more detail so you can edit even more Laptop surface. So with this in mind, both of these tools will be very useful when you work in the top surfaces, regardless into top surface is graded based on a file that you already have. Or if you're right at the top surface from scratch. 87. The Tools on The Sandbox Toolbar Part 2: Now in the sandbox toolbar, we're going to have another tool that you can use in order to modify the terrain. However, it, this tool allows you to modify the terrain based on faces where you can create a new model. However, you're also going to be able to use this tool with files, the new product with SketchUp. So what I'm going to do in this case, essentially important file to SketchUp I can actually use in order to show you how this works. Because in most cases, you will be using this tool with models theoretic, right in this ketchup or what files that are important to a sketch. So once they put it a file, I'm just going to place the element that I just imported with SketchUp on both of these terrains. And once that I have done this, I'm going to show you how to use these two. So I'm going to go to the Sandbox toolbar in order to use this tool, which is call this a selected object to shape after my mesh ones that I use this tool, you are going to see in the user interface, you have the upset. You need to select the element that is going to impact that the rain. So what this means is that you need to select first the element that is going to impact the terrain before you send this tool. And this also means that the element that is going to impact the brain needs to be above that, the rain. Because once these two January's the contour news, based on the faces of this model, just need to select the terrain matters going to be impacted. And then you're going to see that you will be able to live the foundation that is graded by using this tool. Now this flood foundation is now going to be always perfect when he space and an element instead of a face that you created. Which means that you can query the face that you want to use in order to do the same thing. First of all, you're going to see where these two will still allow you to modify the geometry of the terrain based not only on the face, but also the edges. So the terrain in sketcher is still going to function pretty much the same way. And one see the psi, the height of this lab. Just need to use that left-click on the mouse. And this also applies when you use host names to the side, the height of the slab as well. Something for you to know is that you can use this tool, I'm Teresa, you create it from scratch. But also that you can change the offset in order to add more detail to the foundation that is greater. Sorry, I'm going to use this tool once again. Then I'm going to change the value of V upset before selecting the element in product with SketchUp. And then I'm just going to select the terrain, the regulator from scratch. Once a sketcher finishes the creation of the flat foundation as well. This gives you an idea of the wrist. So migrating projection lines in color red based on the slab that is going to gray. So because it is, you can cancel these two if you do not like the worst so before even create and they slept better so you can continue as you normally would. Which means that you can change the high by using this tool. You can cancel this tool by using another tool at any point. Nasa quick sign-on, the creation of the flat foundation. It's going to take some time. If p element we're selecting is very complex, semi some elements, you might actually need to create the flat foundation as an independent phase, so you don't have to wait so long. And in most cases, you won't be actually using the model. Especially when I got to structure, because in those cases there are floor plans. The ligand now the year wherever the terrain that has been modified in order to place the project. But at the same time, you are going to say that in most cases, you can actually use law or the press faces to shape at a rain mesh in order to do the same. And this is because both of these tools, it was something very similar. However, you don't actually need to spend so many research says my grading half-life foundation. So in most cases you will be grading them fluff foundation instead of Alexander the rain on a different way. So this tool will be actually very useful, not only because of the result, but also because it will save you a lot of research says from particle other tools and methods that you will need to use in order to achieve a similar result. 88. The Tools on The Sandbox Toolbar Part 3: Now the last tool that I'm going to show you on this toolbar is the one that is called virtue or trough edges furnace selective phase onto the rain. Now this tool actually does what the name implies. So in order to show you this a little bit better and go into greater face that I can project so that the rain as well. Something for you to know is that this phase can have any shape. However, they face cannot be outside of the boundary of the terrain in which you want to project his face. So if you want to use this for iPad, a parking lot, or even S3, you have to make sure everybody's face isn't about the area of the terrain. They want to add it. Why is that a greater the face and go into multiphase along with the element that are important to escape. So you can see this projection a little bit better. So after I use this tool on the sandbox toolbar, you are going to see that the first thing that you need to select, the face that you are going to project to the drain. Which also means they are able to project just one face at a time. But also you're going to notice that now that the rain is going to have additional lines are located below the edges of the face that was projected. So this will be very useful because you won't have to adapt the rain based on faces for paths that you want to great. But more importantly, you will be able to notice. We'll be able to add him as you normally would. So you will be equal to the part of the terrain may have changed based on the face that were selected while using this tool as well. Since you are able to use this with any phase, you are going to be able to grave faces based on other trials. So what this means is that you won't be able to import different types of files to a SketchUp in order to modify the terrain based on a project they are working at. So this means that you will be able to do certain things to your terrains based on different type of files that you might have not great, and I sketch it. I'm going to use this tool by using as a reference I've called it has been graded in our software. Additionally, this is another argument that you can use with any group that you create on your model. So you don't have to use it with the reins grade and then SketchUp, which is very important because you can use it to add the size to your groups or as a way to create intersections without using any additional tools, such as the solid tools. So you don't have to look at this tool the same way that you do, that. Those are commands that you use in order to create surfaces and softwares, such a Saturday program, it well done this, you are going to see a few things for you to take into account while using this tool. One of them is that this tool works better phase and the terrain Howard per phase cannot be within a group. So in another words, the phase will need to be outside of the groups and the components. And the other thing for you to notice is that you will be able to edit it, the rain based on the face, the use with this tool. You can use this in order to erase unnecessary parts for the terrain. You can even use this a lot with the use of selected object to create a flat foundation in a terrain in order to save a little bit of time. Because that too well combine all the edges within the projection into a single face. So what this means is that both of these tools will be able to use the phases in a way that will save you a little bit of time. And also in a way that will allow you to edit the rain not only in order to add details, but also in a way that you will be able to gray something more natural within your project. Or in another words, we know that the gray matter of pads for your models as well, these two can update the changes that you do to the face under the reign so you can make changes and the terrain at any point while working on the model by just simply add the interface you're using. However, the reins grading by using files outside of escape. This might make the terrain a little bit confusing. And I love this, makes these two purpose at all, not only race, but also with other groups. When you create on your model. 89. The Soften Edges Panel: Now when you're working in SketchUp, there is going to be an option, but you will be using quite a lot if you have components or elements within the model with a lot of details or in another words, with a lot of lines. And this one is called soft smooth edges. Now this option actually opens this afternoon haters panel, which is suddenly you can also open by Sunday sketch of menu. So this means that you can go to the skater menu in order to enable this soft and pages panel, another trait that you're using. Once you use it, you're going to see that there are two boxes that you can check. Enodeb could change how the edges are going to be something that also very center slider that will allow you to change the angle between the normals. Or in another words, that tolerance of the assumption. With this in mind, you will be able to use this slider as well as its mode normals and soft and coplanar. In order to decide how we want to soften the edges. Now smooth normals and soft and coplanar, actually very different by the function, pretty much the same way. So if you enable only one of these, you're going to be able to see how different they are. And if you enable both of them, you are going to see how they work together. So if we use smooth normals, you are going to be softening the edges. What COSO hiding them within the model. Now it's more normals is actually based on the normal the faces. So because of this, you are going to see a change and the shades and the model based on the edges are being sustained. While SoftBank coplanar is only going to soften the edges by hiring the edges that you might not want to say. One is more for soft line while the other one is more for hiding, even though both of them can hide the edges of the elements that your grade for your model. Now this will be actually pretty useful in certain elements, such as data is that you can create with a sandbox. Because the sandbox actually grades hello lines on a terrain. Especially if you're adding a lot of detail. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to use the Sandbox Tools may not integrate at a rain barrel. So I'm going to use hidden geometry because I wanted to hide the geometry on the terrain. So I'm going to use first, let's soften edges panel to hide the edges. Also Sefton in DAGs have the group. And then I'm going to use hidden geometry to show you the geometry while using the tools and the sandbox toolbar. Once I use this tool, you are going to see a couple of things. One of them is that these tools creates additional lines and the terrain. So in order to soften the group, once again, I'm just going to use this lighter. But also you can disable and then enable the options on this toolbar in a rapid are the same. A quick sign of this panel can be used with any of the shapes, the Ukrainian your model. However, physiotherapy is with groups because you only need to select the group before using less of ten pages panel as well. I'm going to add the terrain where you send the tools and the sandbox toolbar. So you can see how this panel interacts with the terrain after doing this. But also I'm going to show you how this also affects the materials. Sorry, I'm going to assign a material to this element. You can see how these options will not only affect how the edges disappear, but also how the face is actually looked like, whether the model. So you want to know what is left SoftBank coplanar will actually allow you to improve the appearance of the material on elements that have a lot of edges. And you can mix this with a smooth normals in order to make this even better. Now this will also be useful tools or commands. We're going to actually create a lot of edges, such as e.g. the filament. So if we are using curves in order the gray shapes, you are going to see maybe smooth edges or react to them a little bit different than with other shapes. Now I'm just going to create a cuboid shapes and this model, one by using curves on the corners and another one without any curves. And then I just going to use the pages panel to soften. And it's more than normal sun-like shapes to show you how these options will make them look different from each other. So what this means is that you can make certain basic shapes, logos small. However, the round coordinates, well, let's still look better than I square that it's been smooth. Bystanders often pages panel as well, and also using these elements in order for you to see the difference between you send this options on different elements, mailing. So you can also see how the shading is going to change depending on the shape there is greater. So the shading is going to be based on DAGs therapy and small. But also you're going to notice that it adds a little bit after rational lining coming from the camera. This is an appearance, but you might also like 1% in certain elements when the new models. So all of these means say this soft and pages panel will be very useful when improving the appearance of the elements that you already great unimodal. 90. A Sanbox Tool use outside of the Terrains: Now this lesson is going to be pretty much an exercise, but also an example of elements that you can create by you send a sandbox tumor. Because as you want to notice how our SketchUp is that many of these tools can actually be used in more than one way. So the sandbox toolbar will actually allow you to create shapes without you having to grade all the necessary edges and faces they will pay in order to create them. And also, I'm going to be using those or commands that I have used before, such as the scale. But also I'm going to be using another feature that you have in SketchUp in order to edit the shape a little bit easier. So I'm going to greater face that aren't going to extra in order to create a 3D shape, then I can convert into a group. So once I have the two groups are going to use the solid tools in order to address the first group before you send the tools that you have an Assemble toolbar. So with this in mind, I'm going to be able to show you the difference between creating a basic shape based on standard tools or commands and creating a shape element based on the Assemble toolbar. Now, different methods for Greg, different results in a sketchbook because each of these methods uses the geometry or the shape a little bit differently, especially when compared to some other tools that you can find on the sandbox toolbar. So the sandbox toolbar actually add more detail in a few cases. But also you might feel like it adds unnecessary lines or edges. So depending on what you're looking for, you might need to use standard tools, recommends my Sandbox toolbar or both. So the next thing we're going to do is actually a shape that will actually benefit from using the sandbox tumor as well as using standard tools. So I'm going to start with a basic shape. I going to use that basic shape in order to use just the edges of the phrases. Or in another words, the age is three, we'll use as prophecy. Now cyclic center. You can use the scale tool in order to scale your selection of our center. If you use control option on a Mac, however, this will be useful depending on the shape that you need to gray. Now as well, I'm doing this so you can see how important it is a selection of the edges before using to sort of commands that you have in the sandbox toolbar, especially when you're creating an element from scratch, which is when I actually do in right now. So in this case, I'm just going to select these stages in a retrograde the basic groups. But also I'm going to edit the results in order to query the shape based on what I'm looking for. So this also means that in this case, and also go into great another group on the other side. Well, you can enter the groups as you normally would mean envy. You can erase unnecessary faces, but also that you can create. Another face is under shapes, that might mean less necessary faces. And this also means that you can hide the edges that even one visible on the shape. And why is that? I have done this. I'm going to gray the remaining shapes by using standard tools such as the push and pull and they scale to forgive men. Now as well, the reason why I'm creating the shape is also in order to show you, there will be different shapes in which you might need to use something like softer edges panel. So with this in mind, you will be able to grade a lot of different shapes by using SketchUp. However, there will be some basic shapes in which you may want to save a little bit of time by using tools or commands that you normally wouldn't think of using suggests that those arguments and assemble toolbar. With this being said, you will be able to save a little bit of time when creating certain models, especially if they have a lot more detail than the shape that I just graded. But more importantly, because when you work with profiles that are given to you by somebody else, you will need to make sure that this Profiles keep that level of precision that you might need to recreate in a sketchbook. 91. The Geo location: Now when you create your models and escalator, you're going to find that there is an option, but you can use, may not have to present your model with a little bit more precision. And this one is called geo localization. This assumption is something that you can find random or info window. So once they go to where it says geo localization, you will notice they will have an option in order to add allocation. Once they click where it says or location, you will be able to open the location window. And this window is very similar to something like Google Maps. So because of this, you will have a standard options in order to zoom in and out by clicking on the second petal. So you can use the mouse in order to zoom in and out, but also in order to pen, or in another words, the pen while he is in the map. Which means that you can use the mouse in order to find a specific location. However, you can also enter their location on this textbox. So this is why the final location is by actually centered text box. So with this in mind, you will be able to search for a city, county, state, region, or country. Now as well. Since this is very similar to the loo maps, you will have the option in order to display the result by using a satellite view. But also you will be able to use a different view Mary score strip map. You will be able to decide how you want to display this result, or in another words, this map. Now so quick sign something they are going to notice is that you will be able to see the second under Byron left 9 ft breaks this thicker. It will open up a website by using your default browser in order to see anything related to the locations and the SketchUp help. Now as well. So the important for you to know is the sense that your localization is an infant. You will be able to open the more info in order to add a location as well. When you open the application window, you will find an option to select the region on this window, right? Also, you will be able to select the region has certain street map, and also you're going to see they have the option to import that region within the selection box. Which means that the way in which you add the location is by selecting a region and then important that region where the model. But also something important for you to know is that depending on the size of the region, This option will appear to disable or enable. So with this in mind, you're going to notice on the bottom left there you have the actual letter is being used in order to display that map. Once you select the region, it will be able to pilot it the region after you click on Import. Once the uterus as SketchUp is going to load this image to the model, but also at a location based on an icon that you haven't, the location window. So what this means is that the center that you have in a monospace is going to be based on the blue icon we have when we are location window, when you click races important. Also the option that is called allocation will change to add more imagery. Because you can add more images to the model without erasing or hiding the ones that are really important on your model. So with this in mind, you will be able to select a different area within this map. And also you will be able to modify, let's say so the region in order to add another image, the model. However, if you do this, you are going to notice the location of the new image is still going to be based on whether the blue icon appears on the location window. And this is going to happen regardless if you use satellite or if you use street map, which is simply because the name of the option changes to add more imagery. But also on the window that lets you know that the image that you're adding is going to be aligned into the original as best as possible. So adding more images, we'll also add more information to an already large area covered by the image on the model. Regardless of the type of map they are using, their location is not going to change. And as well, a few things for you to know about these images. One of them is that these images are actually groups, the random model space. So you won't be able to delete them or move them until you unlock these groups under monospace, a quick sign, you can move the image anywhere that you want. However, if it is not according to the origin on the location window, you can now move it back to where it's supposed to be, unless they use the undo or you input the image. Once again, because you can actually move these groups as you normally would. So I recommend that you either gray a copy of the file before moving. These proofs are mobile copy of these groups. What Morgan the model and as well these images. Acquiring materials. Or in another words, let's say images are actually phases in which the image has been applied as a texture. And this is important for you to know because as you remember, there are a lot of things that you can do with the materials, such as e.g. say, better material has suddenly image as well as applying the material to another phase. As well. Since these are materials, you are going to be able to use satellite images. A few important to see images. So if you have access image with higher resolution or with more information that you want to show in your model, you can simply import the image tomorrow even though you will lose an option that I'm also going to cover in these lessons. However, you are going to notice that you're not able to purchase these materials from the model. And this is because these materials are assigned to groups and components. So what this means is that you will need to unlock the groups before the lead in the groups. Now as far you're going to see the rest SketchUp grades two groups for each of the images. Now there is actually a reason for the base. However, I'm going to show you this on another lesson. Cyclic sign-on. Since these are groups and our components, you won't be able to find anything on the Components panel where later to these images. Now once this group said, Well leader, you are going to see they now have the option in order to purge unused materials as well. You can undo all of this by using Control-C acyclic, same parameter we can use the info to save the groups are locked or not. But also that you can lock and unlock two groups at any point by either using this panel or by just simply using the airliner. Now, this K is actually the latest images to show you how you can add any location. So by going once again, the model info window will be able to clear the location, which means that y is directly relocation. I will be able to define location to this model. So with this in mind, you can select a different image and the allocation window. So you can import the image in order to location. And once you do this, you're going to see SketchUp. Once again, Grace two groups may send the same region. Now as well. If you have information that you want to use in order to select a location, you can simply use cell location manually instead of using allocation. Now, this one is used when, you know, is specifically the place where the blue icon is supposed to be. However, something important for you to know about using, they said manual geo localization is that this window does send me Hello information. So with this in mind, you can use cell location manually or you can simply use our location in order to do the same. However, both of them are actually very useful on different cases. Has a quick signer, if you change the location by using set manual location, you are going to notice that you're going to use the information of the application window. So in most cases, you will simply use our location instead of setting the location manually by using this window. So adding allocation is actually pretty easy and sketcher and are super useful when present the model, which is something they are also going to nowadays, especially because they're features or options that are SketchUp hands. They take advantage of the geographic location as well. There is an icon handy SketchUp toolbar, but also allows you to open the delocalization random or even from this place the information of the geographic location. Once the URL location to model. This means that after you've selected the region, you can go to the second in order to get the same information that you have on the model info. 92. Creating Terrains using the Images: Plaintiff sketcher, there is going to be another feature related to your localization. And this one will allow you to save time when it comes to creating the race. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to open the monarchy for in order to add a location. But more importantly, I'm going to add a location that is going to have drastic changes on the top surface. So I'm going to select this location. And after I click on Import, we're going to see once again, they mentioned the model. However, if I go to the toolbars and then I use the tool there is for toggle terrain. You are going to notice by now the image appears as if the rain. Now this is something that you can do by using control C or you can simply use the delocalization fundamental info. So you can add more regions to the top surface you already have in your model any point by just simply using the allocation window once again, which also means that you will have the right information related to the symmetries. So with this in mind, you're going to nowadays they are able to not only the image brighter topographic information available to SketchUp. Also important for you to know is that you actually have two groups created in order to do this. One of them is going to grab the image and the other one is going to have the terrain. So this is the reason why you have two groups greater for each of the images as well. You can see that one of the groups related to the images is also hitting on the model space, which is something that you can see once you select that this groups on the airliner, on the model space. So with this in mind, you will be able to unlock and also use alter these groups at the same time. However, we are going to see that you are not able to see them at the same time. And this is because the display of the images and the terrain is actually handled by the tax. So what this means, terrain, Why do you actually do is high, when are these two layers and share with the other one? So let's play both of them at the same time. We're going to see that the rain as well as the image. However, both of these layers will disappear once they click where it says Clear location. So once the acrylic live location, both of these layers and everything within this layers will disappear. So if we want to keep both of these elements independently from the layers and more importantly, independent from the option that is called a location. Where you can do is actually assign a different layer to these groups. This means you'll need to unlock these groups. So you can assign a different layer to both of these groups. But more importantly, that layer cannot be related to both of these groups. So in this case, I'm going to choose that differently as an example. To show you, both of these groups will remain on the model even if I use the location. So with this in mind, you will be able to keep both of these preferences, even if you change the model based on a different location, which will also save you a little bit of time when it comes to getting the top surface of the area in which we're placing your model. Now something important for you to nowadays, as I sense, you're able to aim for your images. You will be able to assign maps they already have to those terrains. However, you do have to make sure that you have a reference to make sure that, that the rain and the images the EU important coincide. So in order to do this, you can always keep the terrain and the image because you can use the things for it snaps on the image. They already have to make sure that it coincides with the region the imported as an image by using the allocation window. Now this may seem confusing. However, if you have a good reference, that becomes very easy, especially if the satellite image uses the same high from the reference level because you won't have to scale the image. In particular SketchUp. 93. Topographic Pattern using the Images: Now next sketch or you can add a location that you can use in order to get the top surface of the area in which you're placing your model, made for you or actually won the curves. In other words, the lines that are used in order to represent the top surface, you will need to do something very different. This is because that group that represents that the rain is actually graded based on victims score from scratch, which means that it's greater face and a grape. So because of this, they were actually need the gray curves, but representative of surface. This is something they've been great very easily by just simply creating a favorite places on the monitoring space. And go into greater few phases based on behind every curve. Or in another words, based on their height that the lines that represent the top surface are going to have between each other. And after grading these faces, I'm just going to compare these faces into a group. And then I'm just going to place the group half up to surface. So I'm going to create a few faces. And then I go into place these phases based on the area on top of the subsurface. As well as something for you to know is that this naps can also be used where the images they are important by using the location window. And as a quick signer, remarkable, you need to unlock the group, or in another words, this terrain in order to move or edit the group. Or in another words, the terrain. Once the writer is going to intersect this group with the other group. And then I'm just going to delete the unnecessary elements so you can see the result non-cyclic sign-on. You need to take into account what is the reference that you're going to use where you see receiver, which is something that you normally take into account once the place tomorrow and the terrain. However, since in this case and not actually placed in a model, I don't need to be so precise. However, you can actually do this by acinar cell reference the image instead of the terrain. And then use those to silver, silver coin, in other words, greater face on top of the image. And then just simply add the other necessary faces you need to use. We know that a greater lines they're going to progress and the top surface. Now as well, since you have deadlines, you will be able to use this lines in order to create a top surface facing up to that you have on the sidewalk stupor. So this means that you can create a top surface by using a cell reference these lines. And this is very important for you to know because the rest, so it's going to be very different. If you use the hidden geometry in order to compare the results, we're going to see that the terrain and the top surface graded by using the lines have a geometry that is very different between each other. So with this in mind, when you create floor plans presentations tomorrow in January, it will be able to have a lot more information based on the drain. Or in another words, you will be able to see the top surface as well as the terrain, create a pilot of surface. Quieter Berlin's, you will be able to get an idea and the terrain information that you can get furniture sketch. However, that level of precision is now going to compare the information that you can get from the engineers or in another words, from the actual terrain. And you can always keep the mantras of reference within your model, especially because you can use the product, I say receiver of the top surface even after great. And that the rain. So as you can see, all the tools on the sandbox toolbar are very useful when creating the rains, but also when using the additional features such as the delocalization. 94. The Shadows: Now the next lessons I wanted to show you how you view but also present your model. So with this in mind, I'm going to start showing you certain things that you can do in order to change the appearance of the model, such as e.g. the shadows. If they're grading the shape, I'm going to show you how you can find the shadows in SketchUp, starting first by the escalator menu. Now once that I said like research shadows, you're going to see that there is an icon on the user interface. Then now it's highlighted and this one is on the shadow toolbar. This icon able to enable and disable the shadows as well. The most important thing for you to know, but the shadows. The shadows are placed based on the origin of the modal space. Or in another words, they are based on the recent that plane that you have in the model space. So this means that in a sketch, you will need to use the origin of the model space as the main reference that you will use when creating your model. So you will need to get this in mind, migrating the models, but also we're moving the shapes, whether your model as well, you can actually control the shadows based on the day, but also based on the hour. So with this in mind, you're going to get different results based on the time of the day. However, you are going to notice that this is limited to the hours in which normally less than will be up. So sketch it will allow you to create a solid study, highlights and shadows. But also you will be able to see now you have a panel just for the shadows. So once you expand the shadows panel, you want nowadays pretty much the same options that you have and the shadows toolbar. However, we're going to find a few options and will allow you to have a specific values when changing the shadows of your model. So with this in mind, you will be able to change that day, the hour, but also that they may send a calendar. So with this in mind, you will be able to have even more precision than you normally would. Which is the reason where you can even create hustler Study Center. The calendar is the same one that you can find other softwares. So it will only allow you to select the day, the month, and also the year while working on your model as well, depending on your country or region, you will be able to even change the time zone that you're using when deciding the shadows. Now with all this means, say, you will be able to change the information they want to use and the shadows based on your country or region, but also when a specific date and time. However, this doesn't mean that you cannot change the parents or the shadows. With this in mind, you will be able to increase or decrease the intensity of the line that also increase or decrease the intensity of the dark. Or in another words, the intensity of illumination and the intensity of the shadows. So with this, we will be able to have a lot of control on the appearance of the shadows, but you have in the model. Now as well. There is another option in this panel that is called user1 for shading. Now, this one will allow you to use the sun in order to change the shape of the fixes that you have in the model, even if you're disabled and shadows. Which means that this option will allow you to change the appearance of the materials based on the sun even if the shadows are not enabled. So in another words as well, add a little bit more detail, but also a little bit more precision to the materials without having to use the shadows. And this will be more apparent once you start using these sliders, even when the shadows are enabled, but even more when the shadows are disabled as well. This option saves resources. However, it is still graze the shadows even if they don't show in the model, even if David, I'm showing the model. So this is an extraordinary wave to the shadows when presenting immoral as well. You're going to notice that when you disable the shadows are the options will be disabled. So with this in mind, you are going to notice that the shadows also has a few other options that you can use once you enable the shadows and deception as part of faces on ground and from pages. So with this in mind, you will be able to have a specific shadows that you might want to use in your model. But more importantly, you're going to notice by default, two of these assumptions are enabled. So it might be for shadows, public place, faces, but also on the ground. So the only option that is disable is the one that is called edges. Now this option as such, is not really visible unless you have pages, manner creating faces. So this is something that you can use when you're using edges in order to represent wires. So you can have elements such as fences without having to grade the thickness. Now, this is not really bad when you have elements and the program. However, if you get too close or if you use these elements in order to greater render, you will not be able to use DHS properly. So depending what you're doing in a sketcher and outside of a sketcher, this might become very useful. Now as with many other panels, you can collapse the status at any point. However, if you do this, you might ask what we'll be using the shadows toolbar as well, since we're able to let our man the hour and that they also going to be able to modify the shadows by changing the location. So this means that you will be able to add the location of your choosing inadequate change the shadows. So with all this being said, the shadows can be very precise, but also they can be used in many different ways. What we're getting your models. 95. The Fog: Now as well, worthiness catcher, you are going to find that there is another option or feature that you're having, this ketchup very similar to the shadows and this one is called the fog. So if you'd go once again to this picture menu, you are going to find that far right below the shadows. And once you enable the ****, you are going to notice that they are parents. So the model is going to change a little bit. This is going to be in order to represent the fog within a SketchUp. So once you enable this panel, you are going to be able to enable or disable the fog. But also you will be able to change the effect that the fog on the camera. So with this in mind, you will be able to change these sliders in order to change the effect of the filter. Now, this NSK job is not really a volume, or in another words, is not a treaty fog. Which means that this is a filter that you are on top of the model. Now this filter is actually very similar in something that you will find on a video game. But more specifically on video games that tried to save resources and as well, another similarity between the fog and the shadows. You also have a panel just for the fact. Now something that you can compare these two A's to the farm on a game like Silent Hill. So the functionality is pretty similar. However, in this ketchup, that functionality will give you a different result. Because the fact that you have enough SketchUp can also be changed based on the color. So this means that instead of using the background color, which is determined by this time hormone, specifically this tau that is being used in this template. You can simply use by Carlos, you're choosing any point depending on how you want to present your model. So these might be very useful in some models more than others. Also, since the fall is meant to resemble the side use on your project or model. And this will be more noticeable on architectural projects. So if I use as an example the project of the course, you're going to see a little bit better how this affects, could actually affect your model as well. Something for you to notice is that the slider has two controls that you can use. And then each of these controls as an independent function, which means that the one on the left changes from where the **** is going into a store and relationship to the camera. While the other one will change how far you can see because of the or in another words, that fog we'll hide the model based on the distance to the camera relative to the position of this control on the slider. And this is why these values go from zero to infinity. So as you can see, this is actually pretty good when you want to add a little bit of atmosphere your model. So as you can notice up to this point that far, and also the shadow allows you to add a little bit more like tomorrow, but also a little bit of realism. 96. The Styles (Edge Settings): Now, at this point in sketcher, I hadn't been mentioned in these towels and also the templates. However, I haven't shown you what is actually this tau. Now these styles are the ones that I said on the Styles panel before creating a template. So this means that each of the templates is actually graded by editing these styles before you send the option that is called Save as Template. So with this in mind, you will be able to edit your own templates. But also you will be able to edit the templates that you have available with a SketchUp. So in the next lessons, I'm going to show you how you can edit existing styles, but also how you can create your own styles. Which is very important not only for the models that you're grading, but also because you can create your own templates or you send the option that is called save as template, which is the last thing that I'm going to show you what n This lessons. So I'm going to start by selecting one of these styles and then just simply click Reset setting in order to start editing style by adding thing is specifically the edges they are using, the stars on the edges, you will be able to see that you are able to enable or disable the back edges. But also you will be able to have an option that is called the queue in order to determine how the lines are going to change based on the distance that these lines have from the camera. So the queue is actually based on the camera and the position of the objects relative to the camera. While the other option that you can find on that VHS is the one that is called as tension. So you can change the size of the extension. But also see nowadays, you don't have to use the extension whatever the queue, which means that the assumptions can be enabled or disabled at any point. So you don't have to use the extension, you don't want to, but also you will be able to control the size so the extension, or in another words, the size or the edge that is going to be extended beyond the endpoint. But also, you can even select that thickness of the end points by assembly option that is below the extension. So this option is go hand in hand, but then the style. However, you don't have to use, alter them together. So this will change a little bit the appearance or the model, depending on why do you want to do with the model? Has a quick sign-on. There are many styles. They use this option because they are graded. So you can present your model, whether their parents or in another words, your model looks more like a painting or even a drawing. Now as well, you have another option below where it says endpoint that is called jeder. Now this option is actually used in order to assemble a hand drawing or in another words, in order to make it feel like this model was true by hand. So with this in mind, you can make this options depending on how you want to present the model. And last but not least, you have an option where it's actually more visible once they use shader. And this one is called dashes. So when you use GTR and dashes, you will be able to see a little bit better how the dashes actually changes the model. Especially because once the USA what the dashes, you're not going to see a big change in the model. So the dashes are mainly intended to be used once they use the option that is called jitter. So quick signer, if you really need to hide the edges, just need to check where he says stages in order to hide all the edges. So with this in mind, you will be able to change the shape or the edges. That also you are going to be able to change the color of the edges. So you're able to use the same color all the edges better also, you will be able to change the colors of DHA is based on the materials. However, this might make the edges more confusing than anything else. Because when you're using materials that are very close to the color black, the color d I, j is now going to change while the other ones will. And then you will find a different option that will allow you to change the color of the EHS based on the access, which might not seem very useful at first until you want to see how the lines or edges and the model are oriented based on the access. So with this in mind, you can change the color of the edges by using the materials or the edges. But also you can simply change the color so the ages by choosing a different color, they might better. So your needs, which is only available when you select on disrupting the option that is called whoa, same. So with this, you can even choose e.g. in the color. Why? When you went to reverse all the colors? In another words, when you wonder from phase to be black and the age is why. Now as well, you are going to be able to see how the other styles handle the edges. But also you will be able to see that the standard styles pretty much uses the edges the same way. So the other options on these tiles are the ones that actually change the appearance of the style. And the color of DHS is an option. And that is actually pretty useful because you won't be able to change the color of the edges to our color, such as wipe. All this means you are going to be able to make a lot of changes on these styles at all times, even on something very basic, like the edges. 97. The Styles (Face Settings): Now as well, when using these styles panel, you will be able to notice that besides changing the settings, you're also going to have the face settings. So this means that this tau goes from the basic element they use in order to create the model that the element that is graded based on the edges and other phase has fewer options. However, the worst soul of changing the assumptions can be perceived with a new model. And this is because you will be able to do the same thing that you do on the model info. Except for the fact that either this or the face has the gray while you sit on a specific style. This means they will be able to determine the color of the firm face and the color of the face or the model, which is the one that is going to appear by default every time that you create any phase. So what this means is that the model info will actually show you the new colors they're assigned for the front face and the back face. So you will be able to apply this to any of your models. If you actually know the style that you're using as well, you can use these styles panel in order to change the style that you're using for the new model. However, something as well for you to notice is that this doesn't actually change the phases that you have within the groups and the components. Because the groups and the components are models where the models, so you will need to make the changes before creating the groups and their components. Nasa quick sign of the changes in these styles can be updated by using the option on the Styles panel, but also you can update the changes that you do to this tau by changing to a different style and then returning to this tau that you are editing as well, you can see that these settings can change the general style that you're using the model, which is the same thing that you can do by using these styles toolbar. So within here, you will be able to go from wireframe, Hayden, and so on. But more importantly, you will be able to see there are a few options enable or disable, depending on the visual style they use. If you use hidden, you aren't going to notice that you will have an option in order to enable or the same are they transparency, which will allow you to also select the quality of the transparency. So depending on how you are going to be a Saskatchewan, they might want a better quality. However, this only affects the materials they're already using, the transparency. So you wouldn't need to keep this in mind, not only in this spatial style, because there are other styles, but also allows the transparency. If you use the shared a mole, we're also going to be able to determine if you want to use the material transparency, but also the quality of their transparency. Now as well, I going to be pretty much the same except for the last one. And this is because shader, shader when materials are pretty much the same. Now it's like quick center, radius and nicer. You are going to be able to see that the transparency equality, that is pole faster as the default value of 50. However, the monochrome, yes, it's the same color for the faces without allowing the transparency, which means that it doesn't use transparency. So everything is going to be based on the color that you assign to the front face. And last but not least, you have the X-ray, which is the only thing that will allow you to modify some of these styles. So this means that if you use the X-ray while using monochrome, they're going to be able to use transparency now based on the material, but based on the option that is called X-ray. So this means that they transparency. He's not actually going to be based on whether their material high sexual lives and transparency, but rather on the transparency by the x-ray, which extended that you can change by changing the quality. So you can use this slider in order to change the default value, be on 50 as well. Since you can use monochrome while also using the x-ray, you will be able to use shaded with materials as well as shader and hidden. So once again, the only one that is not compatible, they x-ray is the wireframe. And this is because the wireframe only uses the lines. So it's not actually displaying the phases. I would call this means say you will be able to modify the visual styles even more by using these styles panel. And especially when it comes to the transparency and the quality of the transparency on your models. 98. The Styles (Background and Watermark Settings): Now this lesson, I'm going to continue making the changes that you can do on these styles. Sundays one, I'm going to show you how you can change the background. Marina, in other words, how you can change the colors, but you can see on the model space before starting tomorrow. So once I click on this, it will be able to see that you can change the background, the sky, and the ground. So they send mind, you will be able to select the colors that you want to use on the background, the sky, and the ground. However, in the case of this guy, you are going to notice that not only you can change the color of this guy, but also you can enable or disable the scholar at any point. So with this in mind, you will be able to add my color by one, but also you will be able to decide if you want to use it or none. Which means that the crown and this guy mountain, that's something that you need to use. If you don't want him. If you enable the ground, you're going to see the default color, receptors AND style, which also means that you can decide the color that you want to use. But also in the case of the ground, it's going to be a little bit different from this guy because it will be able to control how additional settings. So what this means is that when you enabled the ground, you can change the color, also determining the transparency of the background. So once you enable the program, you will be able to see the color of the background, as well as an escalator that will allow you to control the transparency of the background. So with this in mind, you can determine how much intensity the one on the ground. So this may improve their parents or somebody elements depending on the currently have in the background as well. This is actually very important because there are options that you can use when you explore the model and C matrix. So if you remove everything there is in the back room, none of this is going to show up better. Also, you can explore a white background by changing the color of the background and then disable this guy and the ground. These styles are actually used in a lot more than just a presentation of the project as well. You're going to find that on this top panel, or more specifically on the paragraph settings, there is an option that will allow you to see the model from above the ground, but also from below the ground. So if you check the option that is called Show ground from below, you aren't going to be able to see it now you can show the background, even when you're looking at the model on the negative values of the c-axis on the model space. Now once again, I'm going to change the values by default in order to avoid confusions. And then I'm going to show you that there is something else that you can even change. And these styles, which is the watermark. If you click on the watermarks settings, you are going to notice that you will be able to add a watermark, the model. So in order to add a watermark, you just need to click on the plus sign in order to search for the image file that you want to add a watermark. And once they do this, you will be able to add a name, but also you will be able to decide if you want to have some background or not really ready to start showing you the difference between bowl. I'm going to start by using background. Now when I see the sign, whether it's going to be a background overlay, just have to click our next minute or two to say the next options as well. You're going to notice that the receptor acts on these windows. And I will try to let you know what you're actually doing with the assumptions. So when they send mine, you're going to be able to see that there is an option that will allow you to create a mess by using this image. Now in this case, I'm not going to use the option I wearing going to use this slider that you have below, which will allow you to change how the image is going to blend with the program. Or in another words, this will add opacity to the image and then factor in this and just going to click on Next in order for you to say, then now you will be able to decide how you want to display the image. So you will have different options that will allow you to do this. So just e.g. is stretched to fit the screen, which has an additional option to lock the aspect ratio as well. You do have an option to tau hat cross the screen, which will allow you to tell the image on the screen based on the size of the image. Now last but not least, you're able to decide the position of the image by using these controls. But also, you will be able to change the scale of the image trace, and this is lighter. So this is going to be a little bit more precise if you wanted to place a logo or something similar. Now something as well for you to know is that you're also able to add even more watermarks and depending on what you want to do. So this means that you can add multiple watermarks face and the same image or basin or the images. So with these in mind, I'm going to add another watermark by using the same image. However, in this case, I'm going to be using the option that is called great mass. Now we're going to see that there is always going to be a little bit different compared to the other option. And this is because the math works a little bit similar to the mask in Photoshop, which means that it's going to grab my color and then use it in order to create a mess. So these can actually be used when you have something that you want to add to the background, or more specifically, to the imaginary line that you have at the end of the background. Now, next, I'm going to create another mask overlay instead of background. So I'm going to start the process once again. Then I'm going to use the option of overlay instead of background. So the overlay is going to create pretty much the same thing. However, the main difference is that now the image is going to be on top of the model. So they changes the U2 are going to determine not only what the image is going to be, but also the parents or the model through the image. However, the options are going to remain pretty much the same. You're still going to be able to create a mass by using the image, but also blend the image with a background, as well as changing where the image is going to be placed. Now as a quick side note, the assumptions are based on the resolution of the image, but also pays on the screen. And this is because once you're actually using is the screen space, but you have within a SketchUp. Now with all this means saying, Lee mentioned very similar to the layers in the sense that you can change the order of images like the word layers. Because you might one, when image overlaying on top of another one. Nasa quick saner, the watermarks, they sell and they will also be on the animation. So depending on what you're looking for, you will need to play around with these options. Mean that I forget every so they are looking for. But also since you have multiple watermarks, you can also delete them. You will be able to delete any of them at any point. But also sending very practical that you can do when you still want to work in your model without looking at the watermarks. In this one makes the option that allows you to display the watermarks. So if you then say, but the assumption, you don't have to look at the watermarks we're working in last-minute list as many of the other options that you have in the panel. You also have a way in order to item when you already graded, like I said, the watermark, you won't be changing the color and you will be able to change that property. So the watermark, which means that you can just say if you wanted to say much to BMS, as well as the position that blend. But also you can enter the placement by also deciding how he's going to be placed on the screen. So what this means is that you can use the most important options that you have an image, except for the fact that you cannot change if this one is going to be a background overlay. So you will need to decide this from the beginning. So something for you to notice on this window and say You also had the same icon that you have in the materials in order to change the image you're using for another one. So you don't have to keep the same image if you're the one to. Which also means that you will need to keep in mind where the image is placed at all times. Because if you change the image different position as ketchups no longer going to be able to find the image if you want to add it. Once again, let us, it's actually pretty useful once you start creating your own projects. Because you can even add something like your logo or basic information about the project. 99. The Styles (Modeling Settings): Now this lesson, I'm going to show you the last thing that you can change with this stylus place in the Styles window, which is the modeling settings. Now the modelling settings can see more confusing than the other options on. Don't remember, remember that these assumptions are actually based on how you visualize the model. Which means that you can change e.g. the color of the lines that you have when you're selecting accurate y-component. So within here and you're going to be able to see most of the things that you will be able to edit or change when it comes to the visualization of the model when you're working on the model. So this is actually different, changing the color of the axis, price and the preferences. So this means that you can actually change the color of the elements that are logged on your model, but also you're able to change the color of the guides. So as you notice, this is the way for you to change how you view your model by working on it. So you won't be able to change e.g. the color of the enactive sections on the model, cyclic sign-on. This is one of the few things that you can do by using control C. So what this means is that if you want to undo these changes, you will need to use once again, this tells window. So I'm going to change these values back to default to avoid confusion. Now as well, something for you to notice is the size you can change the color of this sections when they are inactive. It will also be able to change the color when they are acting. And also something that you might be changing a lot when editing these styles is this section fail. Now this section field is the one that represents the interior of the elements, wants that they are cut. So this is going to function like the hatch in America or revenue. Meaning that these grades or phase based on the intersection between this section and the elements status section cuts and then add some color to the face there is graded by the intersection or in another words, to this section field or hatch. This option will allow you to change the color of this face. So depending on how you want to present this section, you will be able to use these assumptions in order to change not only the presentation of this section, while modern intersection, but also the presentation of this section will present a new section to others. When this is going to be very useful, not only within a sketchy, but also outside of a SketchUp. Because you will be able to export images while also for sending your model or project to others. This means that you won't be able to present your project to somebody else, but also you will be able to use layer in order to document your model. Additionally, you can use this settings. We change the color of this section lines. So you can change the color of the lines that represents where the elements are kept by the sections. So with this in mind, let's section and this section lines become very important options for you to keep in mind. Not all were working on the model, but also what per cent in the model. This means, since we are able to change the color of this section lines, you're also going to be able to change the way up this section lines. So you can emit more definition to the section lines compared with the other lines, they have an immoral. Now since we didn't hear you actually change the modelling settings, you are going to notice that there are a lot more options for particle, the background settings and the edges settings. So within here, you will be able to sell it if you want to show the hidden geometry and the hitting objects, which is the same thing that you can do, a sketch of many. So what this means is that when you select, I will select these options. You're also selecting on selecting the same options, but you haven't leaf sketch of many. So this is another way in order for you to sign if you went to see or not what is hidden within the model. Something that all the options have in common is that they will change. Their parents have the model, henry old time. You will be able to see the impact of the changes that you do on these styles. Why wouldn't hear? You will also have access to the collar biotech, which means that you don't need to use the tax window in order to design if you want to use color by tag. So you can create an installed by default will show you all the colors are being used in the text right away. But also you can determine if and this is tau. You want to show the axis or not. So in another words, will be able to select my default options that you have when you start your model by using this style. So when this assumption is, you will have not only the model access, but also the section planes by section cuts, dissection field, as well as the guides. And as you might have noticed, all these options are available in other parts of the user interface. So these will make this a little bit easier in the sense that you won't be able to start with this enable or disable the beginning. And as I mentioned before, these assumptions are actually very different. When it comes to colors that you can change my assembly sketch of preferences where they sent mine. And you can change the colors by using SketchUp preferences, or more specifically, by going to where it says accessibility in order to change the colors. Which means that by using this ketchup preferences and the Styles panel, you are going to be able to grade. And I started that you can use if you're colorblind, they were encased that you have in a specific name and it goes to the currency. You can see that also 1% then your models to somebody else. So it means said, you can create a style in order to work right away, base and their needs do you have on the models that you create by using SketchUp? 100. Use and Save The Styles: Now in this lesson I want to show you how you can create your own styles, but also how can you use them after you grade them? And this is because you can make a lot of changes to any of these styles. So you already have by default. But this doesn't mean that you are actually creating any style. Some of these lessons, I want to show you how to create new styles. And what can you do with these tiles in order to avoid having to edit them once again, on every single model that you are growing into creating a sketch. Or in another words, how can you say this towels, but also how can you use these styles with a template? So in order to create a new style, you will need to click on this option allows you to create a new style. Once you do this, you are not going to see any real change on this panel. However, you will be able to make the changes that you want and this town, such as e.g. the name and the description. And once you click where it says Select, you are going to notice that the style has been created. So with this in mind, you will be able to see not only the equator new style, but also they are going to be able to use many of the same options that you have working with the materials, such as e.g. open, another select tab in the Styles panel in order for you to browse a little bit easier between all the different styles. But also, you will be able to use this in order to use another option that you have in the Styles window. And this one is the mix. Now the mix will allow you to press Enter I styles that you want to use under section of your choosing. So what this means is that you can select the Settings from different styles based on where you press Enter the style you're selecting. So with this in mind, you are going to find different settings depending on the styles that you are selecting. Now, this is now going to be very apparent at first until you actually select a style that has different settings that this tau, the already using. So this will be very useful when you're creating a new style. Because you might already find one that has the settings that you're looking for. Instead of copying them one by one, you can simply use the option that is called mixed. Now as well, you will have a standard options and the Styles window, and they will allow you to do something very similar. So the option that is called Gray new style. This means that if you open this menu with the mouse, now going to be able to save this style, but also make a copy of this style. I make a copy. It's the same thing as creating a new style based on an existing one, which is pretty much the same thing that you do with the materials. So with this in mind, if you have unnecessary styles, you can delete them. But also you can use the option that is called Save, As in order to save the style of your choosing and other directories that you have in SketchUp or in a different directory. Or in another words, we can say when you start with an escalator. So you can use at all times, just like when you create any material. This is very useful because you don't need to worry about deleting these styles directly within the file because there will be, say, directly within a SketchUp, hetero cyclic sign-on. You can move to a different folder by just pressing and dragging the material to a different folder, just like with the materials. However, even if you have pretty much the same functionality that you have with the materials. This doesn't mean that saving this style is the same thing as saving the template. If you go to this picture many, you will have an option that is called save as template, which will allow you to create a template based on everything that we have covered so far. Which means that this template is going to include not only the default style of the template, but also the units. So everything that you can change and they can be carry over to another file, can be saved as a template. So with this in mind, you will be able to define, then name the description, that file name, which is going to be pretty much the same thing as the name of the file followed by the file extension. But also you will be able to design if you want this template to be set as the default template. So you're not only able to create a template, but also you're able to define if you want this template as the default templates that you use every time that you create any file, one already working when a sketchbook. However, you will need to change this by using the preferences. After creating a template in which you check the assumption. Or in another words, you will need to use these ketchup preferences in order to go to where it says template. So you can select a template that you created and set as default template, which is something that already has been covered on a previous lesson. So with this in mind, you can always make the changes that E1 on the units and search before saving the template in order for you to test the template that you're creating. So in this case, I'm going to create a template in order for you to say this. However, I'm not going to be selling this template as the default template. So I'm going to select her name at random description and then I just going to click on save. And why is the writer is, I'm going to use this getchar menu in order to open a file from Template. And after these are going to see that this template is now going to appear among the default templates because I didn't use the option that is called Set as Default Template will appear once that I go to where it says My Templates. So with this in mind, you're going to notice that the template has been saved within a sketcher. However, also going to be able to see the directory in which this template has been saved. If I follow this directory, you're going to notice that template that I just graded. So with this in mind, you can create your own styles, but also you will be able to save your own styles within your computer, which will be very useful when you're working on your projects or models, because you will be able to have different ways in order to present your project. But also, you will be able to set up a schedule based on the way that you reward while creating your models or projects. Nasa gouache center basis, actually very different. So using this tau builder. In other lessons, I'm going to show you how you can use this style builder in order to create styles that you can use while working you project. This means says their styles are pretty useful up to the point where you can add up pretty much anything you want in order to save the changes as a template. 101. Changing the Camera Position: The next lesson is going to be covering these scenes and animations. So because of this, I'm going to cover a little bit more that those are commands that you can actually use a record just the camera. Now these tools can actually be found on the sketch and many hormone specifically, once you click where it says camera, but also on the toolbar which you find in the orbit pan and zoom. Or in another words, on the camera toolbar. However, the tools that I haven't covered on this toolbar out of the position camera, I look around and walk. So I'm going to go over these three tools are commands because these ones and allows you to adjust the camera in a way that they can be used. Scenes and animations. If I use position camera, you are going to notice that now you're able to see the project based on the a high point. In other words, based on how a person would perceive the model. Now the a high, a set value that you can also see on the measurements. However, if you change that to our command to another one than the eye height is going to change based on any position of the camera. So with this in mind, you will be able to see a change on the a high based on other tools or commands suggests the orbit. So in order to avoid the influence of these tools, you can use once again, firstly shrink camera, but also once they use position camera, you will be able to change the default value of the i high based on the keyword. So you will be able to place 1 s the camera within the model. While at the same time, you're able to change the default value of the high, high. Recall our lives from where do you place the camera as well? Something for you to know is that the eye height is also based on the coordinates that you have in the model. Or in another words, this is going to be based on the origin of the model space. So what this means is that the value of BI Hi, it's going to be taking into account the relationship between the high and where you're placing the position camera. Where you place the position camera can have positive values and negative values on the c-axis. However, since the origin is going to be the same way, a high, It's going to change because the value of the eye is actually using the origin of the model space as a reference. Which is suddenly you can see if you use position camera based on the origin of the model. Now this is something that you can actually use in some models because of the fact that you can create or use different elements as reference. So I'm going to create a parts in order to show you the level of this tree compared to the origin of the model. So with this in mind, you can actually use extent references in order to position the camera. But also you can create your own references in order to use any specific position within the model, which is pretty useful in cases in which are mimicking the position of the camera. But you will have something like a theater. So the banana model that you're creating, you will be able to use substitution camera in order to mimic the way that you will be able to perceive our model in certain conditions as well. You're going to need to use the position camera every time that you want to use look around. Because look around is also intended for you to see the model a little bit differently, but you would do it based on the orbit. So the name is actually very fitting because they still recommend, actually allows you to load my random or over your grading. And you can see the value of the eye. There is being used on the interface R0 times, even when you use it with other tools like the European or the zoo as well. There is another tool program and that you can use in order to exploit the model. And this one is called Walk. Now these two argument, well, actually the weather name implies, which means that will allow you to walk around the project. However, it will allow you to walk around the project based on the position of the camera. So you're able to go back and forth between work and look around when you're not using the assumption. Now this option can be confusing at first because you press and hold in order to use it. While you're not using it, you automatically, you just look around as well. These two recommend allows you to speed up the process. Or in another words, instead of walking, you can actually run. So this means that when you use this to determine, you will be able to use contrast the keyword or Option on a Mac in order to run instead of walk. However, they still, Pergamon will also allow you a few options in order to decide how to use it. So e.g. you see from the keyboard, it will be able to move the camera left and right and up. What about? You will be able to use this in order to adjust the position of the camera without having to use another to recommend. And also selling important for you to know is that you can actually use this options at any point, which means that you will be able to run. But also other side, if you want a multi-camera part of town as well as left or right, while you send the wall to recommend. So you can increase the SP when it's being used with this tool, regardless of the options. As far as the elements that are creating this ketchup also use coalitions, which is something that is used in other softwares to avoid elements going through other elements. Again, this is waterfall is the character on going through the elements on the levels. Our next getchar is a little bit more simple because it prevents the camera from going through the elements they already graded on the model. So you can use it while also using other options of this tool. And a cyclic sign-on, you can use this tool to assign your model to others or in order to set up your scenes. So when they send mine, you can go back and forth within this options in order to walk through the model, which is going to be very useful migrating animations because we will be able to get an idea on how it is SketchUp is going to go from one camera to the other, which is Sunday. They are going to be able to see on the next lessons of this course. 102. Creating Scenes: Now in this lesson, I'm going to gray the first scene of the model that before doing this and going to position the camera based on how it went to present the model. So I'm going to be used in position camera as well as looking around in order to change the camera. However, also going to change the field of view and how they feel about you is something that I didn't cover so much on the previous lessons of this course. Because the field of view is used in order to change how you want to present your model to others. While at the same time, it changes how you view all these scenes at the same time, or all of these scenes independently. So if we put it in a different way, they feel about you, It's the same day and that you actually have to use the camera in order to pick pictures. So it's very important for you to know the angle or values that you want to use every time that you take a picture. Now let's sketch or you can actually input the exact value that you want to use. So you can actually have a little bit more toning, but also cyclic signer able to change the fill of view not only in putting the value, but also by essentially from the keyword while you send this to recommend. However, you will have more precision using the keyboard. So I'm just going to adjust the field of view in order to show you how the field of view changes the appearance of the model. Now I'm just going to change the Filipino this model. So you can see how you can capture the changes by just simply creating a scene. So I going to go to the Default tray for my specific link to these scenes panel in order to click the plus icon so I can create an insane. Now once they either this, we're going to get this window in order to let you know my most important thing about these scenes, which is the fact that every time that you create or update inosine, you're not necessarily changing the styles on the model. So these styles in this scene actually work together. However, you can add scenes and this tells independently. So in these lessons, I'm going to avoid making any changes to these styles they're already created for SketchUp. And after I click where it says greater scene, you're going to see where you have a toenail on the Styles panel. But also the user interface basic change, letting you know that the recently seen available. Now these scenes as such, will also allow you to create different type of cosines for different purposes. So this means that you can create any scene and it can actually be used for the interior of the projects. I'm going to grade the next I seen Mason the text panel to hide the elements of the second floor. And then I just going to use the tools on the camera toolbar to adjust the position of the camera on the model before using the field of view to adjust the camera for this scene is going to have even more. So as you can see, you can actually create a named therapy or the model by just simply using the scenes. However, basis actually not going to change how you create these scenes and what is going to be visible within the scenes. So before creating the scene and just go into, I chose the eye height, which means that I'm going to add in the position of the camera by using the tools recommends that relates to the camera. Now you can edit the tags and the objects before creating the scenes. And you can do this by just simply adjust and the visibility of the tags and the geometry by using the text panel and the outliner. But also there are other ways in which again the elements. So because of this, remember that you can use the hidden geometry and the heating objects in order to visualize the elements that you're hiding. Now as well, we can use that tax and the aligner. Different scenes with the options that are going to be covered within the course. Send this license and going to cover how you change, what you can see on these scenes, as well as how we visualize the model. Every scene. As a quick side note, there are different values that you can use for the internal views. However, the minimum or you can use as Philip view in order to have at this and appearance A65. Because if you go higher, why do you see in this scene is going to be really the story. While if you use less than that, the elements are going to appear too close to the camera. And also, you will still have to keep in mind the eye height that is being used. Because in some cases you might want to resemble what you can see when you're sitting down on a couch or a chair. Now after doing this, I can go into gray this scene. Nobody is in the same panel whereby you send the sketch of menu. I'm going to go to the sketch menu and then I go into collect praise his bill in order to where it says animation. So I can add another scene. Once again, I'm going to avoid making any changes to this style before creating the scene. Once then you've seen has been graded. You are going to notice a couple of things. One of them, you can still change what is possible within these scenes by just using the layers panel and the airliner. But also, you're going to say that there is an icon right next to where it says SN1. Now the second is going to be useful in order to search between these scenes that you created in case that you have multiple scenes and something else while for you to notice is that every time they use cycle between the scenes, you are going to get any small animation. So from this point forward, everything related to the scenes, it's going to be a little bit more complex. 103. The Options on the Scenes Panel: Now this lesson, what I'm going to show you, how the changes that you can do on the scenes base and other properties or features they have in SketchUp. So I'm going to start with the shadows. So I'm going to use the shadows panel in order to enable the shadows, but also in order to change the shadows that are going to use in this scene. Which means that you can enable or disable the shadows depending if you want to use them or not. So you can change the hour in the day used to determine how the shadows are. Shadows will impact the model. But also you are able to change the intensity of the light in interfaces, or even the intensity of the shadows created by deadline while creating or updating your scenes. However, you will need to make sure that you have the option to paint the shadows on the scenes. So I'm going to collapse the shadows panel in order to expand. Once again, this seems panel. And once the writer is, you are going to be able to see. But if you say, well, the option in order to update the shadows, the shadows will now be saved if you update the scene. So you will need to give this in mind when you make changes on the other features may have any SketchUp. As a quick sign-on, since you can also use the sun for shading. You can also update this option in order for you to determine if the sun will impact the parents some tomorrow without actually creating shadows and the model. So you can enable or disable this option on all these things at the same time are chosen individual scenes. Now as well, you will need to enable or disable the assumptions on every scene. Which means that you can have the scenes which shadows and other scenes without shadows, which is suddenly you can easily notice when you change between the scenes. Now you can write on your file. And what this means say, you can even disable the option that is called camera and location, which will actually stop at SketchUp from updating the camera position every time that you update the gamer. So this means that you can't even keep the position of the camera that you had at first. You don't have to worry about moving the camera around before updating via scene. Which is going to be very useful if you have multiple scenes. But also if you're constantly changing the position of the camera while making changes to the scene or in another words, while changing e.g. the shadows. Additional deposition of the camera is very important because this determines not only the shadows and the model. Now as well, every time that you obey any scene, you will also be able to enable or disable the assumptions, which is the way that our sketch and make sure that you know, what is going to be updated on the scenes. Now it's like we excite them from article. The shadows are going to be graded on the surface of the model. The surface at the model is actually determined by the origin of the model space. So everything below the monospace is not going to have any shadows. And also below the name, you are going to see a field. You're going to see that you can also add a description. So you're going to be able to add a description for each of the scenes in case that there is something important about any of these things. But also, you can use this as a reminder of why you created this scene. In another words, on how you're going to use it. Or you can even use this as a reminder. If I change, we are going to be doing on the scene later on. They are going to be doing on the scene later on. As a quick side note, once you start making changes to the assumptions, you are going to notice that every time you create a new scene, the options that are enabled or disabled will be carry over to the new scenes. Now as well, by using these things panel, you are going to be able to change the name of this scene. So the options that you have on the details will be a standard options for the new scenes. But you're great on your moral essence. You're able to cranial scenes, but also rename the existing scenes. You're also going to be able to delete these scenes. And there's a quick sign-up. If you don't want to see that detail, every scene, you can collapse or expand the details are using this icon. So with this in mind, you will be able to address things or you send applause. But also you will be able to delete this since my x and the minus sign, we are going to be able to use Control C in order to undo the changes as you normally would. Now with this in mind, you're also going to see you're going to have a different way in order to do most other changes that you can do by Sunday since panel. If you hover any of these scenes, and then you use the mouse. In order to open this menu, you're going to see that you will have most of the same options that you have on these things panel, which means that you will be able to update. But also you are going to be able to change the order of these scenes. In another words, you will be able to arrange the scenes by using move left, move right, which is the same thing that you can do by using more pressing, hot, pressing down on this seems panel as well. You're going to be able to add scenes, which means they are also going to be able to Libya scenes, but also rename the scenes. So there is a lot of things that you can do in different ways in case they even want to use. But before tray as well, you're going to see me, you will have a standard options, right, where it says view options. So you're going to be able to use large terminals, small thumbnails. Ladies, are the default one, which is Thetis. But also if you want, you will be able to even disable. This seems to know. So you don't even have to use that thumbnails if you don't want to know this options, determine how you visualize these scenes on the Essence panel. However, once you have multiple things, you might want to say some resources, because the total nails change once the scenes. So paid in these scenes might even pay some extra time if we have seen is very complex. But also, every time you make changes to the scene, you can also rotate the tool now. And Kay said the tool name is not reflecting the changes that you have done to the scene. And with all this means, say, you are going to be able to use this options anyway, V1, what Morgan in the model. But also we are going to see it on this menu. You will also find the standard options that you have on these scenes. Or in another words, it will be able to add, update, weaning, and believe the scenes by also using this menu. So quick sign-on, you're also going to be able to hide the details by using this menu. So as you can see, there are different ways in order for you to do pretty much the same thing. However, if you start adding multiple scenes as SketchUp also gives you a way in order for you to find the scenes. So once the grade more than two scenes, it will be able to use the filter in order to find the scenes by the sender name of this scene. So all this means say, the scenes are actually pretty easy to use once you get used to them. Because most of the changes that you can do to these scenes are changes that are going to be doing to your model quite a lot. So the only thing that you need to decide why you want to update and why do you want to leave a series. And as I pick signer, remember the scenes and also be modified by using these styles. Because that is the details on these things. Panel also includes a lot of things that you can do when everything is tau at cosine pi is another panels. 104. Changing what Elements can you see on the Scenes: Now when grading and updating their scenes are also going to see that there are specific options just for the tax and the hidden geometry. So when they send mine, I'm going to show you in this lesson what happens when you use these assumptions while working on these things? So I'm going to start first by the tax or more specifically, I'm going to show you how to disable and enable that tags within the scenes. So the first thing that you will need to remember is that if you create a new scene is going to be based on everything about the current model, which is going to include reposition camera and the tax. However, you are going to be able to disable or enable the texts on a particular scene without making changes to the scene. Hello, so you can update the changes, which also means that you can update the changes on the scenes are also going to sit around the text. So when they send mine, you're going to be able to hide the elements or you don't want to see by using the text, which is actually very useful if you are using the tags in order to organize your model. Now this option will not actually change the elements within the tags. So because of this, we can use this option, the elements that make the groups or the components. But also you can use this with a tags or the tax folders. Once again, you're going to see that the options that you enable or disable will be carry over. Once you create an inosine, the options that you have in the details will be a standard options for the new scenes for your grade on your model. So before creating a new scene or even before updating any of these scenes, you will need to consider if you want to enable or disable any of these options. Now as well, Since you're able to do this, but attacks, you're also going to be able to do this whether hidden geometry. So you can hide the elements as you normally would. And then you simply use the option that is called hidden geometry in order to decide if you want to update the geometry that you hide and these scenes. So with this in mind, you will be able to hide or unhide different elements depending on where you went to to see inside the model. So this option is a good alternative to use and attacks, mainly because this ketchup is built around grading groups and components for immortals. I know. So it's a quick sign-on. You are going to see the ones that you hold these options. You are going to get a tool tip and you know what each of these assumptions is focused on. And I said, great sign-on, permanent, you can visualize the hearing objects based on the escalator many and as well from article this is the same thing you can do, base and the liner. So it doesn't matter if you hide the elements based on the menu that you open with a mouse, model info or the airliner, because they actually do the same thing. Alright, another words, all these options hide the geometry. Now as well as any important for you to know is that the hearing geometry is not exactly the same thing as the hearing objects because it is new. Actually have the option in order to hide the geometry based on groups and components. Or in another words, based on the heating objects. But also you have the option in order to hide the elements that are not within groups and components. So what this means is that when you went to high Elements, their side groups and components, you actually need to use a different option on these scenes panel. Now, all of these options will allow you to hide elements and these scenes, a stress that assumption will allow you to hide the elements that are either not want to use within groups or components. So you might want to use this when the terrain or elements that might be also on a tag, but you need to maintain based upon the model arrow times. So in order to illustrate this a little bit better, I'm going to create a shape outside of the groups and the components. Sorry, I'm going to grade the following shape within this model. So I can simply use the Option or high once I created a shape. But more importantly, you are going to notice that I now combating the shape into ICU for our component. But also, you are going to see that I'm using hidden geometry instead of hitting objects. And this is because the geometry is everything within the model, including the groups and the components. So hidden geometry will allow you to see the geometry that is getting away outside of the groups and the components and started doing holidays. I'm just simply going to use the options in order to update the scenes without taking into account the geometry that I just hide. So as you can see us and the top level A1 geometry is not the same thing as using hidden objects. Now these might be a little bit confusing if you're used to as SketchUp. Yes, using the hidden geometry, makers by SketchUp doesn't actually specify which one is wage, except for the naming of the options being very similar to the options that you have on these SketchUp menu. Or more specifically here in geometry and hitting objects. So this option is you will be able to determine why do you want to see or why do you want to hide when the model based on the tags that groups and the components and the geometry that is not within the groups or components. 105. Creating Animations: Now this lesson, I'm going to cover how you create animations. However, very sudden and very important for you to know about the animations in SketchUp. For my specifically about native animations in a SketchUp. And this is better sketch of this and allow you to animate objects. So with this in mind, you're not going to be able to move elements in one of your scenes and then move the element once again on another scene. So you're not able to create animations while also animating the objects in a sketch of what you do is pretty much a presentation of your model through an animation created based on the position of the camera for my specific, based on the position of these scenes. However, you're going to be able to change the default time that is used in order to transition between one scene and the other. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see how much time is going to pay in order to change between one scene and the other. Additionally, you don't need to change this part if you don't want to, in order to define how the animation will play out because you can simply disable the same transitions. But also there is a value that is called the Les, which is the amount of time that it takes before the translation actually starts. There is a value for that transition as such, but also a value that is going to determine how long it's going to take the translation to start. So this is going to be very useful when having multiple scenes are when trying to create a specific effect. As a quick side note, the changes can be done at any point while working model. So you can create different animations with different values in case they are going to add the result to be the editor. So you're going to be able to change the values are used with different stations in order to see different results. Might also in case they are going to be using my friends softwares in order to edit the files that you can create by using SketchUp. Now these settings can also be changed by Sunday Sketch or menu. So you're going to be able to use the sketch, your money in order to cover where it says animation. So if you use this settings, are going to be able to open once again, the modelling for window in order to change the scenes translations and they seen delay. So this means you are going to be able to open the modeling for window, or more specifically, the section that is for animation on the modeling for window. Next one is scheduled. You don't need to manually cycle through these things by using the interface. We have seen Spinal. And this is because when these get your menu, we're going to have access to an option that allows you to play the animation. And this one is right below the standard options having these mania. But also you're going to see how you can go from one scene to the other, as well as the circuit right next to the name, if applicable, as well, you will be able to enable or disable these things panel. Now this case, I'm just going to leave it like it is. In order to show you what happens when you use the option that is called play. So once you click on play, you are going to be able to see the animation based on the same strand stations and they seem delay. But more importantly, based on these scenes that you've already created. Now with all this being said, you also have the option to sign if you want to remove any of these scenes from the animation. So what this means is that you can create scenes that you might be using just for the presentation of your model. Or more specifically, essays that you might want to use in order to grade the research says that you're going to be using for our presentation. And this includes the new model by using layer. So when you create a new scene, you can enable or disable and is seen within an animation by using an option that you have in the details. So if you uncheck races, including animation, we have seen, we no longer show once you play the animation now as well. So only for you to notice is that this option is now going to be available once you ever seen. So you won't see the option that is called floating animation on this window. When you are they the scenes, including animation is like the name and the description in the sense that they're independent on every scene. Additionally, SketchUp will allow you to place your lines if the scene is not included on the animation, because the name of the animation will not be in parentheses. So with this, it will be able to see if this scene is going to be included or none. And animations, unless they use parentheses on the name of your scenes as well. Since this assumption makes them run including or excluding these scenes from the animations, then the best way in order for you to see the result of using this option is by actually playing the animation. So with this in mind, you will be able to see how the animation is going to play out if you include or exclude any of these things. And this will be also important because with this, you don't have to delete the scenes, but you don't want your animation. So with this, we are going to be able to see the result of the changes that you have done to these scenes at the same time, but also why you can actually export if you choose to. So what I'm going to do in this case is actually use the sketch menu in order to four where he says Export and then select the option that is called animation. Now this one will allow you to export the animation may send the different types you can select. Now if you select the images, you will be exploring every image independently. So every image will be exported in a single folder based on the name that you selected as the file name. And also the size. Image file is going to be based on the values that you select on the export options window. So this is pretty much the same as exporting as an image, but for every frame of the animation. And if you use a video format, you are going to be able to change the values of the file that you're going to export based on your personal preferences. So with this in mind, you can sell way to do it based on standard resolutions, but also you can go to customs in order to change it based on your screen resolution. Additionally, the resolution that you have by default is the same whether you have in your monitor, even though you don't have to use them as the resolution of the video. So you can use an option that is called costume in order to change the resolution of the video to a value of your choosing. However, you do have to keep in mind that if you use custom, you won't be able to preview properly the file you're exporting if the monitor hustling have the resolution. So I'm going to use every solution available on this monitor so you can see how the preview looks like. Now as well. Since this is a video, you're also going to be able to decide the frame rate, among other options related to the media. But also you will be able to use the specific options for next ketchup, such as e.g. look, they're starting a scene. And also when a standard option in order to always prompt the animation options before clicking where it says Export. And also anti-alias rendering as well. If you don't like this values, you can always restore the face value is back to default base and restore the force. So after you know what you want, you just have to click on Okay, before exporting the file, makes him the name of your choosing. And as a quick side note, these options will also determine the size of the file. Now the last thing that I'm going to do is actually export this file in order for you to see the actual process of exporting the file. The reason why I wanted to show you this is because you can actually cancel the process. And SketchUp is still going to create a PDF. Mason how much he was able to export if you don't believe the father is already graded. So what this means that a sketch or great, so reframe independently and then combine them in order to create a video. So if you ever have any issues exporting your scene, you can cancel the cosine in order to keep, at the very least what a sketch of what's already able to explore. Which means they are going to be able to change the options in cases in which exporting the animation takes too long. And last but not least, I'm just going to show you the result. In another words, I'm going to open the file. So as you notice, writing animations in a skater is actually pretty easy and pretty useful. Now what we're going to be a few limitations that can be resolved with the extensions that you can actually reserve with the extensions. 106. Creating a Solar Study: Now, as I mentioned in a previous lesson, you can actually create solar studies based and the shadows. Now network, right? A solid starting. You also need the animations because when you do, it's great. These scenes they will use in order to query the salary study and then change the settings and the shadows are nature these scenes. So this means that you will need to use at least two scenes. From our precision. You will need to use more than two lessons at the same time. So with this in mind, you will be able to change the settings on the individual scenes in the panel that time, that day. But also the other settings here you have an shadows panel. So this means that you can visualize our very basic animation of your model by using the same camera. As well as you remember, you can always play the animation in order for you to see the result of the changes that you're doing to these things. But also we will be able to use multiple positions on the camera. However, regardless, if you use the same position camera for these scenes, or if you use a different camera precision for these scenes that you are using, you will still need to change the shadows of these things individually. However, this seems panel allows you to do this very easily because you will be able to edit the settings and these scenes before you send the option that is called update, seventies and mine, you will be able to update these scenes, the positions of the cameras and the shadows by just simply selecting the scenes once the either the changes that you wanted to and then just click where it says update. So this means that you don't have to be within the scene that you want to add it before you click where it says update, which is something that is going to apply to all the changes that you can do on the scene. After the only changes on this panel. I'm just going to play the animation once again in order for you to see the result. And every time they play the animation, you are going to be able to see once again how these changes affect the animation. Now as well. You can also change between the scenes by using this in spinal. Hey, in order for you to see how they frame one is seen from the other. But more importantly, in order for you to see how the scene it's going to look like before even playing the animation. So you can make the necessary changes before you export the animation or before you show the animation when NSK job to somebody else. As well as I mentioned before, since we are able to change our position on all these scenes, but also changing the shadows. And then you're also going to be able to get not only a different result, but you will be able to add it over. So even more by changing all these settings and the shadows panel. What this means is that you can change intensity with a line that also that are depending on the scene. So we call this means say, you are going to notice that you will be able to add a little bit more toning to these scenes by using the shadows panel. That more specifically, when you use the shadows in a retrograde and solar starting as well as retrograde and animation based on how the shadows are going to show in the model on the hour and they, they are selecting. So if you want the model to look a little bit more Tower at noon, you're going to actually do this. Or you can do it the other way around. Depending on where you went to achieve with the model, we will be able to do different things and you send the settings for more importantly, by using the animations. So as you might have noticed, so to this point, these things are actually very useful in many different ways, especially on the animations, because animation is depend on the scene. 107. Creating A Mechanical Part (Type 1): Now for this exercise, I'm going to create a part or element that you can use on other party. So in order to do this, I'm going to create a few groups that aren't going to join together. So I go into play the first group by grading the following shape. And that's why we're working on this license or in another words, an exercise for this course. And also going to be using the measurements that you can see on the user interface. But also, I'm going to show as much as possible in the reference or risotto, the exercise throughout the exercise. But also I going to be using each millimeter as it was a meter. And why is it greater than screw? I'm going to create a few guidelines where I can use in order to create all the elements for this part. Now the guidelines in this case will be pretty useful because that will actually destroy or change the groups. So these are mine. I will be able to use as references in order to edit the groups and components. Now with this in mind, you can also use the references in order for gray faces by just simply using tools or commands such as the arc. Because the arc will allow you to use tangent, letter grade and your radius. But also you suddenly are whereby you sent a circle. Now with this in mind, I'm going to create other shapes, myosin as references, the guidelines that are already graded. So I'm going to go into integrating other groups are components that are going to be using. As well as you remember, you can use a visual styles in order to make this a little bit easier in case you have any issues when it comes to selecting elements. Now when it comes to you saying that those are commands that you have on the toolbar we use in order to modify your model. That's why I'm going to play all the references based on the guidelines in order for greater component that are going to use on both sides of this element. As a quick side note, you'll get movie objects based on the measurements that you can see on the bottom right of the user interface. Or you can create new guidelines, but you can use as a reference. Now if you notice on this case and not really worrying too much when other groups and components, because they are not editing or changing the other ones that are already graded. This will make a little bit easier working with different groups or components because you can easily use intersect faces with model. This will make things a little bit easier once they work within the groups as well as within the components. So what this means, so I'm going to create a few other shapes, or in another words, a few other groups or components for the bass part or element. So I go into gray, the shape, also a sacrifice for this element. I'm going to create another element that I'm going to use on this side of the element. But also, I'm just going to add a little bit. I grew up there, I already graded because I'm going to change the thickness. Also cyclic center. Within this exercise, I'm going to be adding nodes because everything that I use throughout these lessons is already going on in the course. So these lessons are going to be more visual. Notes make this exercises less confusing. Now as well. Something else that you can do based on the guidelines is dimensioning the elements. Because whether guidelines, you're going to be able to grade references that you can use a lot of the grade the dimensions. Nasa quick sign-on. Some other dimensions will need to be placed within the groups or components because the dimensions recognize the edges of parks and circles, but only within the groups or components. A quick sign-on, rum or whatever, you can move the dimensions as CMO, any other elements within your model. So you need to leave the dimension where you originally placed it. So with this in mind, I'm going to create a few other dimensions for this model. Last but not least, I'm going to add it. I grew up there already greater for this model. So I can finish the mentioned in the part. Now as well Sunday for you to know about the dimensions, the dimensions that you place within a group or component are only going to be selectable within the group or component. So if you want to select all the dimensions, you will need to go within the groups and the components and editor select the dimensions. That's a quick sign up. Once they finish a model, you can scale the model based on the extra value that it needs to have my salary paid to our command, whereby you're simply using the scale to recommend. Now with all this being said, you can improve the appearance of the model. However, since they support, like ME is on an assembly and now go into grade any scene photos. I'm going to use the parallel protection for the camera where it's been used in the model. 108. Creating A Mechanical Part (Type 2): Now in this exercise and go lighter gray are part of that I can use for peace that I can use within an assembly. If you want to use a sketch or in a retrograde simple shapes, this exercise will allow you to get an idea of how you can create parts. Now in order to make this easier to appreciate, I'm going to create a few guidelines, but also I'm going to use the measurements, or in another words, the units are meters. And this is because the size of the piece, but also because it makes things a little bit easier when you can start dimensioning our model as well. You can also use centimeters in order to do this. Now as well when working on this license or in another words, an exercise for this course, also going to be using the measurements that you can see on the user interface. But also, I'm going to show as much as possible in the reference or resource or the exercise throughout the exercise as well. You can notice that aren't going to be using groups in order to make this a little bit easier. But I wasn't going to be using the intersections in order to make these groups look more cohesive one way or the other. Ones that I finished with this group I'm going to grade are the references that are going to use paint out of the crater another group. Now this shape is going to be a very simple shape, how it's going to have an inclination. So what this means is that after I use the extrude to recommend an added a shape, I'm also going to use the rotate tool or command by using a sub reference, the guidelines, they're already graded. Nasa quick signer and going to be using references may not have the greatest growth, but also I can rotate the references. So this means that you can keep the preferences based on their shape they want to gray. Now once again, I'm going to be great and references based on the main shape that aren't going to add it. Any medical save a little bit of time. You can use the flip along with the phases before you send this through to recommend or after you send the extreme. So I'm going to carry once again an extrusion, but I can use in order to finish this element. Well, I see nowadays I'm going to move this group another position that is going to have whatever this part. One of the last things that aren't going to do instead of a shape by creating an arc that I go into place by using this reference, which is in this quadrant of the circle. So after I do this, I'm going to use a circle in order to edit the shape. But also I'm going to use once again the intersections in order to finish editing the models into a single one. Now as well as you might have noticed here, same parasite quick context is actually pretty useful in this case. Now, so gouache signer and you copy the face of a circle that has lines on the face. You're going to see the ones that you face to face and analyze workflows will be based. And this happens when the lines are intersecting the ages octahedron geometry, or in another words, the HSD you cannot see when you create a circle or an arc. Now you can actually do this in many different ways. But as long as we're using groups and components are, is going to be a point in which you will need to hide the lines that you don't want to show, or you will need to explore their groups and components in order to create one single shape. However, you can actually get pretty much the same result either way, which is important for you to consider in cases in which you want to go back to our model layer already greater. Now, you might have noticed that we're working on this model. The intersection and the guidelines are pretty useful. But also, if you try to use the actual size of the pores, the camera will actually function and a little bit differently. But also if you try, you're going to see that you will need to change the precision on the units. So with this in mind, changing the scale after finishing the model is a little bit more convenient. 109. Creating A Door Hinge: And I'm going to create a hinge door. So in order to create a hinge, how we'll be using once again, meters as they were millimeters in order to grade the model a little bit easier. But also I'm going to be doing this, this way because I can later use that table to recommend for the scale, to recommend in order to change the size of the object. But also in case I don't want to use the dimensions. Now with this in mind, I go into this element by using components at the beginning. So with this in mind, I'm going to integrate both sides of the hinge by using components as long as I can. Now the shape that I'm creating will be used for these groups. So the shape as such will be actually based on the head of the screw, but also it will have enough space. You can even started this group. Now, next, I'm going to gray. I grew up with that I can use what the solid tools. So I'm going to grade the following group. And then I'm going to copy the group. We're going to use. I'm a hinge. But also since these are components I'm going to do is paste in place. So again, I do. What are the components at the same time? Now the Select tool there are going to use is going to be this extract, which as we remember, this one will subtract one element from another independently or do they use? Now, next I'm going to frame the shapes that I'm going to use underpin how the hinges word one way or the other point. In other words, in order to have the shapes that will allow this hinge to actually turn around the elements that are going to create at the center when working on this license or in another words, an exercise for this course. And also going to be using the measurements. So you can see on the user interface, but also I'm going to show as much as possible the reference or resource or the exercise throughout the exercise. Now I'm going to use the art in order to finish this shape, right? In other words, in order to make it look like this part is actually bending around the element that is used in order to work with both sides of the hinge. Nasa quick cyano, since I'm going to create an element at the center and also going to lead to reference. And I'm going to be using in order to do this later on as well. I'm going to use once again paste in place in order to place this phase within the components. However, since the components are going to be different one from the other, because they are going to work together. I'm going to make both of these components independent, but also Sunday now so you can do is actually use once again the solid tools. However, he is under Select tools for Craig new groups based on the component. So with this in mind, it will be creating new groups instead of components. So if you're the one I do this, you can use make your knee and then use intersect faces as therapy is into smaller groups. So in this case, it becomes a matter of preference. If you want to avoid this, you can actually use the intersections which is going to grade the same result. So I'm going to create these groups a funny way in order to finish the main shapes that aren't going to be using for the hinge. Also cyclic center. Within this exercise, I'm going to be adding nodes because everything that I use in this license is already going on in the course. So these lessons are going to be more visual. So I hope that denotes make this exercises less confusing. Nasa quick sino. And you can see the result of years and the solid tools when you select the groups that are created as a result. So in another words, they're going to see on the entity Info a name that is given to these groups. But also you will be able to verify that they are considered solid groups. Now the last element that are going to gray is the union between both of these groups. Or in another words, the element that is going to keep the hinge together. Now before you send the extrusion, you can use while edges in order to avoid making visible the lines that make this shape. Now before finishing where this model also going to scale the hinge for the actual size that is going to have before adding the shadows, the scenes, and so on. Now, a quick Center, since the hinge is actually meant to be used with other families are models, you actually will need to make sure that the origin of the hinge asexually place based on the precision that is going to have once they use this component within other model polar component. So this will become very important once you create more complex components. So you can instead use this component in order to gray images are schematics that you want to use by using layer because it's waiting head some file. So either way, it will be pretty useful when Morgan is scheduled as well. You can turn this model into a component in order to save independently, but also in order to use it within your own collection, which means that you will be able to use it and then other models for components. So because of this theory, genetic component will become very important because this will determine replacement this component and then other models for components. 110. Creating A Hinge for a Glass Door Part 1: Now I'm going into greater hinge. However, this time is going to be a hinge for Atlas Store. So in this case, I'm going to create the basic parts that are used in order to query the hinge, which means that I'm going to create what is possible and the component that makes the hinge functional. So with this in mind, I'm going to avoid creating a few additional elements that are specific to the manufacturer. However, by adding these elements, we are going to be able to add the remaining ones based on the specifications that are given to you. So I'm going to start first by creating the components that you can actually see on the panels. Now it's why when working on this license or in another words, an exercise for this course. And also going to be using the measurements that you can see on the user interface. But also, I'm going to show as much as possible the reference, a result of the exercise throughout the exercise. But also are going to be using each millimeter as it was a meter. Now in this case, I'm going to create a few elements later on. So I'm going to make a few changes on this shape by adding a few lines based on the elements that I'm going to place, but also based on the thickness of the panel where it's going to be used for the glass door. Sorry for grading these components. I'm just going to place the other one on the opposite direction. Nafta grading the components. I go into multi-component just for a moment. And the main thing, I create a shape that are going to use in order to rotate the panel. Or in another words, this one is the one that is going to determine the rotation. Now cyclic sign-on and using once again as a reference, the placement that you wouldn't normally have one place and the hinge. However, since this is intended for the curving wall, or in another words, a 100 glass panels that you might have in your model. Then you will need to consider how you use the panels before selecting the origin of these components. And in this case, I'm going to create a shape that I'm going to use for the elements in order to attach this part of the hinge. But also, as you can see, you can edit the shape by removing, but also by adding a few other lines, or in another words, by regrade and the faces that you should have on this component. Next, I'm going to frame the shapes that I'm going to use a narrative have the hinges word one way or the other. In other words, in order to have the shapes that will allow this hinge to actually turn around the elements that are going to create a dissenter. Now with this in mind, one is the greater the shape and go into gray the shape that it's going to be inserted on the other part of the hinge after great and I component based on their shape, they're already graded. So with this in mind, I going to use the following me in order to grade the shape that I'm going to be using as a group so I can't use it. We'll add a component as well. I'm going to edit the component based on the group that I just created. And this is because I want to add a little bit of detail to this component. Now once I created this component and also going through the components that I just created in order to adjust them. So they component there are greater As a quick sign on, the measurement that I'm using for this spacing has to do with the thickness of the panel. So the thickness of the panel that I'm considering is 50 millimeters. 111. Creating A Hinge for a Glass Door Part 2: Now I'm terrible. I know a lot is handwriting gray and the other part of the hinge, or in another words, the element that is placed on the glass door. So for the singular idea is as a reference, the component, they are very graded because it's going to be pretty much the same. However, this one is going to be used in order to host that go with direct greater on the other component. This component is going to be unique and also is going to have another space so I can insert the other component. Now in this case, I'm going to edit the shape in order to make this hinge functional based on the elements that I use in order to rotate by Glassdoor. Now after this, I'm going to edit what is going to be used in order to cover the elements radius for the panel. Or in another words, what is inside by editing the shape. So I'm going to edit the shape just a little bit taken into account how the door is going to turn. Nasa quick sign and all these measurements will take into account the specifications that are given to you. So depending on the specifications that you have access to, you will be able to see that some values are going to change. So for example, the measurement that are using in order to rotate the glass door, A65. However, you might have a different measurement when it comes to the separation between these components and this term after Glassdoor. And now also use the R To **** with the turn of the glass door. Now in this case, I'm going to use the R in order to edit the shape, in order to turn 90 degrees. Now with this in mind, I'm going to try to make this as simple as possible in order to avoid creating unnecessary lines. So because of this anger and abuse and be upset, but also the issue as well as demo or demand. Now once they're finished with this part of the hinge and just go into the leaf, any unnecessary lines. But also I'm going to place the elements whether they were meant to be. Now, so quick to say now, the shape of this cover is going to be based on the elements that are already graded, but they're also going to take into account the rotation of the glass door. So because of this, they settlement doesn't actually touch the component that I created in order to rotate the glass door. Now last but not least, I'm going to create another element that is going to be used, a 100 base at the door sign, just going to copy the components that I created. And I'm going to edit this components. Or in another words, I'm going to make some of these components you need in order to edit them based on the shapes that I need to create in order to use them on a glass door. So because of this, I'm going to delete a few things, but also I'm going to create a play that can be attached to the floor. Now, since this play will need to be attached to the floor, I'm going to create a few calls, but also I'm going to create a few basic shapes that aren't going to be used with the host. So in order to make sure that the shapes intersect, but the faces, I can use intersect faces, but also I can simply move faces. They're already intersect and the phase to wherever they need to be. So either way, the result is going to be the same. Now as well, if you wanted to create a different shape or if you need to write a different shape for this component, you can actually make this component you need before copying this component. But also you can make a unique, once again, in case they want to keep both of the shapes as an alternative. And now I'm just going to edit the shape and out of the grave and you component. That's a quick sign up. Once they've finished a model, you can scale the model based on the actual value that it needs to have mice and they pay to our command, whereby you're simply using this scale to recommend. Now with this in mind, you can do all of this in both sides. So the element, but also since both sides are going to be the same, you can do all the war in just one of them and then just copy the shapes and the other one. So with this in mind, I'm just going to finish by making sure that all the faces are working properly, basically intersect phases before I decide which of these components I want to keep. Now since one of them has pretty much as saying one as the one that is on the other side. I'm just going to keep this one because it's unique in Arabic, keep it as an alternative. Now as well, where you can scale the element in order to use the size that you would normally use, whether new projects. And also something for you to take into account is that you might want to have these elements as independent components in order for you to have different versions for alternatives, for the friend, the size. And also because you might feel the receipts here, placing these components independently on the glass door. The top and the bottom has independent components. So in another words, you can create all the components at the same time because it's easier. And also because you can create multiple alternatives based on these elements, which also means you can use same as in order to save these components independently. Or in another words, in your own library. 112. Creating a Vault: Now this lesson I wanted to show you how you can create a traditional bulb, which you can still fine. And a few European constructions, such as the ones that were used for storage. Now, this case what I'm going to use our components and also intersections. So what I'm going to do is actually show you how to do this by using two alternatives. One of them is the solids and the other one is for space and the components. And in both cases, I'm going to be using the intersections. Now it's why when working on this license for this course, also going to be using the measurements. So you can see on the user interface, but also where I'm going to show as much as possible the reference or resource or the exercise throughout the exercise. Now the first thing they're going to do is create a solid hormone, specifically, the solid curves, so I can use the solid tools. And as we go, so solids are going to be the same one. I'm just going to use the capital letter writing a copy of the code, which is something that you can do by just simply is in control. And if you have any problem with the axis, just need to use the arrows and the keyword in order to choose dx is they want to use finished with the two salads. I'm just going to show you the result of using one of these tools. So in this case I'm going to use the union, which also means that you will be able to use the other options for the solids, such as the split. Somebody isn't mine, you will be able to see the difference between SN1 and the other. Sunday night. You can see when you use the union, you will have a lot of lines that you will need to delete. So if you use this tool and then you explore the groups, you're going to see. They're going to find all the tools a little bit more efficient, such as, for example, the split. However, if you use this split, you won't have to delete so many lines if you know how to use the selection options. So with this in mind, and just going to make sure that I select only the lines that I want to delete in order to delete them. Now when you're the leader lines memorable, you can change the visual styles if you're not able to visualize what you want to delete. Because when you use a sketching for quite awhile, you only change the visual styles when something is underway because you get used to differentiating between the lines that are highlighted and the ones that are not. Also cyclic sign-on. Within this exercise, I'm going to be adding nodes because everything that I use in these lessons is already going on in the course. So this lessons are going to be more visual. So I hope that their notes make this exercises less confusing. Now once they're finished with intersections and going to show you the result on the first size. And also, you can turn this shape into a component. You can add other at any point. Now since you can use the solids, are also going to be able to use intersections because the solids are based on intersections. So with this in mind, I'm going to create the same shape migrating or component. But also I'm going to create a shape that is going to determine how we're going to call it the component. And as a quick sign-on, when you are going to insert shape. In order to do this, the advice that I can give you is to read through the shape and the shape that you want to con or edit so you don't have any unnecessary intersections. And then I just going to use the intersection and I want to use in order to get the shape. So with this in mind, you will have two options in order to do the same thing. Now the same time, you can do the same thing, whether base of the ball in case you make changes to the supports or columns in a way where you cannot join them together. Because as you can see, these components are you someday you're going to assess a reference. So having one single component for the columns can actually be a little bit easier if you add up the columns. Further is also going to be the center flip alone. Now with this makes sense, and also going to be sent to flip around in order to grade and other pole myosin, the existing components. So I'm going to make sure that these components here you need in order to avoid making changes to the existing bot. So I'm going to add a V-shape pretty much the same way. Which means that are going to use the intersections. But also in order to make this a little bit different and also going to change the shape that I want to use for this bulb. And as well, you're going to see the ones again. I'm going to extrude the object, but are you going to use point of intersection B on the object that are going to intersect. And last but not least, our editor columns based on the newborn. So I'm going to change this color and a little bit. Now the reason why you sort of lip alone so that it changes the right two are going to carry over the other components. So I don't have to reorient the components later on. So this just makes a few things a little bit more efficient. Now, a quick sign, there is another way in order to make the components you need. And this is by using card or in another words Control X. And then you simply using control C or unto, followed by paste in place because this will automatically place the components, the worker, while also keeping the original components. So this means that you will have the two components at the same time. Or in another words, you will get the same result as using menu name before Arabella components. And the last thing that I'm going to do is change in the model. So you can get us every song, the image that you can see when I started in the lesson. So I'm going to use the materials, the shadows they feel about you, and also these scenes in order to get the final look that I wanted to have for this exercise. 113. Creating alternative Sofa Seats: Now for this lesson, I'm actually going to do something very simple, but also a little bit different compared to the sofa. And this is going to be a cushion that is going to use the different methods that I used before. So what this means is there are going to create a profile, but also again, use for the follow me. How in this case, I'm going to create a profile a little bit different when it comes to the use of the reference, but also when it comes to the fact that this profile is certainly going to be for the exterior, the shape. As well as a quick side note, you are going to say that the size is actually pretty large because I can use the scale to recommend once the element has been created, but also because of the camera. Now as well, I'm going to edit the path in order to create a bigger shape. Now once they're finished job references, I'm going to copy the references that are going to use because I can use this references for additional shapes for this model. While the healing geometry allows you to grave faces that normally will not be there unless the Ukraine and unnecessary lines in order to create these faces. Now what this means, I'm going to create additional phases, have the shape that more importantly and go into great ago based on the face that are graded. Now the reason why I created equivalent phase and this phase is because I'm going to be using the sandbox toolbar in order to edit the group. So because of this hangry, the gray additional ages for this phase. So I can actually use this edges in order to use that tool circumvents the sandbox Dover. More specifically, you can add additional detail if you use the two circumstance where you can find on the sandbox toolbar, such as, for example, fragment that is called love. The price phases to shape after rain mesh. So as you notice, and actually using pretty much the same methods that I used before. However, in this case, I will be using them a little bit differently. A quick sign I see you notice I'm changing the radius of this tool or demand in order to avoid distorting the union within the poor and the rest of the elements as well. This allows you to select the values not only by using the mouse, but also by using the keyword. So you can use this to order men in order to have more precision like other tools or comments that you have in SketchUp. Which means that you can use that double-click on the mouse in order to retain the last value that was used by these two are command. But also you can use these snaps, my list sliding the high they want to use. Now once that I finished with this elements and also going to use stuffed them and has smooth edges. May not have it change how you visualize the group. But awesome. In order to avoid doing the same thing on the other side, I'm going to turn the screw into Ag component. Now also during days, because technically you are only supposed to be able to see just one of the components are all times. As well and grading components. Because if you want to, you can actually explore the components in order to erase unnecessary edges and unnecessary faces, which is suddenly you can do in case that the final model has any issues with performance. Now last but not least, I'm going to change the scale of this element because I'm going to start editing this element in order to add them to other models. Which means that I'm going to assign the materials to the different shapes that make this element. Well, I'm going to start making a few changes, such as, for example, for aiding a group might use and the original references. So I can later how the crew in order the greatest scene after adding the shadows and after also changing definitely will be. So with this in mind, I'm going to be changing the appearance of the model from my specifically how the model is presented before creating this scene. Now, if follow this on mine, I'm just going to IDSA into this model before doing something else on the same file. 114. Creating a Truss: Now for the next lesson, or in another words, for the next exercise, I'm going to create our basic metallic structure. So I'm going to show you how you can create a metallic structure. So I'm going to show you how you can create a metallic structure by just simply using components and references as well. I'm going to create this metallic structure following an arc. So for this, I'm going to take into account the amount of segments that I want to use. Now this case, you can use 36 segments or 48 depending on the size of the structure. So in this case, I'm going to be using 36. And that's why when working on this license for this course. And also going to be using the measurements so you can see on the user interface, but also I'm going to show as much as possible the reference or resource or the exercise throughout the exercise. Now as well, you're going to notice that I'm working, I'm sorry, the references that are graded. And this is in order to avoid any confusions when it comes to the references and the components that are going to be grading. But also because I can use the references in a retrograde other objects. Now when you create an instructor lady is the most important thing that you will need is the references. Because depending on the references they are going to be using, you're going to get a different result. So the additional support when I'm going to ask for the structure is not going to be taken into account. The union of the segments of the ER right at the midpoint of the segments of the ER. Because in order to provide an accurate measurement, you will need to know which values were using when it comes to the segments. And that is also the reason the amount of segments. So VR is very important. Now there is another way in which you can do this in case you're given a specific objects that were already fabricated and you were just told to use them. Or maybe that's one of the only options you have available when it comes to the budget or when it comes to the fabrication. Now, once that I have the reference that are going to be using for the additional supports and go into gray, the main structure by using the Follow me. And then I just go into gray. The additional structure within this component. Remember, if you have any issues, you can use the visual styles. But also you can copy I component to an area medicine instructor, or you can just place the components somewhere else. Now once that I have the component, I'm just going to copy this component Mason as a reference. The center of the arc that I use in another gray, the main shapes. So as you can see, the references are very important when creating this type of instructors. Now as well, since this is going to be the same shape on both sides, I'm going to be using this one minus i component instead of a group. Won't have to copy these components on the other side, which is something that you can do one at a time. Or you can simply use the reference once again. And as well as you can notice, I'm going to create the components. Why isn't all the structure that I've already graded? This way? I don't have to create all the structure at the same time. And this is something that you can apply in a little gray. The rest of the structure. In other words, this rupture, but it's going to be using in the other direction right now. So something that I going to do is actually copy this component to the other side because they are going to be the same. So I don't have to grade both sides at the same time. But also I'm going to use the flipper lawn in order to make sure that all the changes that I do to one side are going to be exactly the same on the other side. So as you notice, the flip alarm is pretty useful if you're working with symmetry. Nasa going signup, reason what I created a structure with a few elements at the beginning and the end is because I'm also going to gray as support for this structure. Now the support is not going to be some detail. However, I will create a support that is going to be useful within this model. Now as well, I'm going to be using the support at both ends, so the Instructure, but also on both of these structures. So because of this, I will be using once again the components and the flipper long. And now I'm just going to continue editing the shape in order to make it a little bit more acceptable when it comes to the model and more specifically based on the structure. But it's going to support that's what I'm going to create. A few additional details that aren't going to use in order to provide additional support for this rupture. So you can use this through to our demand, but also you can use the following me. So when you use these tools, you will get something like this. As you might have noticed as well, I'm placing the entire model based on the origin. And this is because the shadows are also placed based on the origin. So in another words, if you play something below the origin, the shadows are still going to be place. Also based on the origin, based on the origin hormone, specifically based on the z-axis. So you're not going to have negative values when it comes to the placement of the shadow. Why one of the last things that are going to do besides finishing the support is actually cleaner the model just a little bit, which means that I'm going to remove any unnecessary reference for the components. I'm going to move the reference that I used for the elements that are used with the main structure. I would say that the component, but also I'm going to be using them in order to make sure that everything is going to be placed on the same point. Also, as you might have noticed, I'm using white a lot based in place because this allows you to place the elements in the same position within groups, components. But also it allows me to place elements outside of the groups and components and the same position. And when it comes to the components, you can actually use them in order to make unique the components. If you use Control X before using control C, and then you paste in place. As well as you might have noticed, you can also create a separation between the support or in another words, this structure from the roof. How are this will depend on the type of roof that you're using. So if it is not going to grade, you may actually need to use supports in case there is some panels, aesthetic concrete. Now the last thing that I'm going to grade, essentially the top of the structure, which I'm going to be using for this Sunday. Very simple, or in another words, and go into gray at the mitochondrion. But also, I'm going to take into account, let's suppose everybody grading with this in mind, you're going to get an a structure that is going to look like this as well once everything is graded and just going to make sure that all the references outside of the model. But also I'm going to use once again the materials, the shadows, the field of view, and these scenes in order to create the image, let us use as a reference for this lesson or exercise. 115. Creating alternative Sofa Cushions: Laughter gradient this scene and actually go into query and other elements. Mason the references, they're great at the beginning. So with this in mind, I'm going to modify the profile, but also the path of this element. As well as you notice, I'm actually doing this and a copy of that group there are graded by using the references. And as well, you're going to notice that I'm going to grade this element within this group. And in order to create this new element, I'm going to change the profile, this element as well as the path. And as well, you're going to see that this pattern is actually going to be graded based on the circle. And that's a great sign up. If you want a different result, you can actually use a different radius for the pet. After creating the basic shape, I'm just going to add any additional phases to this element before using the SQL to argument. And after scaling the element and just going to place this element on a different position before making a few changes on the appearance of the element. Which means that I'm going to be out in the same materials that I used before in order to keep the same appearance for the elements on all these models. Awesome ones that are added these materials. I'm going to be at an angle a little bit. So the faces of these elements after assigning the materials sign just going to use the upset as well as the moon to recommend. And I can do this the same way as well. Hence, more I can just simply copy these faces to the other side. Now once they're finished with the model and just go into is once again, soft and smooth pages in order to finish the shape. So as you notice, grading Cushing's is in this matter, is actually pretty easy and pretty convenient. But also as you can notice, you can add additional detail if we use the two circumstance where you can find the samples tuber. 116. Creating a Truss using Individual Elements: Now as I mentioned before, the solution that you can see on the model isn't a standard solution. Or in another words, it's a solution by using the yard. Or in some cases, we will actually need to work with a component that is already graded or in another words, that already exist. So when they send mine, I'm going to grade this model based on a reference, again, already exist within our drawing reconstruction. Or if someone tells you that this is the one that is going to be used. So I'm going to create a few reference lines that are going to use an editor graded components that you may already know about. So I'm pretty much creating base, which unlike measurements. However, this is just in order to give you the idea of body will be if you're given a specific component. Also cyclic sign-on. Within this exercise, I'm going to be adding nodes because everything that I use in this license is already When in the course. So these lessons are going to be more visual. So I hope that there is hope that the notes make these exercises less confusing. Now as a quick side note, instead of using two sets of structures that are connected by supports, I'm going to create a similar structure, but the one that I already graded. So I'm going to have another element at the bottom. So with this in mind and just go into gray, the components that are going to go over in on a specific durations based on the references. This lesson or exercise were most important to document. They still rotate two arguments because you can use it for the axis, but also what references where you can create yourself. Now cyclic sign on this case, and using the scale on the elements that are easier to use with this girl to argument instead of using it when the individual elements levitated before. This will save a little bit of time. So with this in mind, I'm going to grow first and linear structure by using multiple components or by using one single component with multiple instances within the group or some bone-in. The result is going to be something like this. Now cyclic sino, the reason why I'm saying that you cannot really determine how you're going to place the settlement is because even though you will have the radius unless the you know how to get the angle that you will need to have in order to place a second element and you won't be able to continue they are. So if you put it in a different way, you will need to know the actual measurements of a slice of pizza before actually cutting the pizza. And with this method, you will only need to create one segment or one slice in order to copy all the elements. So the only thing they will actually need to know is how much you will need the rugby in this segment in metal form. And he saw Celeste triangle. What I'm trying to say is that you won't have to use the geometry of this triangle in order to get the angles. So you're pretty much doing it in reverse sense. You have a, p, and b and c are equal, then you will be able to get the area, then base or the area and the measurements of the three sides, then you will be able to get the angles are using the formulas that are based on the area. So this will mean that this will actually take a little bit of time when it comes to the mat. But more importantly, this might be something that you're not interested in under oil and not either gray are shaped like this. Now this doesn't mean that you can actually use this if you want to work on the arcs. However, since there is no way. You determine the amount of segments and also the size of the segments that you want to use in order to create an art that the one thing that you will need to do is create your own references. Or in another words, they are clay when I use. So with this in mind, I'm going to create an R by using this component. But also I'm going to show you a few alternatives they use or something like this. So if you have to join or construction as a reference, you can take the measurements or you can use the measurements that are given to you in order to determine the component that you're going to be using. And then enter SketchUp. You are going to be using this information. So you're going to need the angle between the first segment, the second segment, or the angular rotation, but also the amount of segments you will get as a result. Now since you don't have me or you're going to actually create an arc yourself. This is because in geometry, you can create an art triangles. So I'm going to create a triangle, but I can use in order to determine the center of a circle. So for this, we actually need three lines because the triangle, they are going to need a cell reference is the one that you may use as a reference, the second segment or the segment that you have at the middle. So as you notice part of days, you will be using the line tool. Recommend Andy upset the following way. Now since you're using the line tool or demand, you migrate faces without actually great and the reference. So something important for you to keep in mind is how it's going to look once they finished a reference. So once you get this, you won't be able to copy the same element multiple times in order to create an arc or a circle. Now as well, you can do this at the middle. Or in another words, if you have a middle, the structure layer recreating for that you have in your drawing, is that the one that you need to create first History Center. So you can use that one as a reference in order to create Antarctic Circle. And the process is going to be pretty much the same because we're still going to need the angle of rotation or the angle between the elements. Now once you have the ER, you can simply add the component whichever way you want. So you can use the solid tools if you explore the components, but also you can use the intersection of the faces if you intersect the components. However, another use for the face, their use as a reference is that this one can be used as a reference for the intersections. However, the best advice that I can give you is that you actually cut faces within the component. Because if you don't do this, you will get a lot of lines. As a result, the faces are great as a reference, I can actually replace another component in the components. You're going to get a result that is going to be very good, as well as a weak signal having the reference that request to use in order to play the component and also the element within the model is that you can use bot in order to keep element the element. Because in a sketch, the most useful thing that you're going to have, one modelling are the references, the Ukraine, whatever you already have while working your models, regardless of what are these references are located. So this is the reason why down the liter references while working in the models. Sometimes when I finished a lot is you are going to get as a result, something like this. So how did this issue as well, my work in elements that are given to you by somebody else or in another words, when regrading an existing model. Or when you want to create your model with a lot more precision when it comes to measurements minus specifications of your models. Our projects. 117. Creating a Gazebo: Now in this lesson, our exercise, I'm going to go into grade is like a CBA. Now, discuss CBO is going to be a little bit complicated because I go into grade or CBO from scratch by creating all the components of a CBO. So the first thing that I'm going to create a cell reference that I can use throughout the exercise for today segway to use the Polygonal to recommend as well as the tape to or Command Enter the gray guidelines. But also through, remember, you can use the tape to recommend in order to scale this polyline. So this means that if you have a specific measurements that you want to use, you can actually scale them right away. Now the guidelines will be very important in this case because they will allow you to visualize what I'm doing throughout the exercise. But also they will allow you to see where I'm going to place the elements that are going to be creating for this model, as well as the references that are going to be using in order to equate the components because this polyline is going to have the same size. So in another words, you can work in one of the triangles independently from the others, which will make editing a lot easier, softer gradient the references. I'm going to start grading the first components that are going to be using omega C bar, which in this case will be the columns. Now cyclic sino and abroad they do recommend will allow you to create arrays if you have a reference such as a circle or a polyline. Now it's why when working on this license for this course, also going to be using the measurements. So you can see on the user interface, but also I'm going to show as much as possible the reference or resource or the exercise throughout the exercise. Now when working with a model, they are going to recreate or gray. One advice that I can give you, his work on the basic structure. What are the basic shapes? First, speakers hadn't data right away, makes certain things a little bit more complicated later on. Now once that I have the basic structure, I'm going to start working on the decorations independently. But also since I have the basic structure right now, what I can use from one part of the gas CBO on the other. So because of this, I can reuse a few elements and the different parts of the casino. You send the axis will be pretty useful when moving elements because you won't be able to avoid creating unnecessary lines. But also the move tool argument can be used on the faces, the lines, but also the vertexes, or in another words, the end points of the shapes. And this is something that will also be pretty useful even if you're not using the axis. Why moving our phase line or a vertex. Now in this case, I will be at epidemic component just a little bit by assembly or more specifically, based on the tangent x. Now as well, you're going to notice that I'm not being very picky with some declarations of thing, a CVA after finishing the declaration. So because CBO, or at least the basic, I'm going to start working on the roof. So for today is going to be using the same basic reference. Now these reports and decorations are going to be based on the size of the main structure. However, when I got CBO, you don't really need are complicated structure. So because of this, I'm going to change a little bit in their structure throughout the exercise. Now, a quick side note, I going to be using quite a lot, copy control C and paste in place in order to avoid doing the same thing, man, at different times. As well as you notice, I'm going to be using quite a lot Philip Alon hormone specifically lip alone, the blue axis, because this helps when it comes to visualize what is subtracted by the roof without having to use the liner for the text. Or in another words, the layers. As well and go into gray main structure of the roof, as well as the additional supports where you can add on the roof. So this is going to take a little bit of time because I want to be as precise as possible, which is going to make this a little bit harder. Once I added the main references, I'll take a CBO. Or in another words, once I edit, I guess CBO, like it was going to be used on a different project with different space or size. Now in my case, since this is a modeling exercise, I'm going to do two things. One is first grade the model. And the second thing will be actually showing you how you can edit this model in case they want to change the measurements in order to reuse the model and different projects that you're going to be working on. So in most exercises you're going to see light gray, the base version. And then I just added the Persian in order to give you a different solution. Now so quick sign-up based in place will not only allow you to basically objects on the same place, but also they will allow you to use the following me right away. Because by default the lines will be selected after you use based in place as well. You can see me using this method will also allow you to create multiple shapes at the same time, which is actually pretty useful in this case. Now in this case, I'm going to use this as a component. So I don't have the greater multiple times. Now as well, I'm going to place the roof ways. And as a reference, Let's suppose I already graded on the facebow. Or in another words I'm going to use the support has a reference, my place and the roof of this gazebo. So in order to represent this model a little bit better, I'm going to add the shadows, but also and is seen. As well as you notice, this may look very well when it comes to modeling, but it hasn't been graded in order to create details for construction. So this is something else I'm going to do once I've finished the basic modeling. Now with all this being said, you can also add different elements that you can use for declarations, such as, for example, by different level for the floor that is going to differentiate, that gets C will run the rest of the landscape that you're designing. So I'm going to create a different floor. 118. Creating Another Gazebo base on the Existing one Part 1: And now just going to grow in an alternative that are referred to as CBO. So the roof as a whole is going to have two elements and the shapes are going to be different between one or the other. Also cyclic sign-on. Within this exercise, I'm going to be adding nodes because everything that I use in these lessons is already going on in the course. So these lessons are going to be more visual. Notes make this exercises less confusing. That's a quick sign on. In order to make this a little bit easier, I'm going to be using flip alone on the blue axis, so I don't have to change the visual style. So in order to grade the main shape, I'm going to use DR and the extrusion. Now you can create the extrusion in a single goal or you can do both at the instructions. Separated, man going to separate it because I'm going to be using as a reference, the bottom face or the roof may not have to create the structure. A quick side note, when you intersect faces, you will be creating all the lines that you need in order to intersect the face. And as you remember, you can use well edges in order to combine individual edges. Or in another words, you can use this option in order to combine individual edges, suggests this one's in order to create a single polyline. Sorry, go into gray. The elements that are going to be used in order to support the roof facing as a reference in the face of the roof. Important when gradient-based rules are the references that you can use another gravy elements, but also that you can use front of intersections. Now something that is going to make this roof a little bit easier is the fact that this rule has a equal segments right now. In other words, each of these segments can be used as a component or they can be used in another query, the components. So once I created the main shape and grow into greater shape, but it's going to cover most of these functions, the roof. And in order to add the thickness of this element, I'm going to create a face that I can use with a felony. I'm going to grade this rule by using the reference that I've been using so far. And this profile. Once that I created the main structure, my gradient, this components are also going to grab the element that are going to use in order to avoid any filtration. And I'm going to grade this element by creating a reference, but also by using the push and pull and the option that is called Intersect faces. 119. Creating Another Gazebo base on the Existing one Part 2: Now after finishing the main shape and going to create a second shape or the second part of the roof mango into place. The second part of the rule based on the structure of their main butter, the roof. Now this roof is going to be created pretty much the same way as the original roof or take a CBA. So there's not going to be that much of a difference except the declaration. Are they structured but you have for the second part of the roof. So I'm going to do all of these myosin components and groups. As well as you might have noticed an edit in some other shapes. And I'm going to do the same thing with other elements within this model. Now it's a great sign on the structure that holds the roof is a little bit simpler, but the main roof, because this rho is very small as well, you can say that there is a declaration that is based on the declaration. They are already using the casino. That's why I'm going to create a shape in a very simple way. Because I'm just going to create a component that I'm going to copy on the rest of the faces. So with this in mind, I will be able to have the basic shape men are going to be using. Even if Final going to add right away that thickness of this element. Now once that I finished with the roof, I'm going to add an element on top that I didn't add to the original roof at the casino. So I can create an element that I can place on top undiscussable, but also that I can use it in the other guy, CBO. Now as well, you can see that since the casinos are using the same measurements, you can have two alternatives to the same design. Which means that you can have alternatives that you can use for this project or for any other project. I'm going to make a few changes in order to differentiate what Angus eco-friendly other, one of these is going to be very simple, while the other one is going to have a little bit more decoration, or in another words, is going to be a little bit more expensive and a little bit more specific. Now cyclic sign-on, you can use this afternoon and smooth in order to avoid showing any unnecessary lines within the BU. And last but not least, I'm going to finish like a CBO by adding the materials that also played in the BU because of the change, because CBO. So now I'm just going to make a few corrections in both of the rules. What are the guys Sibos, which is going to include any corrections on the other roof in order to make it look a little bit more complex. Now in this case, I'm just going to write any reference that I can use in order to use them all to recommend, which is something that we're going to do at both ends of this element. However, you can also try to create interfaces base underlying argument. However, if you already have the reference, you don't need to do this. So you can create an unnecessarily reference that you're going to need. Or you can simply use the line to recommend in order to create the faces. And if you have any issues, once you already have the reference, you can still use the move to argument. Massive quick cyano. If you need to make corrections, select this other one thing that you need to keep in mind. So references are in a few cases. If you don't get the result that you're looking for, you need to use the move to argument in order to move the product access to a position with your tracing. So instead of trying to create a face, uh, you know that SketchUp is not grading. You can simply add a phase based on the references that you want to use. We can set schedule is very precise. Marrow, so he might not agree some faces that you think that escalator is going to create automatically. So this is a worker that might be useful to you. Now once that I finished the correction, also going to place the elements on top of the roof. The last thing that I'm going to do is place once again, any guideline. But I believe it just as a good practice in case that this model going to be used by somebody else or in case that this model is going to be useful later on. So because of these, you can also create guidelines for the height of the elements, which also means they can add dimensions to a few elements within a model in order to make sure that there's somebody else can see what you have done. But also that you can use in order to remember the measurements that you use in order to create a model. 120. Creating a Sofa with a Low Polygon Count: This exercise Mangoid operator so far, very sexually bill based on different parts. Or in another words, it has a more current the site. So the first thing that I'm going to do is actually create the components that are going to be using for the sofa. But also I'm going to be grading the main shape that I'm going to use to make this a little bit easier because each of the parts of the sofa, and he's going to label these in a different position. Additionally, this part of the sulfur will be different because of the style. So because of these ones that I copy this basic shape on the model, I would rather this component before using my DNA, whether it's compiling. Also the shape is now going to be very complex. Or in another words, it's going to have a low polygon. So because of this and go into Gray, Johnson and small profit in order to make it more natural. Now after finishing for this part of the sofa and also going to grade the field of every part of the sofa as independent components based on a reference, but also ones that are finished. I'm going to replace these components within the main component. That's a quick sino, changing the units is pretty useful if you're creating furniture or any other elements, requires accurate measurements. Now as well, I'm going to be grading and other shape and it's going to go over on the sofa. Now you're going to create this shape in different parts. However, in order to make this a little bit easier, I'm just going to grab the top separately from the bottom. So I'm going to do this the following way. When you suddenly are due or command in R to add more thing though to an element, you'll notice that the tangent of the arc will be different depending on where you're storing in the yard. So once they're finished, part of the shape, I'm just going to copy part of this shape in order to place on the top. Now with this in mind, as you notice, I'm not grading curves for the four edges of the shapes. Now I can do this, my son to follow me. How in this case, I just want to make this a little bit simpler. Now instead of finished with the shape and just go into a little bit this sofa in order to add more space for sitting. Now once they're finished editing the shapes and just going to say before continuing with the rest of the sofa. 121. Creating The Sofa Seat: Now this exercise, I'm going to continue with the sofa hormone specifically, I'm going to create the pillows of the sofa. Not going to create the cushion of the sofa by actually creating our prefer that actually has curves. So what I didn't do with the main shapes of the sofa, I'm going to do them with the cushions. You can see that they find ways in which you can grade this type of shapes. Gouache sign-on if you use less segments on this R, or if you use just a line, the result will be more simple. Therefore, it's going to use different methods if we want to add more detail. Once that shape is greater. Now something important for you to know is that depending on the lines they are using, the following, the result can be a little bit more complicated. So whenever I said I can give you, is that you can actually use less segments on DRX. But also if you're using a profile like this, is that you actually use as a reference, the inside lines instead of the outside lines. This means that instead of using the Internet upset towards the interior, you actually create the interior first and then you create the upset towards the upside. So you can use as a reference in a retrograde profile. So I'm going to do this this way. So you can see that the result is still needs a little bit of work when it comes to editing the shape. And also the hidden lines will reveal the actual amount of lines that we're creating right now. So that lines the way you follow me. If you're not using a continuous line. And this is Santa Anna yoga nowadays. And the way that some phase separator, a big signer using continuous lines will also make the shape look a little bit better at the end. So making sure that they have the less amount of lines as possible on the path that you're using. Or in another words on the lines there is and as a reference for the follow me or guarantee that the shape looks a little bit cleaner. Now when they send mine, I'm just going to remove any unnecessary lines, but also every unnecessary faces on this part of the shape. After please, and Joe's going to copy these faces on the other side of the element. So I can say a little bit of time. Additionally, this component will change the software even more because of the space that it will pay from the other elements. So with this in mind, I'm going to place this cushion vertically and horizontally on the sofa. And as you notice because of these questions or when need to add it once again, this shapes or in another words like components we already graded. Man just going to add in the rest of the elements, use the gray, the sulfur based on the addition of the cushion for this model. So with this in mind and also going to add in my basic shapes that are great at first in order to make this model more cohesive. Now continue with this model and also go into grade. And I've seen have me for grading the same. I'm going to change the field of view and also are going to be adding shadows to this model. So once they're finished with this handle is going to go to the incense panel in order for gravy a scene. And also I'm going to be out in the materials. What are the components and elements within the sofa? So as you know, what is the result is going to be a slightly organic, but also with very straight edges and the shapes in which I didn't use parks with a felony. So what this means is that you will have different results depending on the methods that you use. If you need something that it has a lower amount of polygons, you can use the first method, malathion is starting when Theta, we can actually use the second method, even if you have to clean up a little bit more. 122. Creating another Cushion for The Sofa: Now this lesson, I'm going to continue with this so far. However, what I'm going to grade his occlusion that you can use with this so far. So I'm going to use the same lines when another words, I'm going to use the same path for my follow me in order to create this shape. Now, you're going to notice you send this matter. Usually it's more faces. They're the ones that you want. However you're going to see. Now you can make really good use of the face as an agent's greater this way. In other words, the faces and edges, greater pay you something fell on me. Now a very clean the shape. I'm going to turn this shape into a group so I can use them for both sides. Well, I'm going to turn both of these groups into AI component. So I can use this scale to recommend. Scale to recommend you send them that you can use in the different phases of the model. However, the result is going to be different based on the faces that you select. Now if you don't like the result of profit, but you're using, you can always create a new profile. So you can create a different shape. So instead of using this component, I can create a different component that I can use in order to grade the below. That's a quick signer. You don't need to heal all the phases because you can copy these faces on the foresights. Now that I finished both sides of the pillar, I'm going to repeat the same process of turning the shape into a group so I can use it for both sides. So the pillow, but also I'm going to turn this pillow into a component. Now as well, with this below, you're able to change the scale if you want to. However, sending for you notice nowadays, instead, if you assign a material, the material is going to be a scale based on the size of the phases in which the material is assigned. So I'm just going to apply the same materials that I have been using so far on this component. And I'm going to do this without using this scale argument. This pillow. I'm going to be adding a third component or at a variation of what you can do when working with shapes such as this one. So what I mean is that you can actually use a two argument from the sandbox, which is called love or The Press faces to shape after Ryan mentioned. So if you use this, you will be able to add a little bit of softness to the pillow. However, if you want to make this more precise, you will need a gray, additional edges you can use. Or in another words, additional subdivisions that you can use in order to add other groups that make the pillow. With this in mind, I'm going to grade a few faces that I can use in order to grade intersections where the groups within the component as well. The more phases the better, but it will be more taxing on the hardware that you're using. So why is that greater than three sections? I'm going to be able to use once again, the same argument in order to add more detail to the below. In order to avoid making changes after editor below, I'm going to use this to recommend within a small radius in order to make sure that the changes that I do not touch the first size of the group. And the last thing that I'm going to do is actually replace the previous group where the group that I just added it. So I'm just going to erase this settlement before copying the component on the other side. Now once again, you can change the scale if you want to, and you will need to keep in mind that this changes the appearance or the material and also the appearance of these components in order to make another pillow. The best thing that you can actually do in sexual exploding components and the groups before you send the scale and then recreate the crops and the components before other than the pillow, just to say they buy now. Or you can simply use the Follow me where the front lines or in another words, how different path. 123. Creating Other Cushions for the Sofa: On this part of the exercise, I'm going to create another variation of this component are also going to add more detail to my knees and the same method that I use. However, I'm going to use this method in different phases. As a quick side note in edit to edit this component without making changes to the previous one. I'm going to make this component unique. And as well, something else that you can do by using the same two men sexually at the four sides of the component, which is something that you can do without actually using them all to argument. So in order to do this, I will write data component because they still recommend actually functions based on the z-axis of the absolute coordinate system. They have any SketchUp now, so you notice this is going to change the positive value on the z-axis as well as the negative value on the z-axis. So in order to avoid things that can turn into a group part of the shape before using once again, the same to recommend. So with this in mind, I can use this to recommend with a small radius in order to avoid making changes. On the other side. Also the number of ageism. So deflations along with a radius of these two men will determine how good these elements are going to look at the end. Now once that I've finished with these two edges, so the shape, I'm going to repeat the same process with the other two sites. Now once again, my number of pages or so divisions along with the radius of this tube or command will determine the level of quality that these elements are going to have at the end. These elements are going to have at the end. A quick signer, if you're coming from advocate, you're going to see that you're not able to select objects closer zooming in and out fundamental space. So in order to select many phases are elements at the same time. You will need to add elements to the selection, such as in this case. Now the reason why I'm making this selection is because I'm going to create a group that I can actually use in a retrograde and new element for the pillow. And in order to make these elements, I will be using the following me because it's easier to use what elements like this one. So the first thing they're going to gray is the phase in which I'm going to use the following me. And then I go into gray the path by hail. In this phase, I can select the pad, base and double-click. Now with this in mind, I can copy the path and then just simply the later phase. Or I can use Control Z to undo any change to the curb as well. I'm going to turn this accrue, the phase in which you're going to follow me. So there the shape can be created within a group. And then I can paste that path and I'm going to use for the follow me within this group. So I can immediately use the follow me. Because if you don't use it right away, the elements the right pace and no longer going to be selected. Now once I created the shape, you're going to see that you can simply use once again, the soft ten pages panel in order to improve the appearance of the shape. And as a result, we're going to get a pillow and it's going to look for that now, for a component. Now as well, with the other component, you can simply hide the unnecessary lines or you can simply explore the groups. So you can use less often HHS Panel, which is the same thing that you can do with the other component. Now cyclic signer. This method can be used in many different ways, as long as you have that basic shape. So with all this means, say, you can use three methods in another query, this type of elements for the furniture, but also on the level of detail where one, because h is the UI Faces and vertex sets you are going to have, which also means that the materials are going to be added to multiple phases within a single element. So a lot of this is going to make a model bigger when it comes to the size and also more expensive for taxane. So the hardware that you're using.